Tips Category RSS Feed | Tips RSS Feed on en Launch Media Network Digimon Links Guide: What are the Best Capture Events?,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/z/w/c/zwclj1508476319-3a57a.png ws5ym/digimon-links-guide-what-are-the-best-capture-events Fri, 20 Oct 2017 11:47:32 -0400 Craig Snyder

Every now and then, special events come to Digimon Links that give players once-in-a-long-time opportunities to try their luck at getting their hands on some of the most powerful Digimon or rarest items in the game.

In this guide, we'll show you everything you need to know about these special events -- and even let you know which current capture event is most worth your DigiStones!

What are Capture Events in Digimon Links?

Capture events are sometimes referred to as Gacha or gashapon. In Japanese, a gashapon is a vending machine that dispenses capsule toys. You know those capsule machines at the entrance/exit of grocery stores where you can win the 50-cent jewelry? That's the American equivalent to Gacha.

But since Digimon Links was first released in Japan, these terms stuck to what we are now calling capture events in Digimon Links.

A capture event is a special event held in-game, usually for anywhere between a week to a month, that allows you to gamble your DigiStones for big prizes. These are most often events where you can capture rare Digimon, but there are also events where you can capture rare materials like chips.

In our Digimon Links Beginner's Guide, we specifically mention that you should save your stones and try to use them as sparingly as possible for things like reviving your Digimon. You want to save them for these capture events because the things you can get from these events are often times invaluable. The current ATK/DEF Chip Capture event, shown above, is a great example.

Current Digimon Links Capture Events

With the game still being new, Digimon Links is currently hosting some really awesome capture events. The quality of stuff you can get from these capture events is significantly higher than normal in celebration of the North American release of the game.

Release Anniversary Megafest Capture

This capture event ends on October 30. In the Release Anniversary Megafest Capture, you are guaranteed one Mega in every 10 pulls. Many players are investing all of their early DigiStones in trying their luck on snagging an Omegamon.

Leader Skill Capture

This capture event ends on October 23. You're guaranteed one Digimon with a Leader Skill for every 10 pulls. Leader Skills are some of the most powerful skills in the game, and they're non-transferable, so this is a pretty prestigious event. Here are some of the available Leader Skills in this event:

  • One-Hit Wonder: Major Boost to Critical Rate
  • HP Ultrabooster: Major Boost to HP
  • Ancient Lupine Lunge: Major Boost to Attack
  • Ancient Dragon's Blessing: Major Boost to Defense
  • Ancient Arcane Tracery: Major Boost to S. Attack
  • Ancient Protective Array: Major Boost to S. Defense
  • Speed Star Gamma: Major Boost to Speed
  • Ultra Radar Patch: Major Boost to Accuracy
ATK/DEF Chip Capture

This capture event ends on October 23. You're guaranteed one pickup chip for every 10 pulls. Chips are materials you can install in your Digimon to give them stat increases. Chips offer some of the best end-game upgrades in Digimon Links, so this is something you'll eventually need. Chip captures are some of the rarest and most valuable events in the game.

Rare Capture

Rare Capture is a regular event. You're guaranteed to get a Rookie Digimon (or higher) with every pull.

Link Capture

Link Capture is a regular event. You're guaranteed an In-Training II Digimon with each pull, saving you the time in raising babies in your Garden. It's a good way to raise fodder Megas for Awakening purposes.

Which Digimon Links Capture Event is the Best?

This question really depends on where you're at in the game. For starters, don't waste time on the regular events. Rare Capture and Link Capture are, in my opinion, a waste of valuable DigiStones. Not to mention, they'll be around for an indefinite amount of time.

For brand new players, the Release Anniversary Megafest Capture is by far the best. The sooner you have a party full of three Megas, the sooner you can power through quests and mid- to end-game content.

For experienced players, dump your DigiStones into the ATK/DEF Chip Capture event while it lasts. Chips are extremely powerful and players of the Japanese version of the game have said that chip captures don't come up often. These aren't easy to come by. If you're a new player with a ton of DigiStones, you could also throw some into this event for the future. Chips are always going to be useful, and guaranteeing at least one pickup chip for every 10 pulls is huge. New players may not have a desperate need for chips now, but you'll eventually need them to clear certain quests.

If you're planning to play Digimon Links over a long-term period of time, my suggestion is that you put the majority of your DigiStones into the chip capture until it expires on October 23. You'll have another whole week to put DigiStones into the Megafest capture until it disappears on October 30.


When it comes to DigiStones, these events are what you want to have them saved up for. While there are a lot of other tempting uses for DigiStones, having them in maximum quantities so that you're guaranteed a one-out-of-10 pull is a serious advantage.

Found this information helpful? Check out some of our other Digimon Links guides:

Digimon Links Guide: How to Farm Friendship,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/a/r/k/ark2y1508476369-cf427.png m2egs/digimon-links-guide-how-to-farm-friendship Fri, 20 Oct 2017 11:35:54 -0400 Craig Snyder

Digimon Links is filled with many different progression forms for your Digimon. End-game progression will require that you awaken your Digimon. However, to do so, you'll need to have maxed out another stat first: Friendship.

Friendship is one of the first and simplest forms of progression in Digimon Links, and in this guide, we'll explain what Friendship is, what it can do for your Digimon, and how you can grind it in the quickest way possible.

What is Friendship in Digimon Links?

Friendship is a stat that increases the more you use your Digimon.

You can find the Friendship stat on your Digimon's statistic page (to the right of HP). Here, you can see our MetalGreymon has a friendship of 51 out of 210. As your Digimon increases in level, your Friendship cap also increases. The maximum friendship you can have for any Digimon is 300.

For every 30 Friendship points your Digimon earns (so at 30, 60, 90, 120, 150, 180, 210, 240, 270, and 300), you receive a boost to all other Digimon stats. The Digivolution stage of your Digimon determines the strangth at which the increase of this stat is modified. Here's a chart to help you better understand:

Digivolution Stage Stat Increase Maximum Friendship
Rookie 3% 90
Champion 5% 150
Ultimate 7% 210
Mega 10% 300

As you can see, these bonuses are linear (+2% stat increase and +60 max Friendship) until you get to Mega, where it's +3% stat increase and +90 max Friendship. That being said, it's a huge advantage to have a Mega Digimon at 300 Friendship.

How to Get Friendship in Digimon Links

The two ways of farming Friendship in Digimon Links are both very simple.

The first, and easiest, method is by simply tapping on the Digimon in your farm. You will see three Digimon roaming around your farm at all times, and they're always the three in your immediate party.

Once per day, you can tap on these Digimon to get +1 Friendship for each of them.

The other way to increase Friendship in DL is by bringing your Digimon into combat, which can easily be achieved through questing.

From what I've experienced, you will earn 1 or 2 Friendship points per non-Leader Digimon and 3 or 6 Friendship points per Leader Digimon. I'm not sure what determines this multiplier, but I've not personally had it go any higher. Other players have experienced as much as 9 Friendship points per Leader and 3 per non-Leader.

Best Places to Grind Friendship in Digimon Links

Based on my own experience and the advice of others on forums and discussion boards, repeating Stage 3 of Area 3 is an easy way to grind Friendship points.

You should be able to breeze through this stage if you're using your level 40 MetalGreymon. Make the Digimon whose Friendship you need maxed the Leader of your party for the Leader bonus. Beat 3-3 over and over, and you should be getting +6 Friendship points each time. 

For more experienced players, Area 9 (any stage) is also a great place to farm Friendship. Any stage that costs 2 Stamina is optimal for grinding, but these are the two places that I've found to be most efficient.


Maxing out your Friendship can be a long and painful process if you're trying to do it for a full party, but having the information in this guide handy can definitely help decrease that grind. Remember to tap on those Digimon in your farm daily as it's the simplest way to rack up those points!

If you're looking for more information and tips on how to improve, check out our other Digimon Links guides:

Digimon Links Guide: How to Get and Use Leader Skills,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/t/r/l/trlot1508476401-42fac.png 66vw3/digimon-links-guide-how-to-get-and-use-leader-skills Fri, 20 Oct 2017 11:23:19 -0400 Craig Snyder

In Digimon Links, there are three types of Digimon skills: Signature, Legacy, and Leader. Of those three, Leader Skills are the most sought after. These skills can buff your Digimon to strength levels incomparable to Digimon without them. Not every Digimon comes equipped with a Leader Skill, though, so understanding its value is important.

As you progress through the game, you'll come to a point where you have that Mega you've been searching for. But does it have the optimal Leader Skill? If not, you're nowhere near as strong as you could be. In this guide, we'll introduce you to what Leader Skills are and show you the current Leader Skills that exist in the game.

What are Leader Skills in Digimon Links?

A Leader Skill is a powerful passive skill that your Digimon can acquire but at a very rare chance. These skills are some of the strongest in the game. Every time you capture or Digivolve a Digimon, there's a chance that the one you get may have a Leader Skill.

Unlike Signature and Legacy skills, Leader Skills cannot be transferred to another Digimon. However, you can use the Digimon as your Base Digimon (when Awakening) and Digivolve into a useful Mega. This is a way to effectively move a useful Leader Skill on a useless Digimon into a more useful Mega while retaining the skill.

While there is no public data available to know the exact chance at which you'll get a Leader Skill during evolution, there is currently a Leader Skill Capture event going on for just a few more days. If you're looking to guarantee yourself a Digimon with a Leader Skill, check out our Digimon Links Event Capture Guide.

What are Leader Skills in Digimon Links?

With Digimon Links only having been out for a few weeks in North America, no one knows yet if all Leader Skills from the Japanese version of the game are being included or if new ones that don't appear in the Japanese version exist. However, due to the aforementioned capture event's existence, we can confirm many Leader Skills already.

Known Digimon Links Leader Skills

Here are the Leader Skills whose names we know of so far and exist in the North American version of the game. 

Name Level Description Effect %
One-Hit Wonder 4 Major Boost to Critical Rate 7
HP Ultrabooster 5 Major Boost to HP 12
Lupine Lunge 3 Minor Boost to Attack 5
Mighty Lupine Lunge 4 Moderate Boost to Attack 7
Ancient Lupine Lunge 5 Major Boost to Attack 12
Dragon's Blessing 3 Minor Boost to Defense 5
Mighty Dragon's Blessing 4 Moderate Boost to Defense 7
Ancient Dragon's Blessing 5 Major Boost to Defense 12
Arcane Tracery 3 Minor Boost to S. Attack 5
Mighty Arcane Tracery 4 Moderate Boost to S. Attack 7
Ancient Arcane Tracery 5 Major Boost to S. Attack 12
Protective Array 3 Minor Boost to S. Defense 5
Mighty Protective Array 4 Moderate Boost to S. Defense 7
Ancient Protective Array 5 Major Boost to S. Defense 12
Speed Star Alpha 3 Minor Boost to Speed 5
Speed Star Beta 4 Moderate Boost to Speed 7
Speed Star Gamma 5 Major Boost to Speed 12
Ultra Radar Patch 5 Major Boost to Accuracy 10


Unknown Digimon Links Leader Skills

Here are the Leader Skills that exist in the Japanese version of the game and we expect also exist in the North American version, but have yet to discover.

Level Description Effect %
3 Minor Boost to Critical Rate 2
4 Moderate Boost to Critical Rate 5
3 Minor Boost to HP 5
4 Moderate Boost to HP 7
3 Minor Boost to Accuracy 2
4 Moderate Boost to Accuracy 5
4 Boost HP of party members to same type as Leader 15
4 Boost Attack of party members to same type as Leader 15
4 Boost Defense of party members to same type as Leader 15
4 Boost S. Attack of party members to same type as Leader 15
4 Boost S. Defense of party members to same type as Leader 15
4 Boost Speed of party members to same type as Leader 15
4 Boost Accuracy of party members to same type as Leader 13
4 Boost Critical Rate of party members to same type as Leader 13
4 Increase Null resistance ?
4 Increase Fire resistance ?
4 Increase Water resistance ?
4 Increase Thunder resistance ?
4 Increase Nature resistance ?
4 Increase Light resistance ?
4 Increase Darkness resistance ?
4 Increase resistance to Poison ?
4 Increase resistance to Confusion ?
4 Increase resistance to Paralyze ?
4 Increase resistance to Sleep ?
4 Increase resistance to Stun ?
4 Increase resistance to Skill-Seal ?
4 Increase resistance to Instant Death ?
4 Attack up when HP at 100% 25
4 Defense up when HP at 100% 25
4 S. Attack up when HP at 100% 25
4 S. Defense up when HP at 100% 25
4 Speed up when HP at 100% 25
4 Accuracy up when HP at 100% 15
4 Critical Rate up when HP at 100% 25
4 Attack up when HP at 20% or less 30
4 Defense up when HP at 20% or less 30
4 S. Attack up when HP at 20% or less 30
4 S. Defense up when HP at 20% or less 30
4 Speed up when HP at 20% or less 30
4 Accuracy up when HP at 20% or less 20
4 Critical Rate up when HP at 20% or less 30


Leader Skills are extremely valuable in Digimon Links, so remember to explore all options before doing away with your "junk" Digimon. Look into the Digivolution tree because that Digimon may just be able to evolve into a Mega that synergizes well with your Leader Skill.

Looking for more tips, tricks, and strategies? We've got many other Digimon Links guides that you may be interested in:

Grim Dawn Ashes Of Malmouth Guide: Helping or Defeating Ugdall,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/c/o/v/cov1-1e925.jpg q5uih/grim-dawn-ashes-of-malmouth-guide-helping-or-defeating-ugdall Fri, 20 Oct 2017 11:08:45 -0400 Ty Arthur

Ashes Of Malmouth offers essentially more of the same Grim Dawn experience you already know and love, but for fans of this exceedingly grim fantasy ARPG, that's very much a good thing!

With new areas come more factions, and of course, more ultra difficult bosses and rare loot. Along the way, you can pick up some quests... or turn those quests down and annihilate the quest givers.

That happens to be the case with Ugdall, an ancient spirit trapped beneath the Ugdenbog. Below, we cover how to find Ugdall in the twisted bog's labyrinth, as well as your options for taking his quest or setting it aside to banish the restless spirit.

Looking for help with builds using the new Ashes Of Malmouth mastery classes instead? We've got you covered here:

Finding Udgall's Tomb in Grim Dawn

Just getting to Ugdall's tomb in Ashes of Malmouth is sort of a quest all on its own. The entrance to the tomb is found through Ugdenbog in Act V after kicking off the Ashes Of Malmouth questline by talking to Inquisitor Creed in Fort Ikon.

Use Creed's pendant to quench the fire blocking off the north road out of the Burrwich Estates (which is best reached through the Burrwich Villiage rift, not the Warden's Cellar, even though its closer on the map).

After you've reached the new Ashes Of Malmouth area, kill the giant Carraxus beast in the underground segment of Gloomwald to take his heart. Offer up the heart and Creed's pendant to the witches at Coven's Refuge, and then you can finally get into Ugdenbog. From there, you have an obnoxiously long walk through the gigantic swampy forest.

 Finding Ugdall's Tomb

The entrance to Ugdall's Tomb is a long trek past the Ugdenbog rift further north, beyond the section where you find the three captured Coven sisters.

Annoyingly, the entrance isn't actually marked "Ugdall's Tomb." You are instead looking for an open cave entrance in the brambles marked "Ruins Entrance." Just look for anything like a cave with some broken statues, because it may spawn at a different point than where it appeared in my playthrough.

Accepting Ugdall's Quest or Defeating Him

For all your traveling efforts, there's a ruined shrine to be found immediately after the entrance. You can restore the shrine and get yourself a new constellation point in the tomb there, but it requires a full 3/3 upgraded Ectoplasm and full 4/4 upgraded Chilled Steel to restore.

After the shrine, break through the crumbling walls to fully explore the tomb. There's a bunch of skeletons and ghosts here, but they are pushovers and will barely offer any resistance. In the final room is a chest with some rare loot, and the ghost, Ugdall.

 Meeting Ugdall

If you agree to Ugdall's quest, you need to go back into the huge Ugdenbog and slaughter Ancient Wendigos across the area (regular Wendigos won't cut it) until you get a Wendigo Spirit.

You are in for a long haul on that front, as Wendigo Spirit is a rare drop and there aren't a ton of mobs around that drop it either. When you finally get the drop, bring it back to Ugdall, which you can trade for Aetherial missives. 

Now you're asking yourself... what happens if I say no to Ugdall? Don't just pick the "I Want No Part In This" option as it ends the dialog but doesn't do anything. Instead, say you want to attack him and get ready for a battle.

Ugdall's base level is 55, but he's not as tough as some of the Chthonian bosses from the base game. He throws out attacks in an outward star pattern that need to be avoided, occasionally creates a cursed blood circle around himself, and summons frost undead. You'll want to be at least level 50 to tackle him.

If you say no to Ugdall and kill him, you are rewarded with a Wendigo Spirit (which is odd, since he wanted one but apparently already had one), which is used in another quest line later in Barrowhelm. Killing him ends the Wrath Of Ugdenbog quest early, however.

 Claiming your Wendigo Spirit reward

Which path did you take with Ugdall in Ashes of Malmouth, and what strategy did you employ to kill him or farm Ancient Wendigos to complete his quest? Let us know in the comments below, and be sure to check out the rest of our Grim Dawn guides here.

Middle-earth: Shadow of War -- How to Destroy Tribe Monuments,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/s/h/a/shadow-war-header-83307.png eej5m/middle-earth-shadow-of-war-how-to-destroy-tribe-monuments Thu, 19 Oct 2017 15:19:11 -0400 Kengaskhan

Talion and Celebrimbor return for some more orc-slaying action in Middle-earth: Shadow of War, and this time, they’re out for more than just the captains’ heads. While clearing out an Outpost, the player might learn of what passes for art in orcish culture when they happen across a Tribe Monument.

The orcs erect these grisly Monuments to honor their Overlords, and given Talion’s undying grudge against orcs (and the fact that the Monuments are marked on your map), it’d be pretty reasonable to assume that you’re supposed to destroy them.

While you’ll find that your sword and bow aren't quite up to the task, destroying monuments in Shadow of War is actually pretty straightforward: just climb to the top of the Monument, hit the prompted button, and then Celebrimbor will destroy it with his wraith hammer.

Players will be rewarded with 250 experience points, a gem, the Vandal achievement/trophy (if it’s your first destroyed Monument), and the sight of orcs scrambling away in fear. So be sure to take advantage of their temporary confusion!


That's everything you need to know about destroying Tribe Monuments in Shadow of War! If you're looking for more tips, tricks, and strategies for SoW, make sure to check out our other Middle Earth: Shadow of War guides

Game Of Thrones Conquest Tips and Strategy Guide,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/g/o/t/got-a0333.jpg 3ai2c/game-of-thrones-conquest-tips-and-strategy-guide Thu, 19 Oct 2017 15:15:19 -0400 Ty Arthur

We all knew it was going to happen: the time-wasting, tap-happy, timer-battling mobile edition of Westeros has arrived for Android and iOS!

After the success of titles like Game Of War and Mobile Strike, it was no question anything branded with a popular franchise would get their own iteration, from Call Of Duty to Futurama, and now, of course, Game Of Thrones.

If you couldn't tell from the screenshots or trailer, this is literally any of a hundred other games of the exact same style with a George R.R. Martin coat of paint slapped on. While i'ts sort of weird that HBO would give out their coveted property for such a by-the-numbers freemium title, I'm sure it makes some (Sean) bean counter happy in the accounting department from all the microtransactions this game uses.

While there's probably never going to be a legitimately awesome GoT strategy title or RPG, at least we got the halfway decent Telltale series? I mean, it could be worse: this could be like Games Workshop freely tossing the Warhammer license to absolutely any untested mobile developer who so much as glances their general direction...

Get ready to pull out your wallet to speed up timers so that you can immediately run into even longer timers! Or you could follow our Game Of Thrones: Conquest tips and tricks here to avoid laying down the cash while building a digital empire based on incest, dwarf advisers, and weddings you really want to avoid attending.

Game Of Thrones Conquest Basics

The game's introduction holds your hand through the basics of building structures and waiting out timers to harvest food, wood, and gold. There are a few elements that are different from your standard Clash Of Clans building and battling game you need to watch out for, however.

First up is the peace shield -- there's no 48 hours of uninterrupted protection for you freemium strategy weenies like in the typical mobile game. You get a measly eight hours before other players can annihilate your kingdom, so use 'em wisely and upgrade as much as you can.

Of course, upgrading and training means timers. As far as I'm concerned, if you spend gold to reduce timers in a freemium mobile game, then the terrorists win, damn it! Be a man, have a little patience, and outwait those insidious developers who are counting on your short attention span to make a quick buck.

Quests And Upgrades

To keep your kingdom viable and updated without spending money, you need to be strategic in how you upgrade.

In general, only upgrade things like sawmills and farms when they are part of a daily quest, as you'll get more reward that way. If you get low on resources, send out your soldiers to gather them when you don't plan on being online. You can also attack AI enemies to get extra resources when necessary.

While gold is scarce, you can earn special timer speed-ups through quests, so save these for when there's a monster timer ahead and you need an upgrade quick.

You also get special rewards every four, six, eight, ten completed quests, so keep an eye on Tyrion to make sure you are always working towards quest completion.

Some of the special items can be temporary new peace shields for set amounts of time. With a horde of these, you can keep yourself protected from other predatory players.

From there, just follow the game's prompts, as it holds your hand pretty well for several hours of gameplay and always notifies you of what needs to be built next.

If you are familiar with this type of game at all, the tactics remain the same -- scout your enemy before attacking, join an Allegiance as soon as possible because there's strength in numbers, and upgrade the rarer troop types so you have an edge in battle.

With those tips in mind, you should be on your way to a seat on the (very uncomfortable) iron throne. Probably don't listen to anything Peter Baelish or Cersei Lannister tell you while you sit there, though. 

Have any other Game Of Thrones Conquest cheats or strategies we should try out to beat the timers and annihilate other players? Let us know your tips in the comments below!

Middle Earth: Shadow of War Guide -- Dominating Orcs with Iron Will,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/s/h/a/shadow-war-header-51fd8.jpg emoci/middle-earth-shadow-of-war-guide-dominating-orcs-with-iron-will Thu, 19 Oct 2017 10:49:21 -0400 Kieran Desmond

The ability to dominate and recruit orcs is one of the best features of Middle Earth: Shadow of War. Meticulously hand-picking the best of the best to join Talion’s conquering army makes for a consistently unique experience well after the story has come to a close.

Unfortunately, every now and then you’ll come across that one stubborn orc with the Iron Will trait which makes them immune to Cerebrimbor’s new Ring of Power. This guide will outline exactly what the Iron Will trait does, how to overcome it, and basically everything else you’ll need to know about this annoying trait.

What is Iron Will in Shadow of War?

Iron Will is a trait that can be randomly acquired by any orc when they are first generated in the game. Orcs with this trait are able to resist being recruited into your army after they have been Broken and Dominated.

Orcs can also gain Iron Will after a Betrayal, which can be triggered in several ways:

  • Cheating Death -- This is a hidden ability that some orcs possess. Cheating Death allows any orc, friend or foe, to come back from the dead following their death. After a dominated orc with the Cheating Death ability dies, they have the possibility of returning under the effects of Betrayal, blaming you for their death.
  • Humiliation -- This is another hidden ability some orcs possess. Humiliation allows them to pass up the opportunity of striking you down in Last Chance, instead choosing to taunt you and flee. Some of your followers may see this as a sign of weakness and betray you.
  • Talion’s Death -- Every time you die, there is a small chance that one of your Captain’s will lose faith and betray you.
  • Friendly Fire -- If you repeatedly attack an allied Captain, there is a chance that they will eventually turn against you.
  • Blood Brother -- Killing an allied Captain’s Blood Brother can cause them to instantly betray you. This is the case even if you send your ally to do the dirty work and kill his own Blood Brother.

How to Recruit Orcs With Iron Will in Shadow of War

Unlike orcs carrying the Unbreakable trait, there is a way to recruit Captain with Iron Will. First, you’ll have to track down and fight the Captain you want to recruit, reducing his health until he has the Broken status effect.

Now dominate your target and choose the Shame option. Shaming reduces the level of an orc, can add or remove abilites, and most importantly in this case -- Shaming an orc has a chance to remove the Iron Will trait.

It won’t always work on the first attempt, but if you’re determined to make your target serve the Bright Lord, then just keep trying. It’s important to know when to cut your losses when using this method. However, as losing buffs and gaining weaknesses through this process may render your chosen Captain completely useless.

With this knowledge, you’re now well equipped to go forth and build a terrifying army to rival Sauron’s. If you think we've missed anything crucial on how to dominate orc with Iron Will, leave a comment down below!

And for more on this Lord-of-the-Rings-inspired video game, check out some more Middle Earth: Shadow of War Guides! Here’s a few to get you started:

Etrian Odyssey 5: Ultimate Guide to Building Parties and Classes,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/w/v/w/wvw69ks-ttg3jvmxau-c549b.jpg ovj1o/etrian-odyssey-5-ultimate-guide-to-building-parties-and-classes Thu, 19 Oct 2017 10:11:31 -0400 Autumn Fish

If you hope to survive the Labyrinth of Yggdrasil in Etrian Odyssey 5: Beyond the Myth, you must have a party that consists of classes that compliment each other. Each character's strengths must be able to cover the others' weaknesses or you'll struggle a lot in battle.

There are actually tons of ways to go about this if you're clever about how you build your characters in Etrian Odyssey. Why? Because the different classes are not as cut and dry as they may first appear.

How to Build Classes in Etrian Odyssey 5

There are 10 classes in this installment of the Etrian franchise, but don't think that leaves you with only 10 options. Each class is capable of branching into one of two unique specializations, leaving you to pick from a total of 20 possible classes to fill your party.

As if that weren't enough, you gain the ability to swap classes on your characters partway through the first Stratum, which grants all four races the ability to become any of the 20 classes. That makes for an insane grand total of 80 race and class combinations.

Although, realistically, there are only two reasons you'd want to use one of the non-default races for a certain class. If you want to set up your party with classes that wouldn't net you every race by default, you'll want to make it with re-classed characters to fill in those gaps.

On the other hand, you may just want to optimize your party by playing to each race's strengths and pairing them with classes that synergize well with those race's base stats. After all, the extra edge racial stats give you might just be the edge you need to get through tough battles in Etrian 5.

Earthlian Racial Stats Etrian Odyssey 5 Ultimate Guide to Building Parties and Classes    Celestrian Racial Stats Etrian Odyssey 5 Ultimate Guide to Building Parties and Classes

Therian Racial Stats Etrian Odyssey 5 Ultimate Guide to Building Parties and Classes    Brouni Racial Stats Etrian Odyssey 5 Ultimate Guide to Building Parties and Classes

With so many options to choose from, where can you possibly start? Well, to begin with, it helps to understand what each class and specialization can do for your party.

Class Descriptions and Strengths in Etrian 5 
  • Fencer -- This class is a nimble Earthlian class that wields a rapier and shield and dances around enemies using a high dodge rate and quick, consecutive attacks.
    • Phantom Duelist -- This is an evade tank that focuses on drawing enemy agro and dodging attacks while dishing out a few of their own. Use a Therian for this to see insane dodge rates. Earthlians are also a good choice, however, if you don't want to sacrifice HP and Vit.
    • Chain Duelist -- This is a multi-hit attacker that focuses on dishing out raw consecutive damage during a single turn. The Therian is a perfect choice for maximizing the damage output of this class.
  • Dragoon -- This is a bulky Earthlian class that wields a shield and artillery cannon that can defend allies and gun down enemies.
    • Shield Bearer -- This tank class focuses on drawing damage away from the party with decoy bunkers and superior defense. Earthlians are a perfect fit for this class because of their insane health and vitality. However, you could go with a Brouni instead if you need a filler or are looking for more Magic Defense.
    • Cannon Bearer -- This is an offensive-oriented class that utilizes cannon fire to strategically blast enemies or inflict status debuffs. Therians are a race to pair with this specialization if you're looking for more damage.
  • Pugilist -- This is a vicious Earthlian class that uses the sheer power of melee to disable foes or deliver devastating attacks at the cost of HP.
    • Barrage Brawler -- This is a disabler that learns to hit enemy weak points to bind them. It also hits multiple times per round. Fittingly, Earthlians are a good choice for this class thanks to a superior Luck stat that helps you succeed at binding the enemy.
    • Impact Brawler -- This is a brawler that focuses all of their energy into one massive punch at the cost of HP. Therians are great for maximizing the damage potential of this class' devastating punches, though they don't have as much HP to work with.
  • Harbinger -- This is a sinister Earthlian class that wields a scythe and utilizes a miasma shield to debuff enemies and aid allies. 
    • Deathbringer -- This is a debuffer and damage dealer that uses their miasma shield to control the tide of battle. Earthlians are good choices for this class thanks to their high Luck stat.
    • Deathguard -- This is a support specialization that utilizes the miasma to heal and shield allies while weakening their foes. Again, Earthlians are a good race for this class because of their superior ailment success rate.
  • Warlock -- This is an arcane Celestrian class that excels at bombarding enemies with a colorful array of spells.
    • Omnimancer -- This is a caster that works with spells that deal physical damage. A Celestrian is a great pick to maximize this class' TP and damage output.
    • Elemancer -- This is a caster that blasts enemies with powerful Fire, Ice, and Lightning spells. This class works really with as the Celestrian race, much like all damage-dealing casters.
  • Necromancer -- This is an occult Celestrian class that summons wraiths to do their bidding.
    • Spirit Evoker -- This is a summoner that calls as many wraiths as they can in order to make their skills more powerful. A Celestrian is a good fit thanks to their bountiful pools of TP.
    • Spirit Broker -- This is a summoner that sacrifices wraiths to empower their own abilities. A Celstrian is perfect here for their high TP and Intelligence.
  • Rover -- This is a feral Therian class that wields a bow and calls wild animals to their aid.
    • Flying Falcon -- This is an archer that specializes in calling a Hawk to aid them in executing devastatingly powerful attacks. The Therian race is the best fit for maximizing damage potential.
    • Hunting Hound -- This is an archer that calls a Hound that heals and defends allies while it inflicts ailments on enemies. A Therian is a decent choice, here, for the Agility boost to commanding your Hound.
  • Masurao -- This is a ferocious Therian class that effectively wields katanas to decimate their opponents, though their defense is deplorable.
    • Blade Dancer -- This is a dancer that wields four blades to slice through their foes. They're immensely powerful, but extremely fragile since they can't wear armor with all those katanas. A Therian is a perfect choice for maximizing your damage output.
    • Blade Master -- This is a master of the blade that uses one sword to attack multiple enemies and inflict ailments. Therians are still great, here, but consider using an Earthlian if you want to use Haze Slash a lot and induce sleep.
  • Shaman -- This is a mystical Brouni class that supports the party with heals and buffs.
    • Divine Punisher -- This is a support class that dispells buffs and debuffs on allies in order to execute devastatingly powerful attacks. Celestrians are a good choice for this specialization thanks to their superior TP and Intelligence.
    • Divine Herald -- This is a support class that uses buffs to heal their party. The Brouni race is a great pair for this class thanks to their excellent healing abilities.
  • Botanist -- This is a brainy Brouni class that wields herbs to heal the party and poison the enemy.
    • Merciful Healer -- This is a healer that uses potent healing spells and revival abilities to keep the party standing. A Brouni's superior Wisdom is the perfect fit for this class.
    • Graced Poisoner -- This is a debuffer that utilizes poisonous herbs to inflict various ailments on enemies. The Earthian race is the best choice if you want good chances at actually inflicting ailments, though you could consider a Celestrian for their large pool of TP.

Note that if you ever wind up spending skill points on something that doesn't suit your class build, you can Rest at the Explorers Guild and roll that character back two levels in order to reallocate everything.

Now that you know what the classes are, how would you go about setting up a party that will succeed in the Labyrinth?

Party Arrangement Tips Etrian Odyssey 5 Ultimate Guide to Building Parties and Classes

Tips and Tricks for Building a Party in Etrian Odyssey 5

A party needs two main things to be viable in Etrian Odyssey 5's Labyrinth: a way to control the damage you're taking and a way to heal it. Now, healing the damage you take is the easy part. You just need a class that can heal -- such as the Botanist, Shaman, Rover, Necromancer, or Harbinger -- and you need to keep them alive, which means placing them far away from whoever's most likely to take the most damage.

Controlling the damage you take, on the other hand, is a lot more complicated. As such, there are more creative ways to go about accomplishing this. You could opt to go the classic route and use a tank in the form of either a Dragoon or a Fencer. Using these classes' defensive abilities encourages enemies to attack them, allowing the rest of the team enough reprieve to go all out on their attack.

Alternatively, you could do your best to mitigate damage by offering up a summonable distraction with the Dragoon's Bunkers or the Necromancer's Wraiths. If you want to get even more creative, you could use Pugilists and other disablers to bind the opponent and leave them unable to attack at all.

Anything else that you decide to plop in your party should be dealing damage, and preferably a lot of it. You could also opt to use support classes to make dealing damage easier. How you ultimately build your party based off of these guidelines is entirely up to you.

Note, however, don't pair classes together that clash with each other. For example, a Necromancer's not going to synergize well with a Rover or a Bunker-summoning Dragoon since they all compete for the same three summon slots. Just be mindful of what you want to accomplish with your party and you'll do great.

Party Build Tips Etrian Odyssey 5 Ultimate Guide to Building Parties and Classes

With a proper party in tow, you have the chance to outplay your opponent no matter what situation you find yourself in. For more tips on climbing the Labyrinth, check out our other Etrian Odyssey 5 guides.

The Evil Within 2 Guide: How to Get Into Tredwell Trucking,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/e/v/i/evil-within-header-bb608.jpg 5sya2/the-evil-within-2-guide-how-to-get-into-tredwell-trucking Thu, 19 Oct 2017 09:56:52 -0400 Kieran Desmond

The Evil Within 2 has a load of optional collectables hidden throughout the game for all you completionists. Two of these collectables, a Mysterious Object and a File, can be found in the Tredwell Trucking area which you’ll visit in Chapter 3 in order to further progress through the game’s story.

If you want to get these collectables you’d better make sure you grab them while you’re there because you won’t get to return to Tredwell Trucking later on.

Read on to find out how to find Tredwell Trucking and where the collectables are located.

How to find Tredwell Trucking in The Evil Within 2

You have to go to Tredwell Trucking to advance the story at the end of Chapter 3, so an easy way of finding it is to just follow Lily when you’re at that point in the game. To locate Tredwell Trucking beforehand, however, head west along the main road from your safe house and then head north once you reach the intersection. Tredwell Trucking will be on your right, recognizable by its fenced-off yard.

You can grab the Mysterious Object collectible while you’re there, but to get the File collectible, you’ll need to wait until Lily leads you there to close out Chapter 3. Now that you know where it is, it might be worthwhile scouting the area for the safest way to sneak in as it will be infested with The Lost.

Tredwell Trucking Mysterious Object -- Mysterious Machine Location


The Mysterious Machine collectible can be found in one of the trucks in the Tredwell Trucking yard. Specifically, the truck parked in the tall grass near the garage door. Head to the back of the truck to open the door and head all the way to the front to find this Mysterious Object behind a crate.

Tredwell Trucking File - Report #00654: Core Displacement Location


This collectible File can be found on a counter in the Power Control room (the one with the workbench) on the second floor of Tredwell Trucking. You gain access to this room when you follow Lily to finish Chapter 3, so this collectible can only be grabbed at this point in the game as you cannot come back later.


That wraps up this The Evil Within 2 guide for finding what’s inside Tredwell Trucking. For more on this game, take a look at some of our other The Evil Within 2 Guides:

WWE 2K18 Guide: How to Win the Money in the Bank Match in My Career,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/w/w/e/wwe2k18-features-4b4f8.jpeg zbkzd/wwe-2k18-guide-how-to-win-the-money-in-the-bank-match-in-my-career Wed, 18 Oct 2017 15:27:16 -0400 Wizard of Warsaw

Following the release of WWE 2K18, players have run into a ton of bugs and needless to say, they aren't happy. From complaints about framerate to poor controls, players seem to be largely upset that the game isn't a massive improvement from the last entry in the series. However, one bug seems to stand out above the rest, and that is the "Money in the Bank" match from WWE 2K18's Career Mode. 

How to Win the "Money in the Bank" Match in WWE 2K 18

This match has two objectives to it: 

  1.  Win the match
  2. Use the ladder in a move 

Both of these seem pretty straightforward, but unfortunately, using the ladder seems to be a bit trickier than smashing it over your opponent's head. While most players seem to think this is a bug, it seems to be more likely a case of poor wording in the challenge itself.  

Apparently, the game wants players to use the ladder in a specific way, so it takes some setup. Here are the steps you'll need to take to get past this match in career mode: 

  1. Make sure you've got a finisher stored up 
  2. Climb the ladder and have another superstar climb the ladder as well 
  3. You'll receive a button prompt to perform an "OMG" move 
  4. When you hit the button prompt, you'll start a ladder finisher and, whether you finish the move correctly or not, you should receive credit
  5. After that, you just have to win the match 


While there are some players that have mentioned they didn't need to do all of the above steps to complete the challenge, this definitely seems to be the most reliable way. Give it a shot and let us know how it works for you. Or if you've found another surefire way to handle this challenge let us know in the comments below.

Stay tuned to GameSkinny for more WWE 2K18 guides! 

Etrian Odyssey 5 Beginner's Guide: Secrets to Surviving the Labyrinth,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/w/v/w/wvw69ks574m6vpaiqo-b2c59.jpg o1w6o/etrian-odyssey-5-beginners-guide-secrets-to-surviving-the-labyrinth Wed, 18 Oct 2017 09:39:14 -0400 Autumn Fish

The Labyrinth of Yggdrasil hides countless dangers in Etrian Odyssey 5: Beyond the Myth. Heck, even the first group of monsters you encounter can and will kick your teeth in if you're not prepared. That's why, if you ever hope to survive the Labyrinth, you absolutely must have your wits about you at all times.

It's far from easy, but thankfully, there are a few things you can do to improve not only your survivability but also your efficiency in the Labyrinth.

Etrian Odyssey 5 Beginner's Guide

New Guilds should exercise extreme caution and cover all their bases when entering the Labyrinth. Be sure to put at least one of each race in your party, get all of the important overworld skills, frequently stock up at the marketplace, meticulously detail your map, peer up stairs when you find them, and avoid FOEs like the plague.

Make a Party with at Least One of Each Race

There are four character races to stuff into your party of 5, and you'll need all of them in Etrian Odyssey 5. Each race has special Racial Skills that either utilize the Union Gauge in battle or otherwise boost your overall abilities.

For example, the Celestrians have access to the Detect Mana skill, which is necessary for interacting with the Magic Barrier on the 1st Stratum. Therians, on the other hand, gain access to the Brute Strength skill at level 5, and that can be used to move heavy objects out of the way later on. Having access to every Race Skill is absolutely paramount to exploring the Labyrinth and completing quests.

Spend Points on Important Overworld Skills Early On

Don't make the same mistake I did and neglect your overworld skills early on. Overworld skills are essential for gathering new materials and reaching new areas of the Labyrinth. Just have one character spec into Fishing, get another to pick up Foraging, and let someone else learn Animal Care. Chopping and Mining are also pretty essential. Get these skills out of the way first so that you never need to worry about them again.

Race Skills Etrian Odyssey 5 Beginner's Guide

Frequently Stock Up at the Marketplace

There are two major things from the Marketplace that you'll need to constantly keep stocked: Consumables and Equipment. You probably don't want to be exploring the dungeon without any healing supplies, especially at a low level, so it's a good idea to pick up a few Medicas. Once you unlock them, be sure to have at least 1 -- if not 3 or 5 -- Ariadne Thread on you at all times so you can escape the Labyrinth. Remember to stock up every time you stop by the Marketplace to sell materials.

The Marketplace's stock of items will slowly grow as you continue to sell the materials you find. Since the Labyrinth doesn't have much equipment hidden about, you'll find you have to buy a lot of it in town. Just make sure that your party is appropriately geared before you advance to a new floor or you might find yourself struggling.

Fill in the Map with Meticulous Detail

You make the map in Etrian Odyssey, and it's up to you how much detail you go into. However, I suggest marking absolutely everything to make navigating each floor as easy as it can be. You should already be marking things like floors, walls, doors, stairs, and various harvest points, but it'd be smart to expand to marking everything else, too.

Mark the treasure chests, even if you've already opened them. If you come across someone with a request in the Labyrinth, try marking that with an exclamation mark (or something that stands out). Suspicious tiles on the map are a good use of the question mark, too. Consider even painting in the water with shades of blue to make the floor layout easier to understand. Get creative with filling in your map -- just make sure you can read it.

Fill in the Map with Meticulous Detail in Etrian Odyssey 5 Beginner's Guide

Peek Up the Stairs When You Discover Them

While mapping the floor, you'll eventually stumble across the stairs leading up to the next level. When you do, be sure to head up the stairs to activate the next floor before heading back downstairs and carrying on. Doing this allows you to pick up the next floor's quests from the Inn before you start properly exploring it.

Avoid FOEs Like the Plague on Your First Encounter

Formido Oppognatura Exsequens (FOEs) are powerful monsters that openly roam floors and should certainly be avoided the first time you meet them. While some FOEs are passive and walk in a pattern that's relatively easy to avoid, others are aggressive and will hunt you down until you leave the area. When consistently cornered by aggressive FOEs, try studying your map to see if there might be another way to approach it.


With these tips in mind, the Labyrinth should prove to be pretty manageable, though it still won't be easy. Keep your eyes peeled right here on GameSkinny for more Etrian Odyssey 5 guides coming soon.

South Park: The Fractured But Whole Black Screen Fixes,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/b/l/a/black-screen-6960e.png 92obc/south-park-the-fractured-but-whole-black-screen-fixes Tue, 17 Oct 2017 22:25:26 -0400 Ashley Gill

What's a AAA PC game release without some day one technical problems? Some users have reported their PC copies of South Park: The Fractured But Whole launch to a black screen. If you're running into this problem, we've got a few possible solutions for you.

There are four potential ways for you to fix this problem, and hopefully one will work for you. We'll start with the most simple solutions and work up to the more complicated ones.

How to Fix the Black Screen Problem in The Fractured But Whole

Option 1 -- Force Windowed Mode

This one's easy enough, and for most, this seems to be the way to go. Simply follow these steps:

  1. Launch The Fractured But Whole
  2. Get to the black screen
  3. Press Alt + Enter to force windowed mode
  4. If the game switches to windowed mode, go to the game's options
  5. Set the resolution to your monitor's resolution

It's definitely possible that step 3 did not force the game to display. If you've tried this, it's time to try the next possible solution.

Option 2 -- Open the Game Directly

This is another simple solution and just an attempt to get the game to launch properly by opening it directly.

  1. Right click on The Fractured But Whole in your Steam library
  2. Click 'Properties'
  3. Click 'Local Files'
  4. Click 'Browse Local Files'
  5. Open the game via the 'SouthPark_TFBW.exe' file
Option 3 -- Set the Game's Priority to High

This is a little less straightforward than the two options above, but it works on some machines. Don't be antsy about this one -- it will in no way negatively impact your PC. Let's go over how to do it.

  1. Launch the game
  2. Press Crtl + Alt + Del at the black screen
  3. Bring up the Task Manager
  4. Find the game in the Processes tab
  5. Right click the game, then click on 'Go to details'
  6. Right click on the game's already-highlighted listing
  7. Click 'High priority' and switch back to the game

This one's a bit of a stretch, but it's less hassle than the last solution.

Option 4 -- Reinstall Uplay

Exactly as it reads, your last option is to reinstall Uplay. As mundane as it seems, this solution has a fair success rate. If none of the above solutions work for you, this is the route you're going to have to take. Luckily it's easy and doesn't take too long. That's a plus!

No one likes getting a black screen on a game they paid $60 for on release day. Give these four potential solutions a shot, and hopefully one will work for you.

Looking for more tips, tricks, and strategies for TFBW? Make sure to check out our other South Park: The Fractured But Whole guides

Dungeons 3 Guide: Finding Multiplayer Co-Op Matches,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/d/u/n/dungcov-24871.jpg lqzzj/dungeons-3-guide-finding-multiplayer-co-op-matches Tue, 17 Oct 2017 17:27:41 -0400 Ty Arthur

For those who miss Bullfrog's classic Dungeon Keeper series, Realmforge Studios has now unleashed Dungeons III  to help you indulge your inner, evil overlord!

Although primarily a single-player game with a straightforward campaign and randomized sandbox maps, there are options available for competitive multiplayer with four players or co-op campaign multiplayer with two players.

The four-player open skirmish games are announced in the multiplayer chat if you simply select "Notify" by going through Extras in the main menu, then navigating to Options and then the Game section.

However, the immensely popular Dungeons 3 co-op campaign mode doesn't work that way and is currently quite hampered by how players need to setup their own private matches. There aren't any in-game options (yet) to resolve this issue, but there are workarounds available if you are willing to do a little searching. 

Finding Co-Op Campaign Players in Dungeons III

Getting a co-op match started works quite a bit different on the matchmaking front than you might be used to.

For the multiplayer co-op side, you actually can't find a random match at all, and instead, the game works more along the lines of Necropolis, where you have to know specifically who you want to join ahead of time.

Because both of the two co-op campaign players are controlling the evil overlord's hand, the thinking there is that you'd want to actually know the person on the other end of the co-op match. 

 Solid reasoning, but perhaps a lack of foresight on what gamer's want. At least they are acknowledging the issue!

In this dual-control style, there's so much room for disruption and griefing that you probably wouldn't want some random Steam-troll to get in a match and just constantly cause you problems and undo whatever you are currently trying to accomplish. 

To find a campaign co-op companion, you can send an invite to anyone on your Steam friend's list. That limits your options, obviously, since not everyone on your friends list is going to have a copy of Dungeons 3 bought and installed. I suppose that's a solid reason to spread the word about the game, though!

 One hand to wield the unicorn on a stick, one to drink
from the ghoul head martini

If you want to find a player who isn't on your friend's list, for now, there's a multiplayer mega-thread available here where you can share your game ID or join a game with someone else who has already shared their ID while looking for a co-op match.

If you can't find anyone currently on the forums ready to go for a match (since players aren't reading that thread 24/7), some forward-thinking players have set up a Discord account here. This service offers more of a real-time match searching ability since you can just ping anyone online and ask to play. Just make a username and pop into the chat to find someone willing to get started in co-op.

It's definitely not an ideal setup for Dungeons 3's multiplayer, but that's all there is to it at the moment. The developers have acknowledged co-op was more popular than they expected, so it's possible that open matchmaking will be implemented in a future Dungeons 3 patch. Stay tuned to GameSkinny for when that happens. 

 Two hands, one game. Get ready for shenanigans to ensue!

Are you looking for players for a campaign co-op match? Leave us a comment below and we'll add you on Steam so we can get playing!

Middle Earth: Shadow Of War Guide -- How to Complete The Bruz Quests,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/c/o/v/cov3-a7ff1.jpg okp9a/middle-earth-shadow-of-war-guide-how-to-complete-the-bruz-quests Tue, 17 Oct 2017 16:17:45 -0400 Ty Arthur

Middle Earth: Shadow Of War, much expanded from its predecessor, lets Talion recruit huge armies of orcs, as well as some new additions like war trolls and drakes. While many dominated-followers are just randomized stats and names, the Olog-Hai named Bruz gets his own specific quest line, teaching you how to conquer and defend strongholds.

Unlike most other missions that clearly go from A to B without any problems, you frequently have to complete other quests to unlock new areas and continue Bruz's saga. In the Shadow of War guide below, we outline all the Shadow Of War Bruz missions, what is required to unlock them, and how to complete each quest.

 This guy will be nice to have on your side!

Ring Of Power Bruz Quest

  • To Begin: Start Act 2
  • Primary Reward: 7,080 XP; 890 Mirian
  • Optional Reward: Wealth gem X 1

Domination is one of the only major abilities from the Shadow of Mordor that's missing at the start of Shadow Of War, but you can finally start dominating enemies again early in Act 2 with this quest.

All you have to do is battle Bruz in the same way as any of the other war trolls you've come across at that point. Hit "A" (Xbox One) or "X" (PS4) when prompted to dodge his attacks three times in a row, attack him from behind, and then finally dominate him to get Bruz on your side.

 Getting some conquest advice from your new troll pal

The Etten Bruz Quest

  • To Begin: Complete the Ring Of Power, Violent Nature, and The Witch King's Vision quests
  • Main Reward: Nurnen Fortress; 8,105 XP; 920 Mirian

Talion will need to recruit three Captains (besides Bruz) to build up a force to capture Nurnen in this siege segment. After you've got your army, capture the two Victory Points and take out the overlord to install Bruz as your new second in command. Completing the mission opens up the map so you can get into the full meat of the game.

 Talion also weirdly gives a motivational Braveheart style speech to...
his army of mindless dominated orcs?

Conquest Bruz Quest

  • To Begin: Capture Nurnen Fortress
  • Main Reward: None

This quest and the next one don't have a whole lot for Talion to do except follow tutorials. You can get the I Like To Watch achievement here by having a follower murder another captain without helping him during the pit fight segment.

The Fight Pits Bruz Quest

  • To Begin: Complete Conquest
  • Main Reward: None

This is another tutorial mission. Just watch the fights and move on to the next quest.

The Best Defense Bruz Quest

  • To Begin: Complete the Fight Pits, Tower Of Sorcery, and Carnan's Bane missions
  • Main Reward: 13,930 XP; 10,00 Mirian

Some players have had trouble getting this Bruz quest to unlock. If the quest isn't available after The Fight Pits, go make sure you've progressed along the Carnan quest line as far as you can, then come back and it should be available.

This quest is just a siege defense, but it is possible to lose the mission entirely, so make sure you've got some warchiefs and captains to help you defend the Victory Points. Pay attention to this mission: the grueling Shadow War end-game content is a whole lot of this exact scenario, over and over.

Damaged Bruz Quest

  • To Begin: Complete the The Best Defense mission
  • Main Reward: 18,260 XP; 1,050 Mirian

This is your typical rescue mission (which were so prevalent in the previous game) and stealth is key so you don't get swarmed. Make sure to kill the archers above first, before you start releasing prisoners so you don't have to deal with ranged fire if someone notices you.

If you imported your follower from Shadow Of Mordor, that orc can be randomly assigned as one of the prisoners to save, so be on the lookout!

After the stealth part of this Bruz quest, it's time to fight Bruz again -- just use the same war troll tactics you know by now, avoiding his big attack and getting behind to freeze and get in a few swings.

The big problem here is that there can be multiple captains with the army, so you need to keep them apart if you want to survive. If any of them are vulnerable to freezing or pinning, make sure to lock them in place while you take care of the rest.

 Rescuing some orc prisoners

Missing Bruz Quest

  • To Begin: Complete the The Damaged mission
  • Main Reward: 15,950 XP; 1,030 Mirian

For this final Bruz quest, head to the meeting point and be prepared for an ambush with caragor-mounted orcs. From there, follow Ratbag and rescue more followers, then go on a mad dash to rescue the Ranger troll with a 30-second countdown.

Don't get too close, though, as Bruz has set up a not-so-cleverly disguised Ranger that's actually a bunch of explosives. Wait for the Ka-Boom and then follow the ever-helpful Ratbag to get revenge on your erstwhile lieutenant.

 No, that's definitely not Ranger.

From there, sneak into Bruz's camp without raising any alarms (be on the lookout for archers!) and get ready for your final battle against the upstart troll. Instead of killing him though, you need to dominate him again and pick the "shame" option to show the other warchiefs who is boss!

That's all you need to know to complete the Shadow Of War Bruz quest line!  Need help with the rest of the game? Be sure to check out our other Shadow Of War guides for more tips, tricks, and strategies:

Grim Dawn: Ashes Of Malmouth Inquisitor Purifier Build Guide,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/c/o/v/cov2-c2d2d.jpg i2v2b/grim-dawn-ashes-of-malmouth-inquisitor-purifier-build-guide Mon, 16 Oct 2017 15:58:48 -0400 Ty Arthur

With its dual class system, Grim Dawn already had a staggering number of mastery combos for creating a wide range of builds. Now that the Ashes Of Malmouth DLC has arrived, that number has significantly increased with the addition of the Necromancer and Inquisitor base classes.

The holy Inquisitor is a ranged, combat gun specialist that employs rune abilities to augment his skill loadout. While there are seven possible mastery combinations to tinker with, at the moment, the best Inquisitor build is easily the Purifier, adding in the fire damage and crowd control abilities of the Demolitionist.

Below we cover everything you need to know to build an unstoppable Inquisitor Purifier!

Looking for Necromancer mastery class combos instead? Take a look at the best Grim Dawn Necromancer builds here!

Grim Dawn Purifier Build (Inquisitor + Demolitionist)

For the Purifier build, you want to focus exclusively on pumping up your ranged pistol attacks (to absurd levels) and on making them burn with righteous fury.

While Word Of Pain and Storm Box Of Elgoloth seem like they would be the main Inquisitor skills to focus on, we're actually going to ignore those two abilities entirely. With a few exceptions, the Demolitionist side of the build will take care of those area effect, hit chaining, and crowd control skills, so don't even worry about them here. The Inquisitor runes can be useful, but they aren't quite what we're looking for on this particular build.

For the Inquisitor half of the build, we'll focus almost exclusively on the top layer of the skill tree. Continuously pump points into Ranged Expertise to increase your firearm damage and attack speed. When it becomes available, trade between putting points into that skill and Bursting Round for fire damage that can hit nearby foes.

Since this is a ranged combat-focused build with no pets, you want to eventually spend points on Word Of Renewal for healing and the burst to defensive capability. This will be critical because Demolitionist doesn't offer much on the defense front either.

When you get to 10 points in Inquisitor, Deadly Aim will be your next attack skill to focus on, giving you huge boosts to damage every few seconds. As the end of the Inquisitor skill tree approaches, Storm Spread is a great option for groups of enemies, although it does break our fire theme and bring in some electricity.

 Purifier Inquisitor Skill Breakdown

On the Inquisitor side of the build, obviously, the main focus is going to be Fire Strike, as that stacks with Ranged Expertise and adds bonus fire damage to your attacks. As you get to higher levels, don't forget to upgrade to Explosive/Static Strike to make your attacks even more potent.

As with most Demolitoinist builds, don't skimp on Flashbang. Since you don't have a ton of healing or defense-boosting abilities (or a summoned minion to take the damage), you want anything that keeps hordes under control.

Flame Touched is another must-have skill, dealing fire damage when enemies get past your bullets and close to melee range. Vindictive Flame is another good option for fiery retaliation, and when you reach higher levels, Thermite Mine will become your big damage, area effect skill to focus on.

 Purifier Demolitionist Skill Breakdown

Following this skill breakdown, you can keep enemies at bay while sniping them down with ranged shots -- and any who get through will get burned for their trouble!

This is just one possible way to assemble the Purifier, and of course, there are plenty of other viable builds for the Inquisitor, from the Vindicator (Shaman + Inquisitor) and the Mage Hunter (Arcanist + Inquisitor) to the unexpected Apostate combo (Necromancer + Inquisitor).

What's your favorite Grim Dawn Inquisitor build so far, and what tweaks would you make to our Purifier skill breakdown? Let us know in the comments section below! If you're looking for more builds and ways to master the game, be sure to check out the rest of our Grim Dawn guides here.

The Evil Within 2 Union Security Card Guide,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/c/o/v/cov1-69664.jpg bllqq/the-evil-within-2-union-security-card-guide Mon, 16 Oct 2017 14:03:11 -0400 Ty Arthur

What's a survival horror game without having to find key cards to let you into new areas filled with monstrous beasts and precious resources? The Evil Within 2 doesn't buck that trend, but it does add in another layer of complexity.

The key card doesn't just automatically unlock all doors in the horror town of Union. This isn't a "blue card = blue doors" scenario. Instead, it acts as a guide to figuring out the codes for any doors with keypads. But exactly how to unscramble the codes is pretty up in the air the first time you have to use the card.

If you don't know what you're doing, it's sort of like playing an unexpected game of Suduko mashed with Bingo. Rather than trying a bunch of random codes until you throw your controller at the floor, we'll show you exactly what to do with the first B-34 auto repair shop door that's causing players the most trouble.

Using The Evil Within 2 Union Security Card

To grab the card, head over to the auto repair shop toward the north end of the Union map. If you haven't been there yet, you will end heading to this building eventually as part of the Rogue Signal side quest.

Before you can access the underground area with the card and the locked door, first Sebastian needs to restore power by using the fuse box. Just hit the second and fourth switches to fill up the green lights and turn the power back on. An enemy will wander in at that point, so be prepared! If you stay hidden, you can get in a sneak attack before having to resort to normal combat.

With that out of the way, access the panel to operate the hydraulic lift and create an entrance to the basement underneath the vehicle. Head downstairs and wait for a memory to play, then crouch underneath the steel beam to find another area.

There you will see the B-34 door on the left wall, but you can't actually go inside quite yet. Instead, check the side hallway and pick up the Union security card off the body near the dead end.

 Picking up the Union security card

Now we can tackle that locked B-34 door, but unfortunately, the security card doesn't do anything except list a bunch of numbers and letters. It's not a key, but rather a map to find the door code. Since we know the door number, we can unscramble the code by looking at it sort of like a Bingo card.

First check column B, then slide your finger down to row 3. Where they intersect on the grid is the number 96, so we know those are the first two digits of the door's security code.

Now do the same thing with column B and slide down to row 4 (since the door number is 34). The B4 number is 76, so that's the second set of digits for the security door. That means the full security key put together is 9676.

 Figuring out the 9767 code for door B-34

Input the code, wait for the pad to turn green, and you are good to go. Now you can use the security card in that same way to unlock any other doors marked like B-34 found anywhere else in Union.

More The Evil Within 2 Walkthroughs

Need help finding all the various collectibles or completing any of the missions in this creepy survival horror experience? Check out our other Evil Within 2 guides here:

The Evil Within 2 Guide: How to Find All the Residual Memories,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/t/i/t/title-screen-header-image-e9b65.jpg keq4f/the-evil-within-2-guide-how-to-find-all-the-residual-memories Mon, 16 Oct 2017 13:36:52 -0400 Thomas Wilde

In The Evil Within 2, Residual Memories are short echoes of past events caught within the fabric of Union. You can learn how to home in on and view them from O'Neal in Chapter 3 by talking to him and accepting the "Rogue Signal" side mission.

From that point forward, you can find Residual Memories scattered throughout the game. Whenever you get close to one, your communicator will ping.

There are a total of 24 Memories in the game, many of which you're guided to as part of a mission or story objective. However, several are very easy to miss. You also receive 500 green gel as a reward for tracking down all optional Memories, which makes it worth the effort. Finding and viewing all 24 Memories unlocks the Echoes Within STEM trophy/achievement.

As with the other TEW2 guides, this deserves a spoiler warning. Even the names of some of the Memories can give away crucial plot details, and discussing their locations often means going into detail about the game's events. If you care about spoilers at all, don't read this unless you've already cleared the game.

Let's get started.

All Residual Memory Locations in The Evil Within 2

#1: Hayes and Turner Hatch Their Plan
Once you've spoken with O'Neal and gotten the "Rogue Signal" side mission, you can find this Memory in the trash pickup zone west of Krimson's Supermarket in Chapter 3.

#2: Hayes and Turner Split Up
You can listen to this Memory in the back room of the house at 322 Cedar Ave., behind the church. You're guided to it as part of the "Rogue Signal" side mission in Chapter 3.

#3: Turner Loses Contact
Visit the office in the Union Body Shop.

#4: Turner Meets His Gruesome End
When you've done the legwork to reach and complete the last two Memories, you receive a transmission telling you to meet Turner at the Union Visitor Center. When you go there, the door behind the desk is now open, letting you reach the basement and view this Memory.

#5: Train to Nowhere
Find this memory at the north end of the crashed train along the west side of the map in Chapter 3, near the Union Body Shop. This is probably the single easiest Memory of the lot to miss, as it's well out of your way and has no attached hint of its existence.

#6: Fatal Witness
Solve the fuse box puzzle in the office of the Union Body Shop, then raise the closest auto lift and open the hatch. This can be found in the crawlspace leading to the secret supply room.

#7: Batten Down the Hatches
Use a shock bolt to open the garage of the Union Gas & Power building in Chapter 3 or 4. This Memory is just inside.

#8: Trapped in the Marrow
It's hard to miss this one. It's right next to the open vent you need to use to reach the exit from the Marrow in Chapter 4, on the close side of the collapsed passageway.

#9: Before the Collapse
Right at the start of Chapter 5, look in the gazebo to the left of the road to City Hall.

#10: Waiting for Stevens
You will run right into this one as you leave the saferoom in the Business District in Chapter 6.

#11: Parts and Pieces
You can find this Memory in the parking lot east of the credit union in the Business District in Chapter 6, next to the pile of charred corpses.

Warning: if you haven't already fought and killed the corpse golem that's running around the streets, watching this Memory will spur its sudden and dramatic arrival. Don't grab this Memory at all unless you have the ammunition for a prolonged fight.

#12: After Life
Look in the kitchen of the Juke Diner in the Business District during Chapter 6. Watching this Memory also triggers a series of events that culminate in your getting one of the slides.

#13: Failed Rescue
In the back alleys along the southern edge of the Business District in Chapter 6, past the infested corpse pile and the parked humvee, you'll find the ill-fated Stevens. She has a key you need, as well as a Memory to record. If you take the former, however, expect another ambush.

#14: Stefano's Affirmation
In Chapter 8, before you enter the theater to confront Stefano, turn around and go up another set of stairs to the landing on the third floor. The Memory is in front of the lit picture on the wall.

#15: The Tortured
In Chapter 9, after you use the crank handle to escape from the dungeons, you end up in a cell block. The last cell on the right is locked down, but you can get in by using a crawlspace in the cell to its right. Inside, you'll find gunpowder and this Memory, which is a gut-twister.

#16: Hoffman Gets A Strange Call
You automatically get this Memory when you return to the Marrow in Chapter 11. It does not award you gel.

#17: Hoffman Has Clearance
Again, you automatically get this Memory when you reach the locked security door in the laboratory in Chapter 11. It isn't worth any gel either.

#18: All is Lost...
Check Lab 2 on the second floor of the Restricted Labs in Chapter 11. You can pick up the Resonance from this from a long way off, which may mislead you about where it is.

#19: His Master's Voice
After the boss fight in Chapter 11, you can find this in Lab 4. It's a gimme since you have to go there anyway.

#20: Evil Alliance
In Chapter 14, after your elevator ride, drop into the bloody drainage ditch in front of the double doors to find this Memory. You probably picked up its Resonance from a long way off.

#21, #22, #23, #24: You automatically pick these up on your way to the final confrontation in Chapter 16. Even their names are substantial spoilers, so we've chosen to omit them. However, you get Resonance pings from your communicator for them from a long way off, and there's almost nothing else in this level that would distract you. They're almost guaranteed.

That's it. Residual Memories are arguably the easiest collectible to find in The Evil Within 2, but some of them are still fairly well hidden. Good luck in STEM!

If you're looking for more tips, trick, and strategies for TEW2, make sure to check out our other The Evil Within 2 guides

Digimon Links Guide: Best Digimon on Release,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/j/3/d/j3dzd1508064656-32eb3.png rg289/digimon-links-guide-best-digimon-on-release Sun, 15 Oct 2017 14:34:50 -0400 Craig Snyder

If you're like me, the first thing you want to know when you get into a grind-heavy game like Digimon Links is, "What's the best I can get?" There are dozens and dozens of Digimon available to you in the earliest stages of this game, and sifting through all the garbage ones to get to the strongest can be confusing.

Luckily for you, there are a couple of Digimon who stand out far ahead of the rest by having devastating skills or incredibly high stats at max level. In this guide, let me introduce you to those Digimon and tell you how you can get them.

Putting "Best Digimon" into Context

It's important to understand that there's no way that I can objectively tell you what the best Digimon for you and your party is. Here are some things you need to consider before reading onward:

  • Awakening is a thing, and I'm judging these Digimon based on their +4 form. Awakening levels affect each Digimon differently in terms of stats. 

  • Leader Skills and Legacies can be inherited from other Digimon. Doing this will allow you to significantly modify the strength of a Digimon. I'm not considering inherited skills in this guide.

That being said, some Megas just inherently have better stats and skills over the rest. That's what I'll be focusing on. Now, let's talk about the most powerful Digimon you can get today!

Best Digimon to Farm in Digimon Links

There are currently five Megas that can be obtained through Advent Beginnings: Seraphimon, Vikemon, Phoenixmon, and HerculesKabuterimon. These are obtainable until 10/29/17. MetalEtemon is also currently obtainable through an Advent Quest until 10/31/17.

From my research around popular Digimon Links forums and communities, the majority seem to agree that Seraphimon is the most worthwhile of the Advent Beginnings Megas.


Seraphimon is cited as the best choice mainly due to his great Light AoE attack. Phoenixmon is another Mega obtainable through Advent Beginnings with an AoE attack, but the rest have single-target Signature Skills. However, Phoenixmon's AoE attack does Fire damage. Assuming you're still using MetalGreymon, who also deals Fire damage, it'd be nice to diversify your party with Seraphimon.

Megas you get from Advent Beginnings are generally considered to be lower-tier Megas, but these will be powerful enough to remain in your party for many days, up to weeks, so don't consider them weak. AoE abilities are very important in the early stages of the game, and being that the game is still less than a month old, you can expect it to be some time before better Megas are released.

Bare in mind, you don't outright get Seraphimon from completing the Advent Beginnings quest. You get a single fragment to Digivolve into him.

Best Digimon to Capture in Digimon Links

When it comes to capture events, often called "banners," this is where you'll start seeing the overpowered Digimon. Capture events use DigiStones as their currency, and there are currently two events open: Release Anniversary Megafest Capture and Leader Skill Capture. As the name says, the Megafest capture event is where you can get many of the following Digimon.

Note that all of the Digimon listed below can also be obtained through the Choose-a-Mega Voucher (included with the Beginner Pack).

The consensus for best Digimon in the game on release is Omegamon, who is teased in the banner for the Megafest capture event. If you're going to get the Beginner Pack, use your voucher on Omegamon.


Omegamon's single-target capability is insane, having 270 Power at 92 Accuracy. Seraphimon's Signature Skill is an AoE and hits multiple times, but Omegamon is going to push you through the toughest bosses in the game without issue. An Omegamon +4 also has over 700 more S. ATK than a Seraphimon +4.

The kicker is that you can easily farm Seraphimon through a quest, whereas Omegamon is a lucky pull that you'll get from throwing DigiStones at the Megafest capture event (or by opening your wallet).


Arguably next best Digimon in the game right now is WarGreymon. He's also advertised in the Megafest banner.

WarGreymon's S. DEF is considerably higher than Omegamon's, and his resistance strengths and weaknesses vary. The most important difference is that his Signature Skill is an AoE. If you pull one of these, don't break your back grinding DigiStones to upgrade to Omegamon until you reach a boss that requires massive single-target damage.

WarGreymon fragments can also be obtained through the Advent Quest Intro, but as farming the fragments and Digivolving into him is such a pain, I think it's more appropriate to view him as a capture option.


Beezlemon currently can't be obtained in the Megafest capture event, but he can be chosen using the Choose-a-Mega Voucher. In the event that you're insanely lucky and pull Omegamon from the event, you may want to consider using your voucher on Beezlemon.

Beezlemon's ATK numbers are massive and make him the strongest PvP Digimon in the game on release. He also has a single-target skill comparable in strength to Omegamon's (as it hits multiple times).


Omegamon is the dream. Again, if you manage to get your hands on a Choose-a-Mega Voucher, then I strongly suggest you use it on him. If you're lucky enough to get him from the Megafest capture event, then you should feel blessed. Until then, try to do the Advent Beginnings quest to pick up Seraphimon. With Seraphimon and MetalGreymon (from completing Area 1) in your party, you're going to be incredibly strong.

Leave a comment below if you'd like to talk about the best Digimon in the game or if you have a question!

Looking for more Digimon Links guides? Check these out:

Digimon Links Guide: How to Awaken,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/g/v/q/gvqj01508053700-beb3a.png k9aah/digimon-links-guide-how-to-awaken Sun, 15 Oct 2017 13:46:41 -0400 Craig Snyder

There will come a time while playing Digimon Links that you think you've done it all: you've gotten your favorite Mega, you've run through tons of quests, you've beaten everything there is to beat. But there's more. The Awakening system is one of those things. It adds an additional layer of depth to Digivolution, and grinding fragments and the other resources required to fully Awaken your Megas will be a massive operation.

Awakening can be a very confusing process for new players, so we've created this Links guide to help you understand what Awakening is and how you can Awaken your Digimon to its max level. 

What is Awakening in Digimon Links?

Awakening is the process by which you improve your Mega Digimon by increasing its stats and level cap. You can view it as a way to "prestige" your Digimon beyond the highest Digivolution.

After completing Stage 3 of Area 1 in Normal Quests, you receive a Level 40 MetalGreymon. While its incredible power level is enough to breeze you all the way through up to Area 5, MetalGreymon is just an Ultimate. Mega is the stage after Ultimate, so if you've yet to get your hands on one then know that they blow Digimon like MetalGreymon out of the water.

Awakening your Megas is not only a way to flex power and spend your resources, but it'll be essential in completing the harder Advent Quests. In turn, Advent Quests will reward you with materials that you can use to even further Awaken your Megas. If the North American version is anything like the Japanese one (which was released long ago), Awakening your Megas will be mandatory to compete on the PvP ladder. Without doing it, you won't stand a chance.

How do you Awaken in Digimon Links?

Awakening a Mega is done by accessing the Lab and selecting Research. By default, the Lab is directly west of your House on your farm. It's the building with the green roof.

On the Research screen, you'll see two empty slots: one for your Base Digimon and one for the Partner Digimon. To be eligible for Awakening, your Base Digimon must be a Mega and it needs to have max Friendship (300). If you don't already know, Friendship is gained by completing quests.

The level of your Mega doesn't matter for Awakening. The Partner Digimon must also be a Mega, but it's Friendship can be any level. Please be aware that your Partner Digimon will be destroyed during this process. Although I've not tried it myself, I believe your Partner Digimon will be destroyed even if you attempt to Awaken with a Base Digimon under 300 Friendship (and thus fail). Be careful!

When complete, you will receive a DigiEgg in the Garden area of your Lab. To verify that you're Awakening correctly, check that this egg has the correct "+" value (for example, "+1") in the corner of its display portrait. Hatching the egg will give you an In-Training II Digimon, which is the lowest level Digivolution (unless counting Fresh). Evolving this In-Training Digimon will give you the Rookie evolution of the original Base Digimon. For example, if your Base Digimon was a Jesmon (Mega) that evolved from a Hackmon (Rookie), your In-Training II Digimon from the DigiEgg will evolve into a Hackmon.

The max Awakening level is +4. Again, you can think of this almost like a prestige system that you'll have to do over four times. It's not mandatory that you evolve into the same Mega all four times though. You can change which Mega your Ultimate evolves into each time without losing your Awakening level.

What do I need to reach +4 Awakening?

Reaching +4 Awakening is a 10-step process, assuming you already have a Mega:

  1. Start with Base Mega Digimon
  2. Rookie to Mega #1 needs 7 fragments
  3. Base Mega + Mega #1 = +1 Rookie
  4. +1 Rookie to +1 Mega needs 11 fragments
  5. +1 Mega + Mega #2 = +2 Rookie
  6. +2 Rookie to +2 Mega needs 14 fragments
  7. +2 Mega + Mega #3 = +3 Rookie
  8. +3 Rookie to +3 Mega needs 21 fragments
  9. +3 Mega + Mega #4 = +4 Rookie
  10. +4 Rookie to +4 Mega needs 21 fragments

In total, you need four "throwaway" Megas and 74 fragments. However, let me remind you again that you can evolve into different Megas each time you Awaken. You don't need to farm all 74 fragments for the same Mega, so use that to your advantage.


Awakening in Digimon Links can seem very confusing at first, but this guide should give you enough details for you to understand exactly what you're in for. Keep the small details in mind. Your Partner, during Awakening, can be any Friendship level, and both your Base and Partner can be any Digimon level.

If you're confused or have any questions, drop me a comment below and I'll try to help you out!

Be sure to check out our other Digimon Links guides:

Into the Dead 2 Guide: How to Quickly Upgrade and Build Weapons,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/s/c/r/screenshot-2017-e367b.png zgurf/into-the-dead-2-guide-how-to-quickly-upgrade-and-build-weapons Sun, 15 Oct 2017 13:35:52 -0400 Autumn Fish

In Into the Dead 2, your goal is to sprint to the other end of the level while avoiding zombies, using your weapons to defend yourself if anything gets too close. As you progress through the levels, zombies become more and more resilient, requiring you to upgrade your weapons if you hope to stand the same chance that you did before.

While, sure, you could neglect to upgrade your weapons for a few stages and scrape by alright, you'll be hurting when you find yourself in a situation where you have no choice but to punch through a zombie hoard. If you follow this guide, though, you're sure to keep your weapons ahead of the bell curve.

How to Upgrade and Build Weapons in Into the Dead 2

You need to seek out weapon parts if you hope to upgrade your death dealers or build new ones. These parts may seem a little sparse from the get-go, but thankfully, there are multiple ways to go about collecting them if you're thrifty. You can earn weapon parts by checking the store, collecting stars, completing Daily Challenges, playing Survival Mode, or beating Story Mode levels.

Check the Store for Parts

When you initially boot up the game and complete the first level, you get the chance to open a Weapons Lockbox to earn parts. This isn't a one-time thing, however, as it turns out that after you open the initial lockbox, you can come back in three days time and watch an ad to get another one for free. Make it a habit to check the store every three days for a free lockbox.

Check the Store How to Upgrade and Build Weapons Into the Dead 2 Guide

Collect Stars for Parts

While completing levels in Story Mode, you'll earn stars for any mission objectives that you complete. If you earn 10 stars, you receive a free Weapons Lockbox. Since you can earn up to five stars in each level, you could get a new lockbox every two levels that you complete. Just don't risk your life trying to get all of the stars on your first run; it's far cheaper on stamina to replay levels for them later.

Complete Daily Challenges for Parts

After beating the first few levels of Story Mode, you unlock the Daily Challenge. This is essentially an endless sprint that tasks you with killing a certain number of zombies to earn different tiers of rewards. You get Silver from a Bronze score, Gold from a Silver score, and weapon parts from a Gold score.

It's difficult, but if you can manage to get the Gold score, you can earn a decent stash of weapon parts every day. Additionally, the Daily Challenge is the only mode you can play where you don't have to expend a type of currency, so feel free to retry it as many times as you need to get it right.

Complete the Daily Challenge How to Upgrade and Build Weapons Into the Dead 2 Guide

Play Survival Mode for Parts

After beating a couple of levels in Chapter 2, you unlock Survival Mode. In this mode, you spend a ticket to try your luck at surviving hordes of zombies across multiple levels. Each level gets progressively harder as you go, meaning you'll need rather strong weapons in order to consistently get far.

Every few levels you receive a Weapons Lockbox with progressively more weapon parts the deeper you dive into Survival Mode. If you die, you have the chance to revive once by spending two tickets -- or you could just start over from the beginning for one ticket. If you're good at dodging zombies, Survival Mode is a major source of weapon parts for you, so make sure to tackle it whenever you have the tickets.

Play Survival Mode How to Upgrade and Build Weapons Into the Dead 2 Guide

Beat Story Mode Levels for Parts

Occasionally, there are weapon parts hiding in reward bags that you get at the end of a level, though I wouldn't recommend spending any Gold to get them since you get so few parts from these bags.

However, beating the Chapter Finale for the first time will net you a Weapons Lockbox that you can open and earn a lot of parts from. Unfortunately, this is more of a one-time thing, so you can't farm for these.


And with that, you now know all the best ways to upgrade and build weapons. For more on surviving legions of zombies, be sure to check out our Into the Dead 2 guides.

Into the Dead 2 Guide: How to Unlock the Chapter's Final Level,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/s/c/r/screenshot-2017-77c61.png o7yqc/into-the-dead-2-guide-how-to-unlock-the-chapters-final-level Sun, 15 Oct 2017 13:22:35 -0400 Autumn Fish

Into the Dead 2's Story Mode sends you sprinting through seven chapters of zombies in hopes that you'll eventually reunite with your family. However, there are plenty of roadblocks along the way. You can't just blitz through chapter after chapter.

As you make your way through the Story Mode, you'll soon find out that the final levels of every chapter are locked with not one but three keys. If you've scoured every level prior by now, you're probably wondering where in the heck you'll find the missing keys. There aren't any collectibles hidden in the levels, after all, so where could they be?

How to Unlock the Chapter Finale in Into the Dead 2

Well, as it turns out, the keys are hiding in plain sight. In addition to the usual requirement of beating every level leading up to the finale, you must also complete all of the chapters' side objectives in order to unlock it. They're the objectives that appear on the top-right side of the screen on the level select page.

Chances are, there's no way you'll manage to knock out all of the side objectives on your first sprint through the chapter. In fact, I highly suggest focusing on surviving your first run rather than risking your life for the side objectives.

How to Unlock the Chapter Finale Final Level Into the Dead 2 Mobile Guide

If you at least get through the chapter, you can then go back and replay levels to complete the side objectives. Replaying a level you've already beaten costs only a third of the stamina required to play it the first time, which means you're risking far less as you put your life on the line to complete side objectives.

Once you finish up with all of the chapter's side objectives, the final level unlocks. Beating it rewards you with new weapon blueprints and some weapon parts before it ushers you on to the next chapter where you get to repeat the process all over again with more difficult side objectives.

Best of luck on your quest to save your family. Be sure to check back with GameSkinny for more Into the Dead 2 guides coming your way.

The Evil Within 2 Guide: Finding All the Locker Keys,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/t/i/t/title-screen-header-image-4c49b.jpg sd99t/the-evil-within-2-guide-finding-all-the-locker-keys Sun, 15 Oct 2017 11:37:12 -0400 Thomas Wilde

Veterans of The Evil Within likely have a love-hate relationship with locker keys, but however they feel, they'll have to contend with them again in The Evil Within 2. Each locker key is hidden inside a small, well-hidden white statue, which must be broken before you can pick up the key. You can break some statues with your melee attack, but other statues are located high above the ground and must be shot.

Locker keys can be found just about anywhere, and are made to be missed. They can be found in blind corners, high perches, against backgrounds that they blend into, and in one memorable instance, during the run-up to a boss fight when the last thing on your mind should be keeping your eyes open for collectibles. There is almost nothing fair about the locker keys' locations, and every time you find one on your own, it should feel like a minor victory.

Your locker keys, once collected, can be used to unlock Tatiana's stash of ammunition and supplies, which is accessible by sitting in the wheelchair in Sebastian's Room. When you return there with your first locker key in hand, Tatiana will briefly introduce the concept to you, although you can see the lockers to the left the first time you go in for a green gel upgrade.

The supplies from lockers are randomized, though you tend to get more and better items as you collect and use more and more keys. As in the first game, the items you find in a locker don't have to be collected on the spot; you can and should leave them in reserve in case you need them later.

Much like the other Evil Within 2 guides, this one deserves a spoiler warning: the locations of locker keys are difficult to discuss without at least touching on the events that take place throughout the game. This guide's written to avoid as many spoilers as possible while still being specific enough to be useful, but there are still going to be a couple of mild hints as to the game's events. Try not to use this guide at all unless you've already beaten the game.

The Locker Keys and Their Statues in The Evil Within 2

Collecting and using 16 locker keys will unlock the Half the Stash trophy/achievement, while finding and using all 32 keys in a single run is worth the Locksmith trophy/achievement.

Here's where to find all the locker keys in The Evil Within 2.

Locker Key #1: The first statue is in relatively plain sight on a bench near the church outside O'Neal's safe house in Chapter 3.

Locker Key #2: Check behind the altar in the church near O'Neal's safe house in Chapter 3 to find this statue. Entering the church triggers an ambush, so don't go in unprepared.

Locker Key #3: In the small house at 322 Cedar Street in Chapter 3 you can use a hidden computer in the basement to visit the Armory section of the Marrow -- well before any point in the story in which anyone explains what the Marrow is to you. Here, you can dispatch a handful of enemies to find a valuable sawed-off shotgun.

When you head back to the entrance with the shotgun in hand, two of the Lost force their way out of a formerly-shut elevator. Once they're dealt with, you can find a statue inside the elevator car.

Locker Key #4: Check between one of the crashed trains and a wrecked white van on the west side of Union in Chapter 3 to find this sculpture.

Locker Key #5: This statue can be found in relatively plain sight on the porch of a house across the street to the east of Union Auto Repair in Chapter 3.

Locker Key #6: This sculpture is hidden against the northwest exterior corner of the workshed where you can find the parts to repair the sniper rifle in Chapter 3.

Locker Key #7: This statue is underneath the sign for the Pit Stop, east of the Union Power & Gas safe house. You have to pass right by it to complete Chapter 3.

Locker Key #8: Go behind the Pit Stop, facing its dumpster, as you do during a mission in Chapter 3, and look to the right. A locker key statue is wedged into a nearby corner of the building, where you have to shoot it to break it.

Locker Key #9: Once the Shooting Range opens in Sebastian's Room during Chapter 4, you can win this statue as a prize by scoring 2,500 points on Very Hard difficulty in Gallery Mode at the Shooting Range. This is as hard to do as the difficulty suggests, but the targets appear in a consistent, repeated pattern. It just takes a little practice.

Locker Key #10: Score 70,000 points in Chain Attack mode at the Shooting Range to nab this sculpture.

Locker Key #11: In Chapter 4, when you enter the part of the tunnels in the Marrow with the gas leak, proceed until you reach the door with the electric lock. Past it is a T-intersection with a monster to the right. Proceed left to its end and you can find the statue containing this locker key atop an oil drum.

Locker Key #12: When you get back into Union from the Marrow at the end of Chapter 4, leave the shed that contains the Marrow link and circle around to the back. The statue is between the chasm's edge and the safe room's southwest corner.

Locker Key #13: After you turn on the emitter at City Hall in Chapter 5, head back to the first floor of the building. Instead of leaving, go back through the double doors marked "Jonah Constant," where Stefano's "art" used to be. This time, the room is empty, but if you look to the right, there's a locker key statue on a desk on the other side of the archway.

Locker Key #14: In the new stretch of the Marrow that opens at the start of Chapter 6, duck through the gap in the chain-link fence into the maintenance tunnel and go back in the direction you came. The key statue is stuck in the ceiling near the end of the tunnel.

Locker Key #15: In Chapter 6, go out behind Juke's Diner in the Business District and look next to the red dumpster. The statue is tucked in between the shed and a sheet of plywood.

Locker Key #16: The statue sits atop one of the two ornamental columns on either side of the entrance of the credit union in the Business District. Since there's absolutely no other reason to know where the credit union is, here's its location on the in-game map.

Locker Key #17: Stand in front of Juke's Diner in the Business District and look up at its sign. The sculpture is sitting to the sign's right, and must be shot down.

Locker Key #18: This statue is in front of a parked blue four-wheeler in the parking lot of the movie theater in the Business District in Chapter 6, on the south side of the chasm. You can get this well before you open the way to the Grand Theater, but you have to climb over the concrete barrier behind the Krimson Plaza to do so.

Locker Key #19: On the south side of the Business District in Chapter 6, there's a big alley full of enemies and corpses. Look up and you'll see a key statue overlooking the scene from the southwest corner of one of the nearby buildings.

Locker Key #20: When you're dodging the spotlight in Chapter 8 (that's vague, but you'll get what I mean when you get there), keep an eye out for this key statue, hidden behind a raised chunk of wall near the end of the first stretch of the path. If you reach the part where you get the prompt to climb down, you're past it, and can turn around to see the statue.

Locker Key #21: In Chapter 9, when you find the crank that needs a handle, look to your left. There's a row of three closed cells in an alcove there, one of which is occupied by a single immobile zombie. The statue is in his cell, and can be accessed once you've taken the crank handle.

Locker Key #22: In the room with the big floor puzzle in Chapter 9, take a look around from ground level. One of the big statues that's holding a candle in its hands is also holding a locker key statue; specifically, it's the statue to the left of the exit gate. Shoot the statue down to get the key. It blends in very well with its surroundings, so don't be ashamed if it takes you a second to spot it.

Locker Key #23: After you fight off the waves of enemies in the farm house at the start of Chapter 10, follow the woman into the next room and look up. The key statue is looking down on you from a hole in the ceiling. Which isn't creepy at all.

Locker Key #24: In Chapter 11, look at the ceiling lamps across from the entrance to Lab 3 on the second floor of the laboratory in the Marrow. When you shoot it down, the key lands in the small empty operating theater to the left of the locked security door.

Locker Key #25: Right at the end of Chapter 11, before you give Esmerelda the green light to proceed, check behind O'Neal's gadget to find a sculpture.

Locker Key #26: Upon your return to the Business District in Chapter 13, you can leave the Post Plus safe house to discover that someone has dropped off a key statue right outside, next to the dead Mobius guard.

Locker Key #27: In Chapter 13, return to the Juke Diner to find a locker key statue in its restroom.

Locker Key #28: Go back to the Devil's Own Taproom in Chapter 13 and look at the closest intersection. There's a key statue on top of the stoplights. (We've tweaked the brightness in this screenshot to make it easier to see the statue.)

Locker Key #29: In Chapter 13, check the back room in the Devil's Own Taproom where the painting used to be. You'll find a key sculpture there. 

Locker Key #30: There used to be a building directly south of Sykes's safe house in the Business District, but in Chapter 13, that ceases to be the case. There's a nut with a flamethrower patrolling the area, but if you can kill or evade him, there's a key statue waiting for you in the rubble.

Locker Key #31: In Chapter 14, once you go upstairs from the lobby, you're dumped into an arena full of enemies. You have to find a lever in the back room to open the exit gate. If you're facing that lever, turn right and go down the hall. There's an old mine cart here with the key statue hidden inside.

Locker Key #32: Finally, in Chapter 14, when you reach the retracted staircase that leads to the final confrontation, look up to find the last key statue hiding in the pipes to the left of the stairs.

Congratulations on completing one of the tougher achievements in the game. Whoever hid these things must have had a lot of fun with it.

If you're looking for more tips, tricks, and strategies for The Evil Within 2, makes sure to check out our The Evil Within 2 guides page! 

Grim Dawn: Ashes Of Malmouth Necromancer Build Guide,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/g/r/i/grim-dd0ff.jpg lg34c/grim-dawn-ashes-of-malmouth-necromancer-build-guide Sun, 15 Oct 2017 11:00:34 -0400 Ty Arthur

More than a year after the game's official release (and following a lengthy Early Access period), we're finally getting an actual real expansion to Grim Dawn that adds more than just a new combat mode.

In addition to the game's storyline moving forward with two, full new chapters in Ashes Of Malmouth, the level and devotion caps have both been increased, offering new build opportunities with extra skills and constellations.

We've previously looked at some of the best builds available in Grim Dawn, but it may be time to revise that category as two whole new mastery classes have arrived: the Necromancer and Inquisitor!

Grim Dawn Necromancer Builds

Here, we're going to take a look at some of the undead mayhem that can be unleashed with killer Necro builds across the base game or in the expansion areas.

It should come as no surprise that the Necromancer is primarily a pet-focused build, with the main ability to summon several skeletons at once that can be upgraded over time. It's like being back in the glory days of Diablo 2 all over again!

Your pick for the second class will determine how the class plays and whether you want to go full steam ahead into summoning mastery or augment that ability with other power.

 It's finally here!

Necromancer + Soldier

The Deathknight (Necromancer + Soldier) seems like the most obvious mastery combination, but sadly, this doesn't have the synergy you'd expect.

Other than the ability to intermittently deal extra damage and heal yourself a bit with physical attacks, there's not a ton of overlap between the two classes for min/maxing purposes.

It's not a completely nonviable build by any means -- a Necromancer with tons of health and armor who can attack while using pets isn't useless -- but there are builds that work more smoothly together. More than likely, this won't be your first pick. 

Necromancer + Shaman

You can get some crazy powerful builds by adding the Shaman to just about anything, and the Necromancer is no exception. Our Shaman/Necro build is all about letting other creatures do the work for you, so don't even bother getting into melee -- unless the situation has gotten dire.

On the Necro side, fully upgrade the Raise Skeletons, Undead Legions, and Will Of The Crypt branch of the skill tree. When it comes available, fully upgrade the Summon Blight Fiend, Rotting Fumes, and Blight Burst path. We want tons of skeletons and zombies, and they need to be in top shape!

Don't even bother with Reaping Strike, Drain Essence, or anything of the sort, because we aren't planning on hitting things ourselves -- that's what minions are for!

On the Shaman side, upgrade the heck out of Devouring Swarm straight away, which is essentially going to take the place of your main attack. Summon Briarthorn should be your next priority, for even more summoned pet action. Other than that, just put some points into Heart Of The Wild so you have a means to heal and buff yourself when someone gets through your summoned army.

 Necromancer / Shaman Build Path

Necromancer + Demolitionist

Flaming skeletons? Yes, please! There are a lot of different ways to go about this combination, but for maximum focus we're only going to take a grand total of four Demolitionist skills.

Flame Touch and Temper on the top branch of the Demolotionist skill tree imbue allies with fire damage, and who doesn't want their undead army to be lighting everything aflame all around them? Pump these up to max as soon as you can.

From there, we jump way down to a lower branch for Flashbang and Searing Light, which will be your crowd control abilities so you can keep enemy hordes manageable while your flaming skeletons deal with them.

On the Necromancer side, anything from the middle branch on down will be helpful to you, but obviously you want Raise Skeletons and Undead Legion.

Call Of The Grave and Soul Harvest offer great extra bonuses to those flaming skeletons, and if you want some retaliation ability, Spectral Wrath isn't a bad way to go.

Necromancer / Demolitionist Build Path

Necromancer + Occultist

Yet again we're going to play to the pet summoning strengths of the Necromancer, so just like with the Necro/Shaman combo above, we'll max out the Raise Skeletons and Summon Blight Fiend skill paths.

The difference then will be on the Occultist side, where at first your focus will be on slowing and weakening enemies with Curse of Frailty and Vulnerability. While slowed and hexed, your summoned minions will make short work of the monstrous creatures trying to kill you.

When it becomes available, shift to the Summon Hellhound path for an extra pet to play with. In the later levels, make sure to use Bonds Of Bysmiel so your minions have loads of extra health!

 Necromancer / Occultist Build Path

These are the Grim Dawn Necromancer builds we're having the most fun with since the DLC's release -- what did you think of our picks, and what combinations and skill paths do you recommend we try out?

Let us know in the comments below, and if you're just getting started with the game and need help with this deadly post-apocalyptic ARPG, be sure to check out the rest of our Grim Dawn guides.

The Evil Within 2 Guide: Collect All The Mysterious Objects,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/t/i/t/title-screen-header-image-33655.jpg ygymd/the-evil-within-2-guide-collect-all-the-mysterious-objects Sun, 15 Oct 2017 10:47:51 -0400 Thomas Wilde

The Evil Within 2 loves nothing as much as its collectibles. As you progress through the game, you can sometimes stumble across some truly well-hidden items strewn throughout Union and the Marrow. These Mysterious Objects have no purpose in the game, but since they look cool, Sebastian will set them up on a desk in his office.

Collecting all eight of the Mysterious Objects unlocks the All In the Family achievement/trophy. If you're a completionist, you're definitely going to want to find these peculiar items. 

Spoiler warning! This is intended as a guide for players who have already found one or more of the Mysterious Objects on their own and who would like to collect the set. Keeping them a surprise is really the fun of it all. 

In addition, a couple of the objects are hidden in story-critical locations late in the plot, including one that's only available at a critical moment in the ending. It's effectively impossible to tell you where they are without it being at least an indirect spoiler. Don't read this guide unless you've already beaten the The Evil Within 2 or don't care if parts of the narrative are spoiled.

The Mysterious Objects in The Evil Within 2

Mysterious Weapon Replica

Check the corner of a rooftop on the east side of Cedar Street in Union during Chapter 3. You can get up there by hopping the fenced enclosure toward the back of the house, then crossing over via the makeshift bridge.

This may be the easiest of the lot to find, as while there aren't a lot of reasons to be on Cedar Street unless you're exploring, there's often a Lost up here with a firebomb that you can see from a long way off.

For additional clarity, here's a screenshot of the in-game map.

Mysterious Mask

This can be found inside one of the crashed commuter train cars on the west side of Union, which you can go straight for once you start Chapter 3. Fittingly, the train car in question is full of rats and severed body parts.

Mysterious Machine

Check inside one of the parked trucks in the parking lot of Tredwell Trucking on the west side of town in Chapter 3. The truck you want has its shutter facing east, toward the back of the lot.

Here's another clip of the in-game map to show you more or less where you want to be looking.

Mysterious Bobblehead

Look between a couple of big, gray shipping crates in the storage room near the Business District exit of the Marrow. You first pass this way in Chapter 6, and while there's a special encounter in this room at that point, you can still pick up the Bobblehead either immediately before or immediately after that encounter. However, the room it's in becomes permanently inaccessible in Chapter 11.

This screenshot's had its brightness tweaked a bit for legibility's sake, but it should give you a hint as to where to look. Note that if you're facing the door that leads toward the Business District exit, the Bobblehead's on the left side of the room.

Mysterious Action Figure

In Chapter 6, look inside a blue dumpster along the southern edge of the Business District. There's a fallen Mobius guard nearby who's left the "Failed Rescue" Residual Memory, which you can track with your communicator.

There are a lot of landmarks here, but it's pretty easy to get chased out of this area by an enemy ambush before you go looking for the Action Figure. Just to hedge the bet, here's another screenshot of the in-game map showing its location.

Mysterious Symbol

In Chapter 12, when you wake up in Sebastian's house, don't go downstairs right away. Visit his study and look on the table across from his desk.

Mysterious Mug

Once you've scoped out the hotel for Hoffman in Chapter 13, tell her you need to prepare, then check behind the hotel's front desk. You've already visited this hotel a couple of times over the course of the game, but the Mug won't be there before Hoffman arrives.

Mysterious Toy

In Chapter 17, when you reach Sebastian's house for the final time, don't go upstairs right away. Go around the corner to his living room and you'll find this toy on a bookshelf near the kitchen.

Yes, that's right. There's a collectible hidden in the most narrative-heavy part of the game's final chapter. There's a spoiler warning here for a reason.


All eight of the Mysterious Objects will end up displayed prominently in Sebastian's Office the next time you start a New Game Plus. Congratulations on completing your collection!

Looking for more tips, tricks, and strategies for The Evil Within 2? Make sure to check out our The Evil Within 2 guides page! 

Dragon Ball Xenoverse 2 Guide: How to Use Motion Controls on Nintendo Switch,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/4/m/s/4ms3iui-da56c.jpg 1r3it/dragon-ball-xenoverse-2-guide-how-to-use-motion-controls-on-nintendo-switch Fri, 13 Oct 2017 11:55:19 -0400 Autumn Fish

Dragon Ball Xenoverse 2 for Nintendo Switch comes with the option to use Motion Controls in battle. Using the Joy-Cons that come with the console, you have the option to mimic the motions of the move you want to use by following on-screen Motion Icons.

Motion Icons do a decent job of illustrating the movement you're supposed to follow, but without specific instructions, many of the moves are difficult to execute, and you're left flailing your arms in a desperate attempt to get anything to work. Following this guide, you'll be able to execute Motion Controls far more accurately than ever before.

How to Execute Skills with Motion Controls in Dragon Ball Xenoverse 2 for Nintendo Switch

If you want to use Motion Controls, they must first be turned on under Controller Settings in the Options menu. Hop into battle with Motion Controls activated and you'll quickly notice that it's not actually much different than Xenoverse 2's Button Controls. That's because bread and butter moves are still mapped to buttons -- the only things that require actual Motion Controls are Ultimate Attacks and Awoken Skills.

Rather than an Ultimate Attack or Awoken Skill activating as soon as you press their button combinations, you'll have to hold the move's associated buttons and follow the movement illustrated in its Motion Icons in order to execute the skill. There are seven main types of Motion Icons that are split up into variations that utilize both the left and right Joy-Cons.

Motion Icons and What They Mean

How to Use Motion Controls Motion Icon 1 Dragon Ball Xenoverse 2 for Nintendo Switch

  • Pull back arms to where your hands are near your waist.

How to Use Motion Controls Motion Icon 2 Dragon Ball Xenoverse 2 for Nintendo Switch

  • Bring fists up to your upper chest and shoulder area, crossing them.

How to Use Motion Controls Motion Icon 3 Dragon Ball Xenoverse 2 for Nintendo Switch

  • Stretch out your arms.

How to Use Motion Controls Motion Icon 4 Dragon Ball Xenoverse 2 for Nintendo Switch

  • Push your arms forward.
    • Note that you may need to put some force behind this motion to get it to work.

How to Use Motion Controls Motion Icon 5 Dragon Ball Xenoverse 2 for Nintendo Switch

  • Raise your arms skyward.

How to Use Motion Controls Motion Icon 6 Dragon Ball Xenoverse 2 for Nintendo Switch

  • Lower arms straight down to where your hands are around your lower hip and upper thigh area.

How to Use Motion Controls Motion Icon 7 Dragon Ball Xenoverse 2 for Nintendo Switch

  • Hold both hands by your hip.

Note that all Motion Icons found in the game are mirrored to make moves easier to illustrate. This means you need only mimic the Motion Icon as if you were looking through a mirror, that way you don't have to actually flip your rights and lefts before performing a move.

If you're having trouble pulling off the moves detailed in the Motion Icons, try to be a bit more visceral about your movements. Exaggerate everything and be sure to play around with the force required to trigger the skill. 

That's not all there is to Xenoverse's motion controls, however.

How to Use Motion Controls Options Driving Vehicle Dragon Ball Xenoverse 2 for Nintendo Switch

Driving Your Vehicle with Motion Controls

After your very first mission, you'll be gifted a vehicle. As it turns out, this vehicle can also be driven with Motion Controls -- if imprecisely.

With Motion Controls enabled, pull out your vehicle and push your left arm forward to accelerate. Rotate the Joy-Con to the left or right in order to turn your vehicle in 45-degree increments. Pulling back on the Joy-Con will execute a 180-degree flip, and returning it to the resting position should stop your vehicle.

Compared to the Motion Icons, I found driving your vehicle with Motion Controls to be far more imprecise. However, it's still good for a bit of fun when you just want to mess around in the HUB town.


Ultimately, the Motion Controls found here are little more than a novelty. They certainly add to the flavor of the experience, especially while brawling your way through the main story mode, but that's about it.

Whether you're looking to find out more about Nintendo Switch exclusive features or simply want to learn how to build your character, be sure check out the rest of our Dragon Ball Xenoverse 2 guides.

Middle-Earth Shadow Of War Guide: Best Talion Skills,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/c/o/v/cov7-81098.jpg f6ww2/middle-earth-shadow-of-war-guide-best-talion-skills Fri, 13 Oct 2017 11:30:15 -0400 Ty Arthur

Shadow Of War's Talion and his wraithly companion Celbrimbor automatically start out with several of the skills from the previous game, but the rest still have to be unlocked, with an even bigger skill tree available than before because of the addition of sub-skills.

Each base skill now gets three upgraded versions that can be applied as you level up, changing how useful any given skill ends up being in combat situations.

If you are keeping up with all the side missions, like the Shelob Memories, the Ithildin Doors, and the various combat trials Celebrimbor gives you in each province, it's entirely possible to get every skill in the game by the end of Act IV. For those wanting to optimize, however, there are certain skills that are more useful than others from beginning to end. Here are some tips and tricks on picking the right ones -- and why.

Best Shadow Of War Skills

Here, we're going to mostly focus on combat skills that are consistently useful in plenty of scenarios in Shadow of War, from being swarmed by grunts to taking on Legendary orcs. These are the combat options that are going to keep Talion alive longer and help you cleave a bloody swathe through Mordor! 

Spider Song Skill (Detonate Upgrade)

While somewhat hampered by the fact that it can only be used on a firepit, this skill is just plain fun to use. A bunch of orcs minding their own business, bragging about killing Tarks, and drinking grog are suddenly all on fire and being swarmed by magic spiders. What's not to love?

 Spider Song

Ground Finisher Skill

This imminently useful skill lets you more quickly execute any knocked-down enemies so you won't be interrupted by an attack from his buddies. The Wraith Shield upgrade makes this even more helpful since you can counter any incoming strike during the shortened execution time. If you prefer to heal during those mass-frenzied battles, pick Ground Drain instead of Wraith Shield.

 Ground Finisher

Freeze Pin Skill

A lot of players overlook the usefulness of this early Ranged skill, seeing it as only being helpful when a captain is fleeing battle and you don't want to track him down later.

It has a lot more utility than that, however, and can be used to lock a powerful melee foe in place while you deal with his subordinates. Coupled with the Brutal Cold upgrade that sends grunts fleeing in terror, this is easy crowd control fairly early in the game.

 Freeze Pin

Fatal Counter Skill (Perfect Counter Upgrade)

When there's just a horde of enemies around you, this skill is a life (and time) saver. Perfect Counter should be picked up quickly since it keeps enemies down for a time (pairing well with Ground Finisher), but even if you don't execute them, it's nice to have some breathing room while they get back up.

When you upgrade to Fatal Counter, though, there's no need to worry about grunts anymore, because perfect counters when the icon flashes blue results in an automatic execution!

 Fatal Counter

Hammer Of Eregion Skill (Shadow Strider Upgrade)

The ability to freeze orc captains to get in more powerful strikes when they are vulnerable makes some of those frustrating Legendary enemies much easier to handle.

Since you can just keep freezing many of them without end (unless they randomly got assigned the freeze immunity skill), there's no reason not to grab this upgrade as soon as possible.

Elven Light

Although it's only available to use with full Might, this area of effect blast is perfect for getting a group of enemies off your back so you can regroup and take some guys down with executions or aimed Elf-Shots.

The elemental upgrades are also absolutely killer, giving you fire, freezing, or poison. Plan ahead and pick one that matches the vulnerability of a captain you are going up against!

 Elven Light

Ceaseless Might Skill (Brutal Aggression Upgrade)

Executions now cause enemies to flee in terror... and they don't fully deplete your Might? That's amazingly helpful for thinning out hordes. If you go with Wraith Execution instead of Ceaseless Might, you can chain multiple executions so long as you still have Focus left, getting in several quick kills (or depleting a captain's health).

 Ceaseless Might

Retaliation Upgrades

The final stop of the Combat chain lets you automatically kill a normal enemy when you get a perfect Last Chance, but the real draw here is in the available upgrades.

Adamant is the all-around most useful option, giving an extra Last Chance (which you'll need in battles where you are getting ganged up on by multiple captains and their hordes of followers). But Vengeful Drain can also be as useful, healing you on a successful Last Chance.

 Adamant Upgrade

Shadow Mount Skill

This is critical during those large sieges with plenty of big monsters, because you want to be able to quickly mount things like Caragors or Graugs at range to turn the tide of battle.

Note that there's a powerful way to upgrade this skill with the right equipment. When wearing two pieces of the Feral Legendary gear set, you can use Shadow Mount against unbroken Graugs, and with four pieces equipped you can shadow mount unbroken Drakes.

 Shadow Mount

Dragon Rider Skill

This one's a necessity, although it won't be available until later on in the campaign. Gaining the skill to ride a drake is critical in many large scale combat scenarios, in addition to providing some clear hints to Talion's ultimate fate...

 You can't tell me you don't want to do this!

Those are our favorite Shadow Of War skills for Talion and Celbrimbor to unleash! What are your favorite picks to use? Let us know in the comments below, and be sure to check out our other Shadow Of War guides for more tips and tricks. Here are a few to get you started: 

The Evil Within 2 Guide: How to Collect All Slides,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/c/o/l/collect-all-slides-2a8ed.png br9d6/the-evil-within-2-guide-how-to-collect-all-slides Fri, 13 Oct 2017 11:10:59 -0400 Thomas Wilde

When you begin The Evil Within 2, you're quickly shown the old slide projector in your hub area, Sebastian's Room. Whenever you find a slide somewhere in the world of STEM, you can bring it back to the projector to watch it.

Each slide shows you a scene from or relevant to Sebastian's life. While you're looking at them, you can have Sebastian call Juli Kidman -- who's playing mission control this time out -- for a quick conversation about the slide in question.

However, despite being the first collectible you're informed of in the game, slides are also arguably the hardest to find. There are a couple that you can practically trip over, but many are locked behind inconspicuous side missions or require you put in a bit of work before they show up.

Each new slide and the ensuing discussion with Kidman is worth 700 Green Gel, which is brought to you by your cat (it makes sense in context) once the conversation ends.

Spoiler Warning! The Evil Within 2 is the sort of game where you're better off going into it as cold as you can. This guide has been written as vaguely as possible to avoid spoilers, while still being useful. However, there's a decent chance that some of this will still manage to spill the beans on part(s) of the game's later plot.

Do yourself a favor and run through the game on your own without help first, then come back here later if you need a hand tracking these collectibles down. 

All the Slides in The Evil Within 2

Slide #1: This slide shows up automatically as part of the game's introduction.

Slide #2: During Chapter 3, visit the house at 345 Cedar Avenue in Union, south of the Pit Stop. In order, pick up the file in the garage, then investigate the TV in the living room.

You can now go to the house's small bedroom and find a brand new file. This triggers a long cutscene in which you're temporarily sent to a new location. Be sure to grab this slide while you're there, which is sitting on a wheelchair in the middle of the hall.

Slide #3: During Chapter 3, visit the white house at 336 Cedar Ave. When you pick up the Woman's Journal in the bedroom, you'll trigger a short stealth challenge.

Upon completion, you'll be returned to the bedroom with the slide on the table in front of you.

Slide #4: In Chapter 6, after you see the conversation between Myra and Sebastian in the room full of televisions in the Marrow, look to Sebastian's left. You can't pick the slide up until the conversation concludes, but it spawns on a table right as the broadcast starts.

Slide #5: In Chapter 6, visit the Juke Diner in the Business District and watch the Residual Memory in the kitchen. When you try to leave, something weird (well, relatively speaking) will happen. Ignore every survival instinct you possess and go investigate it.

Much as in Chapter 3, you'll subsequently be put through a quick stealth challenge, although this one has an additional puzzle element. Evade the ghost and when you find yourself stuck in an exam room, look in the mirror to see which door's reflection has a light in its window. Take that door in the "real" world to reach the next stage of the challenge.

Do so successfully and you'll return to the diner, where the corpse in the kitchen is now holding a slide for you.

Slide #6: Once you begin Chapter 11, this slide will be waiting for you the next time you visit Sebastian's Room. It appears in his office on the bookcase under the bulletin board. 

Slide #7: In Chapter 11, when you re-enter the Marrow, this slide is on top of the dresser that's being used to blockade the way back to the Operations warehouse.

Slide #8: In Chapter 11, you can open a shutter on the first floor of the laboratory with a shock bolt to enter the Pit Observatory. There isn't much here, but there is a file you can pick up, and doing so triggers a third short stealth sequence. Upon completion, you're returned to the Pit Observatory's office with this slide on the counter in front of you.

If you've also completed the similar stealth sequences from slides #3 and #5, there's a bonus scene at the end of this one after you escape. You'll receive two additional files that are otherwise unavailable, as well as a special reward at the end and the Finally Free trophy/achievement.

If you didn't find slides #3 and #5 first, you can still grab #8, but the sequence ends when you escape and all you get is the slide.

Slide #9: In Chapter 12, when you wake up in Sebastian's house, enter Lily's room before you go downstairs. The slide is on a bookcase to the left.

Slide #10: To get this slide, you must have saved Sykes in the Business District during Chapter 6 and subsequently completed his side mission, "Getting Back Online." If you have, the next time you get anywhere near the Business District,  he'll call your communicator with another side mission for you, "The Last Step." You can get the call and complete the mission as early as Chapter 11 if you like, although it's a significant detour at that point.

At the end of "The Last Step," you'll be left in a side area of the Marrow, where you can find this slide on a tray next to a STEM pod in the next room.

Slide #11: When you've collected the other 10 slides and had Sebastian discuss each one with Kidman, your cat has a secret to tell you. Follow it around the corner to the wheelchair, and Tatiana will give you the 11th slide.


Collecting all 11 slides in a single run through the game and triggering each one's conversation between Sebastian and Kidman will unlock the Chatting With Kidman trophy/achievement.

Be sure to check out our other The Evil Within 2 guides for more tips, tricks, and strategies. 

The Evil Within 2 Guide: Where to Find and How to Collect All 40 Files,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/e/v/i/evil-within-hero-171fe.png c493g/the-evil-within-2-guide-where-to-find-and-how-to-collect-all-40-files Fri, 13 Oct 2017 10:48:34 -0400 Thomas Wilde

In typical survival horror fashion, The Evil Within 2 has dozens of letters, photos, diaries, unsecured emails, and other assorted documents lying around for discovery. The files contain useful hints, valuable information, and background on the STEM project, including how and why it's gone so spectacularly wrong.

Spoiler Warning! You're probably better off not reading this guide yet if you haven't beaten the game. There are no deliberate spoilers in this list, but in order to discuss where to find certain items, it's still going to require discussion of the game's events. You may want to come back to this article after you've beaten the game, just to be sure.

Otherwise, let's dive in. 

All the Files in The Evil Within 2

Collecting 20 files in The Evil Within 2 unlocks the Doing Some Detecting trophy/achievement. If you get all 40, that unlocks the Diligent Reader trophy/achievement.

As a consequence, this requires you to accomplish all three major side missions; you must ensure that Julian Sykes lives when you encounter him in Chapter 6; and you must make sure to watch the Residual Memory in the kitchen of the Juke Diner in the Business District, which can first be found in Chapter 6.

Here's a list of all the files in The Evil Within 2 and where you can find them.

#1: Photo of William Baker
You can find this first file in the darkroom around the corner from where you find Baker's "exhibit," early in Chapter 2.

#2: Extravagant Letter
As you explore the hotel in Chapter 2, keep your eyes open for a partially-lowered portcullis on the second floor. This file is on a table just past it.

#3: Photo of Another Victim
In Chapter 2, when you reach the staircase with the giant swinging pendulum, check Manuela Roberto's room on the first floor. (Yes, the one that has a body dragged into it as you approach. Welcome to survival horror, lunch meat.) Hop over the overturned table to find this photo on a table.

#4: Journal in Abandoned House
At the end of Chapter 2, turn left before you leave the house and open the door to the study. The journal is on the bookcase opposite the door.

#5: Photo of Castellanos Family
Technically, you always have this, but it only turns into a file once you reach Union proper at the end of Chapter 2.

#6: Welcome to Union Pamphlet
You can find this file on the desk inside the Visitor Center, across the street from the exit of O'Neal's safe house in Chapter 3.

#7: Mobius Communication Log: Replacement Parts
Check the body of one of the dead Mobius security guards on the roof of the building east of the Visitor Center in Chapter 3.

#8: Woman's Journal
You'll find this file inside the bedroom of the white house at 336 Cedar Ave. during Chapter 3. The house is easy to spot as it's directly across from the Szilard House Inn, and is one of the only houses in the area with its porch light on. There's also an eviscerated Mobius security guard lying in front of it.

Picking up this journal begins a short sequence of events, completion of which is required to trigger some similar events later on.

#9: KCPD Request for Psychological Evaluation
This file is on the gurney in the garage at 345 Cedar Ave. in Union during Chapter 3.

#10: Torn Psychological Evaluation Report (Top)
When you pick up the previous file, you'll trigger an event that allows you to interact with the TV in the living room at 345 Cedar Ave. Doing so starts a brief cutscene, and afterward, you can find this file in the house's bedroom.

#11: Report #00592: Disposal Request
This file is on the desk in the office near the supply cache in the secret room underneath the Union Body Shop in Chapter 3.

#12: Turner's Communicator Log
After you complete "Rogue Signal," you can find this "file" on a desk in the basement of the Union Visitor Center. If you try to come down here before then, the door's locked.

#13: Report #00122: Recruits
This file is on the counter by the mirror in the Union Power and Gas safe house. You can get there during Chapter 3, but don't have to go there until Chapter 4.

#14: Report #00654: Core Displacement
This file is on the second floor of Tredwell Trucking's warehouse, next to the workbench. You can unlock the door to the warehouse's shipping dock at any point in Chapter 3 as long as you can get past or through the enemies outside, but you can't access its second floor until you're sent into the building as part of a story objective.

#15: Email: Union Growth
This file is on a computer in the Union control room in the Marrow in Chapter 4.

#16: Expansion and Data Goals
After you emerge from the tunnels with the gas leak in Chapter 4, check the computer in the corner of the room.

#17: Photo of Sebastian Castellanos
You have to pick this file up to progress into City Hall in Chapter 5.

#18: Report #00977: Urgent Structural Issues
Once you get inside the Union City Hall in Chapter 5, explore the first floor to find this file on a desk in the mail room.

#19: Krimson Post Article
After you solve the portrait puzzle in the Union City Hall in Chapter 5, keep an eye on the left side of the hallway as you move down it. This file is sort of hidden behind a lamp, where it's easy to overlook on your first trip down the hall.

#20: Photo of Murdered Mobius Operative
You have to pick this file up to progress through Chapter 5.

#21: Handwritten Note
In Chapter 5, after you get hit with a particularly evocative jump scare, you can find this file on a table by the only exit door.

#22: Report #00213: Union Social Maintenance
After successfully reactivating the emitter in Union City Hall, before you go outside, explore a bit. You can find this file on the desk in a file room on the second floor, just off the balcony that overlooks the front hall.

#23: Report #00532: Displacement Protocols
Once you escape from the slime beast in Chapter 6, take a left into the Facilities and open the frequency-locked door. This file's on a desk directly opposite the entrance.

#24: Core Candidates
After you speak with Hoffman in the safe room in the Marrow in Chapter 6, check the computer that was showing security feeds when you walked in.

#25: Barkeep's Journal
This file is in the Devil's Own Taproom on the south end of the Business District, on the furthest table from the door.

#26: Burnt Page from 'Submit to Freedom' 1
In Chapter 9, when you find the crank that needs a handle, look to your right to spot a closed door. When you return with the handle and use it, that door unlocks. Go through it and you can find a monster in a back room that looks like it's praying. This file is on its 'altar.'

#27: Torres' Journal
At the start of Chapter 11, while you're ransacking Torres's safehouse for supplies, stop to grab this file off the desk in the corner.

#28: Computer File: Hoffman's Notes
When you return to Hoffman's safe room in the Marrow in Chapter 11, she's set up a new computer on the table where she was sitting before. Check it for this file.

#29: Computer File: Security Protocols
This file is on the computer in the laboratory's security station in Chapter 11.

#30: Report: STEM Integration Irregularities
In Chapter 11, when you reach the door in the lab that won't open without a cerebral chip, turn left and follow the wall. There's an operation theater back here with a running slide projector. It's easy to miss because of the lighting, but there's a file attached to the bottom right corner of the projector's screen.

#31: Report: Irregularity Studies
In Chapter 11, when you reach the laboratory, be sure to visit Lab 1 on the first floor. It's tucked underneath the staircase. Inside, you can find the facility's morgue, where a jar of Red Gel and this file have been left out for you.

#32: Computer File: Pit Observatory
Use a shock bolt on the fuse box on the first floor of the laboratory in Chapter 11 to open its shutter. This leads you to the Pit, where you can find this file on a computer in its observation post.

This is the trigger for the third of three optional stealth challenges in the game, none of which are labeled or announced. (This is also why there's such a big spoiler warning in this article's introduction.) The first is triggered by picking up the Woman's Journal, as noted above; the second happens after you watch the Residual Memory in the kitchen of the Juke Diner in the Business District. Completing all three allows you to collect the next two files, as well as unlock a couple of additional secrets.

#33: Torn Psychological Evaluation Report (Bottom)
As noted above, you must have completed all three stealth challenges to find this file. If you have, the stealth segment that started when you picked up the previous file doesn't end immediately when you escape your pursuer. Instead, you end up in an isolated wing of a hospital. Check the room on the right to find this file next to a stack of burned books.

#34: Letter From Police Chief
See the previous file, but this time, check the room on the left side of the hallway. This file's waiting for you on a gurney. You have to pick up both of them before you can escape the area.

#35: Computer File: Operative Case
You'll need to grab this file during Chapter 11 from a computer in Lab 3 on the second floor of the laboratory.

#36: Burnt Page from 'Surrender to Freedom' 2
In the second area of Chapter 12, this can be found on the altar in front of the burning wireframe statue.

#37: Message From Sykes
Complete Sykes's side mission "The Last Step" in Chapter 11 or 13, then return to his safe house in the Business District to find this on his desk. Naturally, if Sykes has died before this point (i.e. you didn't save him in Chapter 6), this file never appears.

#38: Hoffman's Journal
Once you scope out the hotel for Hoffman in Chapter 13, you can find this file in the duffel bag on the coffee table in the hotel's lobby, underneath a lot of ammo and crafting materials.

#39: Theodore's Scripture 1
On top of the altar in the church at the beginning of Chapter 14.

#40: Theodore's Scripture 2
After you clear the first arena in Chapter 14, you have to use a valve to turn off a series of gas jets. Past the valve, there's an easy-to-miss side room that contains this final file, along with some supplies.


That's it for all the files in The Evil Within 2. Be sure to check out our other The Evil Within 2 guides for more tips, tricks, and strategies. 

Shadow Of War: Legendary Gear Sets and How to Obtain Them,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/c/o/v/cov5-014ad.jpg 1fdxm/shadow-of-war-legendary-gear-sets-and-how-to-obtain-them Thu, 12 Oct 2017 16:23:56 -0400 Ty Arthur

Pulling some influence from the ARPG genre, long-awaited Middle Earth sequel, Shadow Of War, features some surprising changes to the series' core gameplay, including legendary gear sets that offer increased bonuses as more items from each set are equipped.

Two of these sets -- the Bright Lord and Vendetta Legendary sets -- require you to complete specific tasks, while the others are found piecemeal by defeating Legendary orcs of a corresponding type. Equipping a full set unlocks the Stuff Of Legend achievement.

Unlike normal equipment, though, Legendary items are meant to scale with you as you level up -- so they don't become irrelevant when new gear is found. In other words, always check any given item's description to see what quest you need to undertake to unlock new abilities. 

Below, we break down each set's specific weapons and armor, how they are acquired, and what bonuses are accrued by having multiple pieces together at the same time.

Shadow Of War Bright Lord Legendary Gear Set

These are probably the easiest Legendary weapons and armor pieces to acquire, but they can also take the most time because they are spread out across the entire game world.

Each piece of the Bright Lord armor set is found in a region's barrow, which you can't access until you find all the Ithiliden poem pieces and open each door. For a full guide on each door's unlock poem, head over here.

Here's where you can find the pieces: 

  • Bright Lord Armor -- Open the Ithildin Door in Minas Ithil
  • Bright Lord Sword -- Open the Ithildin Door in Gorgoroth
  • Bright Lord Dagger -- Open the Ithildin Door in Seregost
  • Bright Lord Bow -- Open the Ithildin Door in Nurnen
  • Bright Lord Cloak -- Open the Ithildin Door in Cirith Ungol
  • Bright Lord Ringcraft- - Earn Bronze on all Shadows of the Past missions

Two Piece Bonus: Gain Wrath 50% faster, but Elven Rage lasts half as long.

Four Piece Bonus: Replenish all Elf-shot when killing an enemy during Elven Rage.

 Bright Lord Armor 

Shadow Of War Dark Legendary Gear Set

As the name suggests, this Legendary set is found by targeting members of the stealthy Dark Tribe of orcs, and its bonuses revolve around poison usage.

  • Dark Armor -- Kill a Legendary Dark Tank
  • Dark Sword -- Kill a Legendary Dark Slayer or Dark Destroyer
  • Dark Dagger -- Kill a Legendary Dark Assassin
  • Dark Bow -- Kill a Legendary Dark Marksman or Dark Tracker
  • Dark Cloak -- Kill a Legendary Dark Beastmaster or Dark Berserker
  • Dark Ringcraft -- Kill a Legendary Dark Commander or Dark Trickster

Two Piece Bonus: Gain 1 Might when enemies take damage from your Poison

Four Piece Bonus: All attacks have a 15% chance to inflict an explosive poison on grunts

Shadow Of War Feral Legendary Gear Set

To get this set, be on the lookout for the Feral tribes that assault your fortresses and take out any Legendary orcs you see! The bonuses are frankly amazing for those who like to take beasts into battle, letting you tame Graugs and Drakes from a distance without any first injuring them.

  • Feral Armor -- Kill a Legendary Feral Tank
  • Feral Sword -- Kill a Legendary Feral Slayer or Feral Destroyer
  • Feral Dagger -- Kill a Legendary Feral Assassin or Feral Berserker
  • Feral Bow -- Kill a Legendary Feral Marksman or Feral Tracker
  • Feral Cloak -- Kill a Legendary Feral Beastmaster
  • Feral Ringcraft -- Kill a Legendary Feral Commander or Feral Trickster

Two Piece Bonus: Shadow Mount unbroken Graugs

Four Piece Bonus: Shadow Mount unbroken Drakes

Shadow Of War Machine Legendary Gear Set

Take on the tinkering, fire-loving Machine tribe orcs to get these pieces of Legendary gear:

  • Machine Armor -- Kill a Legendary Machine Tank or Machine Destroyer
  • Machine Sword -- Kill a Legendary Machine Slayer or Machine Berserker
  • Machine Dagger -- Kill a Legendary Machine Assassin or Machine Tracker
  • Machine Bow -- Kill a Legendary Machine Marksman
  • Machine Cloak -- Kill a Legendary Machine Beastmaster or Machine Trickster
  • Machine Ringcraft -- Kill a Legendary Machine Commander

Two Piece Bonus: Call Followers summons Sappers and Iron Guard summons more Sappers

Four Piece Bonus: Elven Light also scatters explosives around you

Shadow Of War Marauder Legendary Gear Set

Taking out Legendary orcs from the Marauder tribe grants these Legendary items, which revolve around picking up Mirian for bonuses:

  • Marauder Armor -- Kill a Legendary Marauder Tank or Marauder Destroyer
  • Marauder Sword -- Kill a Legendary Marauder Slayer or Marauder Berserker
  • Marauder Dagger -- Kill a Legendary Marauder Assassin or Marauder Tracker
  • Marauder Bow -- Kill a Legendary Marauder Marksman
  • Marauder Cloak -- Kill a Legendary Marauder Beastmaster or Marauder Trickster
  • Marauder Ringcraft -- Kill a Legendary Marauder Commander

Two Piece Bonus: Picking up Mirian increases damage by 2% per Mirian gained for 20 seconds

Four Piece Bonus: Picking up Mirian recovers 2 Health per Mirian gained

Shadow Of War Mystic Legendary Gear Set

Killing Legendary orcs from the Mystic tribe results in these gear drops, which help you out by improving your dominating rank and file soldiers:

  • Mystic Armor -- Kill a Legendary Mystic Tank or Mystic Destroyer
  • Mystic Sword -- Kill a Legendary Mystic Slayer
  • Mystic Dagger -- Kill a Legendary Mystic Assassin or Mystic Berserker
  • Mystic Bow -- Kill a Legendary Mystic Marksman or Mystic Tracker
  • Mystic Cloak -- Kill a Legendary Mystic Beastmaster
  • Mystic Ringcraft -- Kill a Legendary Mystic Commander or Mystic Trickster

Two Piece Bonus: Dominated grunts take 50% less damage

Four Piece Bonus: Dominated grunts gain Cursed weapons

Shadow Of War Warmonger Legendary Gear Set

Want to cause flaming, terrifying death? This set is for you, with the following Legendary pieces available:

  • Warmonger Armor -- Kill a Legendary Warmonger Tank or Warmonger Destroyer
  • Warmonger Sword -- Kill a Legendary Warmonger Slayer
  • Warmonger Dagger -- Kill a Legendary Warmonger Assassin or Warmonger Tracker
  • Warmonger Bow -- Kill a Legendary Warmonger Marksman
  • Warmonger Cloak -- Kill a Legendary Warmonger Beastmaster or Warmonger Berserker
  • Warmonger Ringcraft -- Kill a Legendary Warmonger Commander or Warmonger Trickster

Two Piece Bonus: Recover 50 Health when killing an enemy who is on Fire

Four Piece Bonus: While on Fire, you will periodically explode, releasing a burst of flames

Shadow Of War Terror Legendary Gear Set

To grab these items, make sure to kill Legendary orcs from the Terror tribe and then focus on slaying enemies who are fleeing after brutal strikes:

  • Terror Armor -- Kill a Legendary Terror Tank
  • Terror Sword -- Kill a Legendary Terror Slayer or Terror Destroyer
  • Terror Dagger -- Kill a Legendary Terror Assassin
  • Terror Bow -- Kill a Legendary Terror Marksman or Terror Tracker
  • Terror Cloak -- Kill a Legendary Terror Beastmaster or Terror Berserker
  • Terror Ringcraft -- Kill a Legendary Terror Commander or Terror Trickster

Two Piece Bonus: Quick Throw instantly kills fleeing grunts

Four Piece Bonus: Recover 100 Health when killing a fleeing enemy

Shadow Of War Vendetta Legendary Gear Set

This particular Legendary set is acquired by completing the online Vendetta missions under specific parameters, like getting bow headshots, stealth kills, and so on.

Although there are several different types of kills to get, this one is actually even easier to acquire than the Bright Lord set and can pretty much be done immediately at the start of the game.

The bonuses are interesting, but potentially deadly because they let you trade health for Might or Elf-Shot -- even if you don't currently have any left.

  • Vendetta Armor -- Kill an online Vendetta target while above 80% health
  • Vendetta Sword -- Complete your first online Vendetta
  • Vendetta Dagger -- Use a stealth attack against an online Vendetta target
  • Vendetta Bow -- Get a headshot against an online Vendetta target
  • Vendetta Cloak -- Use a mounted attack against an online Vendetta target
  • Vendetta Ringcraft -- Dominate an online Vendetta target

Two Piece Bonus: Perform attacks requiring Might by consuming 40% of your max Health instead

Four Piece Bonus: If you have no Elf-shot, you can perform Ranged Attacks by consuming 25% of your max Health

 Vendetta Cloak

More Shadow Of War Guides

Those are all the Legendary sets currently available with the base game! Need help with any other part of this sprawling Mordor adventure? Be sure to check out our other Shadow Of War guides, tips and tricks:

Dragon Ball Xenoverse 2 Guide: How to Set Up Local Multiplayer on Nintendo Switch,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/x/e/n/xenoverse-8cc16.jpg pf3km/dragon-ball-xenoverse-2-guide-how-to-set-up-local-multiplayer-on-nintendo-switch Thu, 12 Oct 2017 14:43:11 -0400 Autumn Fish

The Nintendo Switch version of Dragon Ball Xenoverse 2 introduces a brand new Local Multiplayer mode to the fighting/role-playing game that you can use to play with nearby friends. In this mode, you use the Switch's built-in Local Wireless to connect up to six systems and duke it out in 3-versus-3 battles. Or, if you're the cooperative type, band together in Parallel Quests to save time itself.

The only issue is Local Multiplayer isn't the most intuitive thing to set up in Xenoverse 2. There's no giant red arrow that says "Hey, Rookie! The Local Wireless section is over here!" Thankfully, though, the process turns out to be rather similar to connecting with others online.

How to Set Up Local Wireless Multiplayer in Dragon Ball Xenoverse 2 for Nintendo Switch

For starters, it's impossible to access Local Wireless connections while you're connected to the online Xenoverse game server. If you're already in-game, you must first back out to the title menu and decline the prompt to connect to the server in order to start in offline mode.

Once you've jumped into offline mode, head toward the Reception Area near the Dragon Ball. The clerks that handle Local Wireless Multiplayer are the exact same clerks that handle Online connectivity. Talk to an Online clerk and select Local Communication to start your session.

How to Set Up Local Multiplayer Dragon Ball Xenoverse 2 for Nintendo Switch

The Online clerks act as the Local Communication clerks in Offline Mode.

Note that in order to unlock the Online Battles clerk, you must complete the first non-tutorial mission of the game. Similarly, in order to unlock the Online Parallel Quests clerk, you must complete your first Offline Parallel Quest. 

Once you start up Local Communications with the clerk, someone's going to need to create a room for everybody to pile into. Select Create Room and set up the match rules. If you're doing a Parallel Quest, the room creator also needs to choose which one you're going to play. Once the room is created, anybody who is playing needs to pile in via the Search function. If you can't find the room, be sure that you're standing in front of the same clerk.

Once all players are connected, the Local Multiplayer match will begin. Be sure to check out the rest of our Dragon Ball Xenoverse 2 guides, whether you want to know more about Nintendo Switch exclusive features or building a strong character.

Stranger Things Chapter 2 Walkthrough -- The Gate,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/w/a/l/walkthrough-ed88d.png l9def/stranger-things-chapter-2-walkthrough-the-gate Thu, 12 Oct 2017 09:55:37 -0400 Ashley Gill

Welcome to our Chapter 2 walkthrough for the Stranger Things mobile game. When we left Chapter 1, Hopper had just departed the National Hawkins Laboratory and was tasked with finding Nancy.

Chapter 2 continues Hopper's search for Nancy, which takes him into the Upside Down. But his adventure also leads him somewhere even more dangerous.

As with our Chapter 1 walkthrough, we're going to go through getting through Chapter sections area by area. Chapter 2 is longer and more difficult than Chapter 1. Important directional bits are bolded so you can skim through for directions. 

Stranger Things Chapter 2 -- The Gate

You start this chapter in the Upside Down. Luckily, you don't have to be here for long. This area has a particular gimmick: knocking pods around to wipe out the tentacles in your path.

The very first section of this area has one of these pods. Each pod can be hit a total of three times, after which it will explode. Have Hopper punch this first one left twice, then up once to have it deal with those annoying tentacles.

The next room is a little trickier, but luckily, not by much. Punch the pods into the positions seen in the image below.

Then punch them each toward the tentacles at about the same time. With the tentacles taken out, you can exit the Upside Down.

Lucas will now rejoin you, and you can enter the next dungeon via the giant spooky tree stump.

Forest Maze

You can destroy bushes for money, hearts, and slingshot ammo in this dungeon. You want to try to stay at full health in this area so Lucas can one-shot birds from afar. Otherwise, you may have a tough time.

Knock out the first enemy you see and open the gate leading to the bear. You're about to get your first taste of this dungeon's gimmick.

Have Lucas shoot down the beehive closest to the bear (the one to the left in the image above), then the one on the other side of the cracked tree trunk to have the bear make a path for you.

Go right to get some coins and your first of this area's collectibles, a birdhouse.

Head to the previous area, then go up and right to make your way to the next room.

First things first: Hit the bear trap, then shoot the bird before it comes at you. Then head south to pick up a keycard.

Head back up, then up again. Take out the enemies (be aware of the bird) and use the keycard to open the gate to your left. Kill the bird in this room then keep walking left.

This area is a little more complicated. First, take out the gunman at the top right and get the birdhouse. Then set off the bear trap at the bottom and take out the enemy on the other side.

What comes next has to be done quickly -- and in order. Here are the steps:

  1. Shoot the beehive closest to the bear
  2. Set off the bear trap again
  3. Shoot the hive on the other side
  4. Go to the small area on the right and shoot the beehive in the upper area

If you've done it right, the bear will charge past the trap and through the log preventing your passage. Flip the switch and the first gate to the boss will open.

You went through a lot of work to flip that switch, but you're not done yet. Head through the passage at the bottom left of the area. Take out both enemies then continue into the next room -- hopefully with full health to shoot the birds out of the sky before they hit you. Grab the keycard, head back two rooms, then head north.

This is another room filled with birds. Being at full health will make this part much easier since Lucas can deal with all of the birds before getting pecked at. Go up once they're all dispatched.

This is another puzzle room, and it's not as complicated as it looks. Stand where you see in the image above, then shoot the left and then right beehives to get the bear to charge through. Once the bear resets, walk forward and set your sights on the next obstacles.

Hit the bear trap to the left, then the hive to the bottom right, and lastly the hive to the top right to get the bear to follow the correct path. Flip the switch to unlock another gate in front of the boss, then head up to the next area.

If you can, take out the birds here so they don't bother you on your way back.(Those coins are pretty enticing, too.) Go north into the next area, take out the enemies here, grab the birdhouse, and keep going north.

This room has a few enemies, particularly birds and a gunman. It's in your best interest to take them out before they kill you, so do so and make your way through the room to go to the north area. Take out the enemies here and grab the keycard found here.

Retrace your steps to the room with the pile of coins. Take a left and get ready for your next puzzle room.

Deal with enemies as you can here (don't get near the bald guy) as you set off the bear trap next to the entrance and open the gate at the bottom of this area. This is one we're going to go through step by step: 

  1. Stand above the beehive all the way to the right
  2. Shoot the beehive all the way to the right
  3. Shoot the beehive next to the chest to have the bear take out the bald enemy
  4. Stand above the beehive next to the bear trap
  5. Set off the bear trap
  6. Shoot the beehive next to it
  7. Shoot the beehive on the opposite side of the fence
  8. Walk to the area the bear initially was
  9. Shoot the beehive at the top left of the area

Walk your way through this room to go through the passage to the top left. Take out the enemy there and Nancy will join your party. Have Nancy bash through the fallen tree to flip the switch and open a gate to the boss.

Put Nancy in your party so that you have Nancy and Lucas, then backtrack to the area with the stack of money. Whack through the tree, get the money, then head south two rooms.

Take out the enemy here and unlock the gate using the keycard in your inventory. The next room is another enemy room. Defeat them and head right.

Take out the enemies in the next room, then go through the bottom right passage to flip a switch. Go back to the last room, then go down the passage next to the one you just went through.

The next room is yet another that will take some speed on your part. You need to disarm the bear traps above before luring the bear. This has to be done with Lucas. I'll walk you through this one step by step:

  1. Stay at the very bottom of the room
  2. Shoot the first trap
  3. Walk two spaces to the right and shoot the next one
  4. Take out the trap next to you
  5. Walk to the right-most section
  6. Walk up to the stump
  7. Shoot the beehive

Now go back two rooms and get back to where the switch is to make your way through this section without the bear blocking your path. Make sure to take out the birdhouse and flip the switch on the right side of the room to unlock the next gate to the boss.

Go right to pick up the Lens Filter Jonathan was looking for.

It's time to backtrack a bit. Head to the room where you see Nancy's face in the image below and use your last keycard on the gate here. Go left an pick up the VHS tape.

It's now time to go fight the dungeon boss. Take a look at your map and make your way there.

Chapter 2 Boss Strategy

This boss fight is actually very easy.

Try to get some hits in while each soldier is going in circles, and after that phase, just stay out of their way and wait to get some hits in. Each soldier only takes a few hits to KO. It's really that simple. 

Outside the Dungeon

Exit the dungeon and head south instead of through the Upside Down now that you have Nancy. Destroy the tree trunk in your way, then keep going south to give Jonathan his lens. He'll give you a backpack that increases Lucas's rock capacity in return.

There are a couple of things you can do now -- like go to the general store in town or Bradley's shop to buy items people need and deliver them -- but for the sake of this walkthrough, we're going to stay on the story's track.

Walk left along the road until you get to the spot indicated in the image below and bust through the fallen tree blocking your path.

Walk to the location shown in the next image and bust the fallen tree to make a path to Hawkins Middle School. Once you enter, Chapter 3 will begin.

That's it for Chapter 2 of the Stranger Things game. I highly recommend exploring on your own because a big part of the fun is exploring and finding things. Be sure to check out our other Stranger Things guides for more walkthroughs, tips, and tricks! 

Digimon Links Guide: Beginner's Tips and Tricks,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/p/t/b/ptbcv1508059346-94409.png i6akv/digimon-links-guide-beginners-tips-and-tricks Wed, 11 Oct 2017 19:08:06 -0400 Craig Snyder

After massive success in Asia, Digimon Links has hit the U.S. App Store and Google Play Store. The game allows you to create your own virtual Digimon farm, take part in 3-on-3 battles, and raise your Digimon into fierce Megas, all while offering constant quests and adventures.

Reviews are regarding it as one of the most complete Digimon games to date. There's a ton of content packed into the game on release, and we can only expect more to be pumped out in the coming weeks. Starting off correctly is one of the best ways to get a head-start on the competition.

So the question is this: Need Digimon Links help? If so, here are a few tips, tricks, and strategies for new players to get the most out of the wary game.

Digimon Links Rerolls -- Don't!

I've seen a lot of players on forums and other discussion boards asking if they should reroll to get a particular Digimon. Rerolling to start over is not an efficient strategy in Digimon Links. Let me explain why.

After making it through Stage 3 of Area 1 in Normal Quests, you obtain a level 40 MetalGreymon. This Digimon is easily strong enough to power you through days of content by itself without rerolling. When you finally finish all of the Beginner Missions and Advent Quests, you'll have earned fragments for WarGreymon, MetalGarurumon, and SaberLeomon. All three are Megas which are going to be powerful enough to allow you to progress through the game without rerolling just to get a specific Digimon of your liking.

Rerolling will give you the potential to get a really strong pull from the capture events, but starting over also means you've lost time and progress. That time could have otherwise been spent in grinding toward obtaining Digimon even stronger than what you originally had your eyes on. Don't get discouraged and keep on pushing.

Digivolving and Materials

Tap your Digivice then go into the Digivolve menu. Digimon that you can evolve will have "Can Digivolve" displayed beneath their portrait. You can only Digivolve if your Digimon are at the max level. Proceed and you'll then be shown multiple evolutions you can evolve into, with the evolutions that you are currently allowed to perform being listed at the top.

Evolutions further down the list require materials that you don't already have. Many of these will be Megas. You can farm materials for evolving following this weekly schedule:

  • Monday: Neutral
  • Tuesday: Fire
  • Wednesday: Water
  • Thursday: Nature
  • Friday: Electric
  • Saturday: Dark
  • Sunday: Holy

Materials used to evolve into Megas aren't found through the normal weekly questing rewards, however. These are shard materials and they're only obtained through dungeons that appear on a special rotating schedule. These can be around for up to two weeks before they cycle out. The drop rates for these shard materials are typically very low, so you'll need a lot of stamina and patience to find and get them.

The Restaurant

The Restaurant is a building you unlock after clearing Area 5. This building is probably the most important in the game as it allows you to periodically obtain a free stamina refill.

DigiStones are some of the most precious materials in the game and many people use it to refill their stamina bars. When you've finalized your upgrade of the Restaurant, you'll be able to use your DigiStones for other purposes. Use the free refills you get from this building as frequently as possible.

Grinding DigiStones

Completing Normal Quests will give you two stones when you complete a stage for the first time. This is what most players rely on, but the more efficient method is to use the notice board and utilize multiplayer. With the game being relatively new, there's a massive demand for multiplayer right now and finding space in a room can be incredibly difficult -- but I'd recommend that you at least give it a shot.

When you join up with a new player for the first time, you get 10 stones. You can do this 10 times, meaning you can get up to 100 stones this way. After this point, you'll get three stones for each new person up until you hit 50 total people (for a total of 120 stones). You also benefit from adding players to your friends list, and you get 10 stones per patch you complete with them. To my knowledge, there's not a cap on this method for grinding stones in Digimon Links.

Save Your Stones

A lot of players seem to feel pressured to invest all of their DigiStones in capture events. My advice is that you don't do that yet. The Western version of Digimon Links has only been out for about a week, and if it follows the same path as the Japanese release, then there will be special events for captures that make them more valuable. These are events that will offer a higher chance at Megas, enhancement chips, and things like that.

Eventually, you're going to get to a point where upgrading your Restaurant takes days to complete. At this time, it's perfectly acceptable to use some of your DigiStones to refill your stamina if you absolutely must. Another great use for them is to upgrade your Digimon storage. Doing so will allow you to hold more Digimon at one time.

Managing Clones

There will come a time when you eventually have two copies of the same Digimon. You have three options in this situation:

  • Combine the two Digimon so that one of your clones gets a random type resistance.
  • Digivolve them in separate ways so that your team is more diverse.
  • Transfer their skills to your other Digimon.

I'd recommend you combine them for the resistance, but keep in mind that this can only be done with Digimon of the same species. If you have a large set of clones, you can effectively combine them and reroll until you get the exact resistance that you want. This allows you to gain a resistance type that your Digimon is weak in, which is a massive advantage.


Digimon Links is a new game that everyone in the West is just now figuring out, but it's clear that this is a very deep and grind-heavy game. Leave us a comment below if you have any additional questions or suggestions for further guides.

Here are some of our other Digimon Links guides:

Shadow Of War True Ending Guide...Is It Really Locked Behind A Paywall?,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/c/o/v/cov3-36f81.jpg 0db26/shadow-of-war-true-ending-guideis-it-really-locked-behind-a-paywall Wed, 11 Oct 2017 13:58:35 -0400 Ty Arthur

After the lackluster ending from the first game, Middle-Earth: Shadow Of War decided to bring about a more definitive conclusion to Talion's saga -- but it's only there for those willing to put in some extra time to get a secret true ending.

While there are multiple endings depending on how long you want to play, the "true" part is a bit of a misnomer, as you do get an ending of sorts with Act III. The "true" ending is quasi-optional, and only arrives if you spend a good long time in a huge war of defensive attrition. 

This lengthy post-game experience called the Shadow Wars is essentially the developer's response to the lack of meaningful post-game content from Shadow Of Mordor. Now you've got plenty to do -- probably for a good 10 or 15 hours, depending how much you leveled your orcs prior to hitting Act IV.

Talion will have to constantly defend his strongholds against ever more powerful invading armies sent by Sauron. There are a whopping 10 different stages of this invasion, and its quite a slog if you weren't prepared.

Loot Or Grind?

The big question, and what everyone from Reddit on down accused the game of before they'd even played it, was: do you need to buy loot boxes to win this section?

The answer is a pretty straightforward "No." Here's the thing with those loot boxes containing Epic and Legendary orcs: they are randomized, and they aren't always high level.

While you could in theory spend a bunch of mirian or gold to get a killer army without doing any work, in practice its frankly better to build your own army so you can focus on what you need at the time.

You might get an orc from those loot boxes terrified of fire or who immediately dies from poison... and then the next invading army will be armed with fire or poison. Simply finding better Epic/Legendary orcs out on the world map or during a siege is often a better option all around.

If you've got the spare cash though (and if you are killing orcs with any frequency or completing the community quests... you absolutely will be loaded down with mirian and gold) there's no reason not to try a few boxes and hope for a good haul.

 The loot boxes are mostly unnecessary -- you could play the whole game without ever buying one

Completing The Shadow Wars

Here's the thing many are missing about Act IV -- unless you need to upgrade Talion's gear, don't kill Legendary quality orcs who are assaulting your fortresses! Recruit them instead.

Do it during the battle if you can, and if you lose the fortress, then make double sure to recruit them when you re-take it later. In fact, in some cases it's better to let a stronghold be taken, then go through the various stealth and combat missions to re-take it and build up an army of higher level orcs along the way.

For the most part, having stronger orcs to defend your fortress is a better choice than having Talion outfitted with the best equipment. The only exception there is the Wealth rune that gives recruited orcs a bonus to level, as that can be a huge asset during the Shadow Wars.

        Why kill 'em when you can recruit 'em?

The best way to end the Shadow Wars segment quickly and get to the secret ending is to be prepared. Don't rush your way through the main story segments of the first three Acts without building up your orc army.

If you take some time during the main segment of the game to level your orcs and get ready for the sieges, you'll be in a much better position than if you buy a bunch of loot boxes. Sometimes getting better orcs means letting them kill you so they level and gain bonus traits before you dominate them.

From there, just think in terms of tactics and upgrades. The Machine tribe is often resistant or immune to fire, so why would you put fire upgrades on a fortress always being assaulted by that tribe? Make sure to put gems on your orcs to boost their level as well.

Shadow Of War True Ending

Finally hitting Stage 10 of the siege battles unlocks the Peace In Death achievement and gives you the optional true Shadow Of War ending.

The Shadow Wars segment feels like such a slog because it's supposed to represent decades of warfare as Sauron grinds Talion down, bringing the game's timeline in conjunction with the Return Of The King's film version.

If going through years of battles doesn't strike your fancy -- whether you bother with loot boxes or not -- you could always just take the easy way out and watch the true ending below.

Having trouble getting through the first three Acts before hitting the Shadow Wars segment? Be sure to check out our full list of Shadow Of War guides for more tips and tricks to help you through so you can get this hidden ending!

How to Import Your Orc Nemesis to Shadow Of War,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/c/o/v/cov4-439df.jpg ihwvl/how-to-import-your-orc-nemesis-to-shadow-of-war Wed, 11 Oct 2017 12:55:01 -0400 Ty Arthur

You worked hard to get that nemesis in Shadow of War, tracking down and taming a caragor and then lining yourself up for the perfect kill, only to get hit by a hail of spears and then watch the lights go out when that orc captain brings down his giant cleaver.

Vengeance must be yours! Sadly, that was probably two or three years ago, and you haven't picked up Shadow Of Mordor in all that time. Well, now that brutish green nemesis can be back as you grind your way through the orc hordes in Shadow Of War!

Importing Your Shadow Of Mordor Nemesis Guide

Here's the annoying part about this process -- you don't have to do anything in Shadow Of War to import your old orc enemies. Instead, you have to do some things with the first game instead.

That might be a pretty long and frustrating process to just get one new upgraded enemy, especially when there are so many other orcs waiting to be slaughtered by the thousands already.

If, like me, you hadn't played Shadow Of Mordor in quite some time, you probably deleted everything off your hard drive to make room for other games. Well, better get started on re-installing. Even if you had the disc version, there's a big download time ahead -- and then there's the 7.6 gig update to also download that brings in the Nemesis Forge system.

Go make a sandwich or see a movie or something and come back when that's all done.

...or you could forge a new ring of power. Didn't seem to take Talion and Celbrimbor that long!

Now that all of that is out of the way, load up Shadow Of Mordor and and access the new Nemesis Forge feature.

The forge generates a roster of orcs you interacted with most throughout the game, or creates a randomized roster if you didn't have many captains that you specifically dealt with repeatedly.

On the Sauron's Army screen you can see the various orc captains -- your follower will have the white hand icon, and your nemesis will have the flaming eye icon. When you select either orc it will clear say "follower" or "nemesis" next to their name before you switch over to their strength/weakness stats.

Typically your nemesis will be the orc you had the most number of battles against. If you want a different orc for your nemesis, you can increase its chances of being picked by fighting it repeatedly without killing it.

The number of times an orc is targeted through the Sauron's Army screen also seems to impact this mechanic. So if you repeatedly target two different orcs back to back one of them should become your nemesis.

Exit out so it saves and that's it -- your follower and nemesis will be ready to go for the sequel.

 Red eye for nemesis, white hand for follower

Finally, just load Shadow Of War and play. You don't have to pick any options or go to any menu screen -- the game handles all that. It will import your Nemesis Forge data from Shadow Of Mordor without any prompting from you, and your nemesis will appear randomly as you play throughout the game.

There's no set location or time he appears, so be ready for an ultra powered captain (who is probably immune to several forms of combat and regenerates health quickly) to pop up at the worst possible time.

 Nobody ambush me, alright? I'm just trekking to Gondor for some flowers!

Remember though, this nemesis importing system isn't cross-platform compatible. If you had Shadow Of Mordor on Xbox One, you can't import to the PS4 version of Shadow Of War, and so on.

Which nemesis did you import, and what killer new skills and features did he get when imported to Shadow Of War? Let us know all about your orc nemesis in the comments! If you need more help with the game, be sure to check out our other Shadow Of War tips and tricks as well.

Stranger Things Chapter 1 Walkthrough,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/s/t/r/stranger-things-walkthrough-13f8d.png jmoiw/stranger-things-chapter-1-walkthrough Wed, 11 Oct 2017 10:12:31 -0400 Ashley Gill

To say the Stranger Things mobile game is better than I expected is a bit of an understatement -- it's a lot better of a free mobile puzzle adventure game than anyone could have thought it would be.

The first chapter of Stranger Things sets the tone for the rest, giving the player relatively easy puzzles and easing them into the flow of the game. You go through an area (dungeons), solving puzzles and whomping on enemies as you go.

This walkthrough will go through any notable tasks in chapter 1, The Lost Boys. This is the only chapter that does not make use of the overworld map, and the puzzles themselves aren't too hard to figure out.

You can find a map of this chapter's dungeon above the boss strategy section. With that in mind, let's start with the walkthrough for getting through Hawkins National Laboratory.

Chapter 1 Walkthrough

Leave Hopper's trailer and head south to start the chapter.

Talk to Powell to get the keycard. Grab it and head inside Hawkins National Laboratory. In this dungeon you can bash cabinets and barrels for money and hearts.

There are a few things you can interact with and smash in this room but all you need to do is get the keycard from the chest, then take the north door to the next room.

The next room has your first enemy encounter. Each of these guys takes two hits to be killed. Just tap to hit them, and make sure you do it before they hit you. Hopper charges toward anything he can hit if he has full health, which can make getting around easier.

Also make sure to punch the security camera on the north wall, which will count toward a heart piece.

Go to the right to flip a switch and nab some coins, then go back to the room the enemies were in and go up.

This is the room that leads to this dungeon's boss. You can't get in there for now, so head right.

In the room next to the multicolor laser room is the first switch (purple) as well as another security camera, which can only be destroyed by Lucas.

Keep heading through this area (it's mostly a straight-shot) until you get to the end. You can find both a keycard and another security camera that must be destroyed by Lucas here.

Go back to the room with the (now) 3 lasers and go through the left door using the keycard you just picked up. In this room dispatch the enemies and go up.

Two rooms up you find a room with three enemies and some lasers, two of the enemies having guns. You simply have to brute-force your way through these enemies and flip both switches to the north to get the keycard in this room.

Go down two rooms, then enter the left door using the keycard. Make your way through this room then head up.

This is your first taste of using the environment to win a fight, but it won't be your last. The easiest way to deal with this guy is to get right next to him so he notices you, then immediately run to the switch on the bottom (making sure to trigger it from the top and not the right side) to get rid of him. Get the coins he drops and head upward to have Lucas join you.

Make sure to add Lucas to your party, then head back to the room that had three enemies and a keycard.

From here, first go through the left door and have Lucas shoot the switch to go through the next door and press the button to turn off the red laser.

Head back two rooms and have Lucas again shoot a switch Hopper can't reach (pictured above), then head right.

The next room has three enemies, two of which have guns. You can have Lucas shoot them with his slingshot to make quick work of them and move onto the next room.

In this room, shoot the switch below the door you came through with the slingshot, and then shoot the enemy to get him to walk into the lasers and die. Lastly, shoot the switch on the far side of the room to open the next door.

Make your way through the next room to get to the next puzzle room. Below are the steps:

  • Walk to the right and hit the switch on the right wall
  • Use Lucas to shoot the switch you can't reach
  • Go to the bottom of the room and flip the switch there
  • Use Lucas to shoot the first switch you flipped to turn all the lasers off

Then make your way to the next room, which also happens to be a puzzle room. There is also a security camera here for you to take out.

Let's do this one step by step, too. It's quite easy! Though if you do it the wrong way one of the enemies will chase you.

  • Shoot the switch all the way to the right
  • Shoot the enemy below you to get him to walk into the laser
  • Shoot the switch all the way to the right and the one at the bottom left
  • Shoot the second enemy

Head south to the next room and dispatch the enemies to get the next keycard. Use Lucas to press the blue laser control button, and destroy the security camera found in this room.

Head back up two rooms to the first puzzle room and use the keycard to get through the door to the top right of the room.

Go up two rooms to find two enemies, one with a gun and one immune to normal damage. Stay in the doorway and use Lucas's slingshot to take out the enemy with a gun, then flip the switch at the far side of the room to have lasers take out the big guy. Lastly, have Lucas shoot the yellow button.

The way to this dungeon's boss is now open. But if you want this area's heart piece, you need to go back to previous rooms and destroy some security cameras using Lucas's slingshot.

For reference, here's a map of Hawkins National Laboratory. Security cameras are marked with red dots and areas meant to be accessed by other characters are marked using text stating what they are to avoid spoilers.

Chapter 1 Boss Strategy

The boss at the end of Chapter 1 in Stranger Things has a couple different phases, and they're easy enough to figure out.

Here's the fight step by step:

  1. Shoot the Evil Scientist until he gets into a defensive bubble
  2. Shoot one of the switches behind him, then go into its corresponding door and flip the switch inside
  3. Punch him a few times with Hopper
  4. Rinse and repeat steps 2 and 3

Once you've gotten the Eggo, go to the room to the left after you've defeated the Evil Scientist to get this dungeon's VHS tape.

Once you've finished the Hawkins National Laboratory dungeon, you need to head outside (you can do this easily by opening your map and tapping "Exit Dungeon") and go left and up to make your way off the property. Use Lucas's slingshot to flip the switch to turn off the security laser and you are on your way.

Head right until you come up on the entrance to the woods, and then enter Mirkwood. Be aware there are a lot of bird enemies here, which fly directly toward you.

While you're in the Mirkwood, be sure to stop by the Castle Byers shack to the north to pick up Joyce's keychain, and by the Byers house itself to give Joyce the keys and get another heart piece, as well as pick up a romance novel for Flo in one of the bedrooms.

Leave the house then head right and up to talk to Steve, who informs you Nancy has gone into the woods.

Before you do that, take a left and head to the next screen downtown to find the Morgue. Head inside and use Lucas to flip the switch to head to the back room and pick up the Hazmat Suit.

Now head back to Steve and take the path into the woods to the right.

From here you can go right into the Upside Down and end chapter 1.

That's it for the chapter 1 walkthrough. Each chapter is more difficult than the last, so look out for walkthroughs for the rest of the chapters in the Stranger Things mobile game here on GameSkinny. Get hyped for season 2 later this month!

Fortnite Horde Bash Mode Survival Guide,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/d/f/d/dfd-8931e.jpg sls75/fortnite-horde-bash-mode-survival-guide Wed, 11 Oct 2017 10:08:23 -0400 Sergey_3847

The new Horde Bash mode for Fortnite is a massive undertaking even for the most seasoned players. If you enjoyed doing dailies during the Survive the Storm event, then Challenge the Horde co-op PvE mode will fit your bill just right.

In this new mode, you will be tasked with building a portable fort from a set of limited resources, and then moving to the combat zone. There you will fight the hordes of husks alongside the other three players and earn your daily dose of rewards.

If you can’t wait to jump into this crazy series of challenges, then read our guide for all the info on how to survive the Horde Bash mode in Fortnite.

Build a Fort and Craft Some Traps

Before fighting the horde, your first task is to build a base without any time constrictions. The best possible configuration for such a base is a pyramid. You can additionally protect it with walls made of metal or stone, but the inner core of your base should be pyramidal -- as it serves the best against the smashers.

In the beginning you will have a very limited amount of materials for building your base, so try to distribute the weakest material (like wood) inside the base and put the most resilient materials on the outside -- this will halt the smashers and won’t let them break through too quickly. In time you will get even more resources for your base as you progress through the zones.

Another great way to deal with smashers is to craft and place traps on the outer perimeter of the base and under the floor. Getting and using more materials will allow you to set your pyramid on the platform and use Ceiling Electric Field or Ceiling Zapper traps by hiding them behind the walls that will be bashed by the smashers so they'll fall right into them.

In short, shape your base so it's hardest for the hordes to get through -- and even if they do, set up traps to zap them into oblivion.

Math Behind the Zones and Scavenger Tickets

After you’ve built your portable fort, you can enter one of the combat zones and start fighting the horde with other three players. The map in the Horde Bash mode consists of 14 different zones, where each zone offers different challenges depending on their tier.

Each challenge will reward you with certain amount of scavenger tickets and skill points. Remember that you can only get 6 skill points a day that correspond to 6 possible daily challenges, which is a set limit for Horde Bash mode. Any further challenges will not give rewards, so be aware of this.

In the table below you can see the total distribution of all zones, their tiers and rewards:  

Tier Power Level
Challenges Tickets
1 5 3 50
1 9 3 55
1 15 3 60
2 19 4 70
2 23 4 75
2 28 4 80
2 34 4 85
2 40 4 90
3 46 5 95
3 52 5 100
3 58 5 110
3 64 5 120
3 70 5 130
4 76 7 150


As you see, each zone offers several challenges to complete. However, if you value your time and don’t want to complete all of them, then you can do only the very last challenge of each zone to complete it and move on to the next one.

On the other hand, if you feel that you would rather grind those skill points and tickets, then be sure to complete the first challenges as well, since they are easy to do and still give rewards. 

You can also do limited time events and receive additional rewards. Here is the distribution of the skill points depending on the stages of these limited events: 

Event Stage Power Level
Die, Husks Die! Stage 1 5 --
Die, Husks Die! Stage 2 9 --
Die, Husks Die! Stage 3 15 --
Die, Husks Die! Stage 4 19 --
Die, Husks Die! Stage 5 23 200 Tickets
Die, Husks Die! Stage 6 28 200 Tickets
Die, Husks Die! Stage 7 34 Legendary Defender
Die, Husks Die! Stage 8 40 --


Understanding the Horde Bash Mode Skill Tree

The entire skill tree in Horde Bash mode consists of four tiers, where each tier has a top and bottom branches. At first, it all may seem rather complicated -- but if you look closer, you will see that most of the top branches consist of building and trap materials, while the bottom branches mostly consist of ammunition and weapon materials upgrades.

This means that in the beginning of the game you need to invest your skill points in the Tier 1 top branch in order to get more and better materials for your portable base. After that you can mostly invest into bottom branches beginning from Tier 2 that will allow you to craft weapons.

If you want to know what the best skills are for Horde bash mode, see the screenshot below. The ideal skills are outlined in red boxes. 

All four tiers of the skill tree require 85 skill points, of which Tier 1 requires 16 points and the rest of the tiers require 23 points each. Taking into account that you can only do six challenges a day and earn only 6 skill points respectively, you will not always be able to get all the required skill points, so invest your points wisely

If you are interested in a skill tree grind math, then here's how it goes. Let's say, if you play all 6 challenges a day on Tier 2 for 4-5 hours each day (approximately 45 minutes on each challenge), then it will take you 15 days to unlock all 85 skills -- which is 135 hours in total.

Weapons, Gadgets and Modifiers

Horde Bash mode also introduces several new weapons and gadgetz to the game. The modifiers are given before each zone and are aimed at making your challenges even harder.

Pay special attention to Life Leech and Ricochet modifiers. If you see them being activated on one of your challenges, then you will probably want to back out and start it all over again.

All Upgraded Weapons in Horde Bash Mode
Weapon Description
Assault Rifle Cheaper Hunter-Killer semi-auto rifle with less durability but higher base damage
D-Barreled Shotgun Cheaper Thunderbolt break-action shotgun with less durability
Semi-Auto Shotgun Cheaper Room Sweeper semi-auto shotgun with less durability but higher base damage
Pistol Cheaper Thrasher heavy pistol with less durability
Sniper Rifle Cheaper One Shot sniper with less durability
Axe Cheaper Stormchaser's Revenge axe with less durability
Spear Cheaper Whirling Doom spear with less durability
Trash Cannon Bazooka launcher with less durability


All Modifiers in Horde Bash Mode
Modifier Description
No Repairs Heroes can't repair buildings for one wave
No Shields Hero shields are inactive
Wall Weakening Buildings become increasingly vulnerable to damage for a short time after they are attacked.
Metal Corrosion Basic husk melee attacks cause metal buildings to corrode, periodically damaging them for a time
Expensive Stone Stone structures cost significantly more to build
Expensive Metal Metal structures cost significantly more to build
Acid Pools Enemies have a chance to leave a damaging pool on the ground when they die
Slowing Pools Enemies have a chance to leave a slowing pool on the ground when they die
Smoke Screens Enemies have a chance to create a smoke screen when they die, granting enemy damage resistance to ranged attacks
Explosive Deathburst Basic husks explode when killed, damaging players and buildings in the area
Frenzied Deathburst When enemies die, they grant nearby enemies a brief movement and attack speed increase
Healing Deathburst When enemies die, they heal nearby enemies for a percentage of their maximum health
Quickened Enemies gain movement speed for a time after taking damage
Enraged When enemies are near death they become enraged, dealing more damage
Slowing Attacks Whenever a player is struck by a melee attack, they move more slowly for a short time.
Life Leech Enemies restore a small amount of health each time they deal damage
Ricochet Enemies reflect a percentage of the ranged damage they suffer
Tank Husks have much more health and are harder to slow, stun, and stagger
Uncharted Enemies Enemies don't show up on the minimap
Shared Hero Damage Whenever a player loses health, allies suffer damage equal to a percentage of that amount


Best Gadgets for Horde Bash Mode
  • Supply Drop: Drops 80 wood, 65 stone, and 65 metal, including 1 wood item, and 1 crafting item.
  • Stationary Hover Turret: Deploys a stationary hover turret that fires 1.333 rounds per second, and lasts for 45 seconds.
  • Adrenaline Rush: Instantly restores 9.514 health to you and friends in a 3 tile range.
  • Teleporter: Deploys two teleportation pads which can be moved. Step on one to travel to the other.


That is all you need to know how to survive the Horde Bash mode, and if you were looking for other Fortnite guides at GameSkinny, then check some of them out below:

Fortnite Guide: How to Play Battle Royale Squads and Duos,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/f/o/r/fortnite-header-75737.jpg o1gm8/fortnite-guide-how-to-play-battle-royale-squads-and-duos Tue, 10 Oct 2017 17:10:23 -0400 Kieran Desmond

Fortnite is more popular than ever -- especially since releasing the game's free-to-play Battle Royale mode. Inspired by PUBG’s addictive Hunger Games-esque formula, players can choose to lone-wolf it to victory or group up with friends. If they choose the latter, they can group up into Squads of up to four players or Duos of up to two players.

If you’re a fan of the latter two, then this guide will show you how to get into Squads and Duos, as well as provide the reasons for why you’d want to share your glory with anyone else.

How to Play Squads and Duos in Fortnite Battle Royale

To play as a pair or a squad of up to four, start up Fortnite Battle Royale as usual -- until you reach the gameplay menu. You'll then cycle through the available modes to find the Duo and Squad options using Square (PS4), X (Xbox One), or the keypad (PC) depending on the platform you’re playing on. From there, you can invite friends to play with you or you can auto-fill the slots with random players.

To invite your friends into Duos and Squads, select the empty slot and scroll through your friends list to send them an invite. In Fortnite Battle Royale, the Squad, Duo, and normal modes are separated so you can’t steamroll lone players as a group of four.

Why Play as a Squad or Duo?

Obviously, it benefits you to have another set of eyes (or three) watching your back while you're looting an area. It also helps that your teammates can revive you if you need it. 

Pro Tip: In Duo mode, if you down a player, don't finish them off immediately. Lie in wait for their partner to come and revive your bait to try and finish off the Duo.

Because the different modes are separated, you’ll either only be playing against other Duos or other Squads. This means that you can play with friends while remaining on a level playing field with the opposition.

Although Squads can be made up of less than four players by not auto-filling the remaining slots, doing so immediately puts your team at a disadvantage. Unless you’re looking for a challenge, I wouldn’t recommend playing Squads without a full team of four players.

But the main reason why you want to play as a Duo or Squad in Fortnite is because it just makes the game more fun. Playing with friends in video games like this always creates wonderful, shared moments that remind us why video games are so great.


That's it for this guide on how to play Fortnite Battle Royale in Duo and Squad modes! For more on this exciting new game mode, check out some more of our Fortnite guides! Here's some to get you started:


Destiny 2 Guide: Attrition and Other Nightfall Strike Modifiers Explained,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/d/e/s/destiny-da6aa.jpg 1ib35/destiny-2-guide-attrition-and-other-nightfall-strike-modifiers-explained Tue, 10 Oct 2017 17:04:41 -0400 Jonathan Moore

If you've played Destiny 2 for any length of time, you know that the weekly Nightfall is not only harder than the missions typically found in the Strikes Playlist, but that it also has modifiers that make your mission much more strenuous than normal. These "random" modifiers change every Tuesday during the weekly reset (when a new Nightfall Strike is introduced) and they greatly inform what weapons and gear you'll need to take into the Strike. 

These Nightfall modifiers have various effects, with some making you more powerful and others requiring you extend the Nightfall timer. Regardless of their effects, knowing what each modifier does greatly informs your Nightfall strategy. 

To make sure you're as prepared as you can be, here's a quick rundown of each of the Nightfall Strike modifiers currently in Destiny 2 -- and what they mean for the mission ahead. 

What Each Nightfall Strike Modifier Does in Destiny 2

  • Attrition: Your health and shield generation is greatly reduced. Some enemies will drop wells (or hourglasses) of light that will replenish your health and shields. 

  • Timewarp (Killing Time): The Nightfall begins with a 10-minute timer (some Nightfall timers begin at about 15 minutes). Killing any and all enemies will extend the timer.

  • Timewarp (Anomalies): The Nightfall begins with a 10-minute timer. The timer may be extended by 30 seconds for each blue anomaly destroyed throughout the mission. 

  • Timewarp (Rings): The Nightfall Strike begins with a 10-minute timer. The timer may be extended by 30 seconds each time a fireteam member jumps through one of the many rings found throughout the mission. 

  • Arc Burn: Arc damage from weapons, grenades, and supers is greatly increased. 

  • Solar Burn: Solar damage from weapons, grenades, and supers is greatly increased. 

  • Void Burn: Void damage from weapons, grenades, and supers is greatly increased. 

  • Prism: Burns (Arc, Solar, and Void) will rotate every 30 seconds.

  • Angry: Enemies won't stagger when shot or hit. It does not matter how much impact your equipped weapon provides. 

  • Heroic: Enemies appear in greater numbers and attack more aggressively. 

  • Epic: Enemies are more belligerent, employ advanced tactics, have shields, and appear in greater numbers. 

  • Juggler: Ammo for your currently-equipped weapon does not drop until you switch to and kill enemies with another weapon. 

  • Lightswitch: Enemy melee attacks are more powerful. 


Those are all of the Nightfall Strike modifiers for now. Bungie may add more modifiers in the future, but knowing what each of these current modifiers means will give you the upper hand against Destiny 2's Agents of Darkness. 

Looking for more Destiny 2 tips and tricks? Make sure to check out our Destiny 2 guides! Here are a few to get you started: 

Shadow Of War Guide: Poem Solutions for All Ithildin Doors,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/c/o/v/cov2-e2730.jpg hw6yu/shadow-of-war-guide-poem-solutions-for-all-ithildin-doors Tue, 10 Oct 2017 15:17:14 -0400 Ty Arthur

The various major regions across the Middle-Earth: Shadow Of War map feature a new addition not present in the previous game: locked Ithildin doors that must be opened by unscrambling ancient poetry.

In addition to some new gear, you can even earn some nifty new Shadow Of War trophies for unlocking each door. Each door has the majority of the poem already engraved, but six words will always be missing.

To finish these poems and open each Ithildin door, Talion first has to locate each missing word for the poem -- but that part's easy, as the locations are clearly marked on the map. You can find their locations by accessing the region's Haedir tower, and then door itself will be in the area's barrow.

The hard part is figuring out how to unscramble the poem and place each salvaged word in the correct location to unlock the door, and that's what we cover in detail below.

 Talion finds an Ithilden door poem

Shadow Of War First Poem Door (Minas Ithil) Solution

Solving the first Shadow Of War poem and opening the Minas Ithil door unlocks the Speak Friend And Enter achievement/trophy. The correct order for the Minas Ithil Ithilden door poem is as follows:

  • Shadows
  • Drums
  • Cadence
  • Land
  • Wrath
  • Dooms

The full poem reads:

In the land of Mordor where the Shadows lie
We bear our banners aloft, boots like Drums
Our Cadence quick, our countenance dire.
For who in this dark, dream-haunted Land dares
Resist the righteous flame of Wrath
And Doom themselves to despair and death?

 Minas Morgul Poem Puzzle Solution

Shadow Of War Cirith Ungol Ithildin Poem Solution

The correct order for the Cirith Ungol region's Ithilden door poetry is as follows:

  • Rises
  • Fires
  • Night
  • Beacons
  • Marching

The full poem reads:

When the sun Rises, the shadows must retreat
Fleeing in fear from the Fires of dawn
The Night never knew that its end was fleet
As a Bright Lord bears Beacons of flame.
The sun rises, yes — but from the West it Shines
Marching e’er Eastward, e”er eternal, e’er bright.

 Cirith Ungol Poem Puzzle Solution

Shadow Of War Nurnen Ithildin Poem Solution

The correct order for the Nurnen region's Ithilden door poetry is as follows:

  • Iron
  • Serpents
  • Avail
  • Woe
  • Hordes
  • Claim

The full poem reads:

Let our foes fortify with Iron and stone
Let them summon scabrous Serpents, feral beasts
It will Avail them nought. Across the ages none
Have an army that wield such weapons, such Woe
Such doom against the dark-benighted Hordes who dare
Claim dominion over a Mordor soon bright.

 Nurnen Poem Puzzle Solution

Shadow Of War Seregost Ithildin Poem Solution

The correct order for the Seregost region's Ithilden door poetry is as follows:

  • Slumbers
  • Nest
  • Poisoned
  • Trapped
  • Comes
  • Base

The full poem reads:

Fair Mordor Slumbers, entangled in night
A vipers’ Nest of sorrow and strife
Poisoned by pernicious betrayal and blight
Trapped in the grasp of gelid corpse-hands
Yet behold! The Bright Lord Comes as a wildfire
Burning only what is Base, that all else may thrive.

 Seregost Poem Puzzle Solution

Shadow Of War Gorgoroth Ithildin Poem Solution

The correct order for the Gorgoroth region's Ithilden door poetry is as follows:

  • Lurk
  • Bulwark
  • Impervious
  • Powers
  • Vicious
  • Fail

The full poem reads:

They stalk and Lurk, then lash out so furious
Yet our Bulwark is proof against their rage
Our hard-ringed, hand-forged armor Impervious
To predations from the Powers of darkness
No matter how Vicious or how vile
To assail the Bright Lord is to falter and Fail.

 Gorgoroth Poem Puzzle Solution

That's all you need to know to unlock each door and wrap up this grave-robbing, poetry-reading quest line!

New fast travel points are unlocked each time you open up a door, and of course there's a piece of Celebrimbor's various ancient wraith equipment ready to be picked up and worn. After opening all five Ithildin poem doors, you will have the legendary Bright Lord equipment set that replaces your sword, bow, dagger, armor, and cloak with powerful new Bright Lord versions.

 Picking up the last piece of Bright Lord equipment

Still need help with other parts of the game, like trying to figure out how to manually save your Shadow Of War game instead? Check out our other Shadow of War guides for all the tips and tricks you'll need to survive the Orcish siege. 

Shadow Of War: How to Manually Save Your Game While Conquering Mordor,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/c/o/v/cov1-57c8f.jpg vj1d4/shadow-of-war-how-to-manually-save-your-game-while-conquering-mordor Tue, 10 Oct 2017 15:10:50 -0400 Ty Arthur

After the unbearable wait all summer long following the game being unceremoniously pushed from August to October, what will undoubtedly be the most all-consuming title of Fall 2017 has arrived! 

Middle-Earth: Shadow Of War sees Talion and his wraith companion Celimbrimbor return for more orc-slaying shenanigans, but with even more army-raising and war-waging than ever before! Get ready to slaughter orcs (and much more) by the hundreds while forging your own green skin fighting force.

Sure, this sequel does see the series depart even more heavily from Tolkien's roots and essentially ditch any attempt at lore cohesion -- but if you loved the game play of Shadow Of Mordor, there's no reason you shouldn't be installing the extra 33 gigs off the disc and playing right now.

There is a bit of a catch once that download time is done, however... how in the heck is Talion supposed to save his progress? The game doesn't tell you at all, and more than a few players are worried about losing hours' worth of progress before quitting.

 Did the game save, or are we going to have to kill this guy over again?

Manual Saving in Shadow Of War

With how much of the game world's state changes at any given time between the updated Nemesis and Stronghold systems -- not to mention all your various skills and item upgrades -- it seems obvious that Shadow Of War uses an auto-save feature.

What's not immediately clear is just exactly when the game automatically creates a new save file. The tutorial mission doesn't mention it, save info doesn't show up as a tip in the load screens, and even the help segment covering the game's mechanics provides no clues as to what's going on.

While the ring, hammer, and dagger icon appear when things load, the reverse isn't true -- there's no icon displayed when a save file is created. This seems to indicate that saves happen often enough that the developer didn't want it always on the screen.

 Seems like this would have been a pretty obvious choice...

While it appears the game automatically saves after you kill (or are killed by) any given orc captain, the rest is more up in the air. Does Shadow Of War save when you pick up a new item, or when you equip it? What about when you spend a skill point?

Quitting to the main menu seems to save your progress if you are traversing the map, but if you are in the middle of quest you lose it all and have to start over at the beginning by returning to the quest's origin point.

So what can you do to save manually and ensure that doesn't happen? The TL;DR is that you can't. Instead, you have to find a way to force an auto-save to prevent Talion from losing any progress. 

At this point, the only sure-fire method to force an automatic save is to fast travel on the world map to a new location. Pick a spot, travel, and when the new area loads the state of the world and your current equipment loadout will be saved.

Importing Shadow Of Mordor Saves

There's another interesting twist with Middle-Earth: Shadow Of War saves -- the game takes a look at your previous Shadow Of Mordor save game data and can actually import any nemesis you left alive.

You might want to load up that previous game and remind yourself who wasn't dead yet so it will actually mean something when that big ugly brute shows up to challenge your undead ranger!

 They may have new skills and weaknesses, but some old faces can still appear...

That's all you need to know to manually save your game in Middle-Earth: Shadow Of War! Have you found any other specific methods for triggering an automatic save? Let us know in the comments section!

How to Get Football Outsiders in Madden 18,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/m/a/r/mariota-74e10.jpg rabwy/how-to-get-football-outsiders-in-madden-18 Tue, 10 Oct 2017 15:05:59 -0400 Jonathan Moore

If you're a Madden 18 veteran, you know how important it can be to pick up Football Outsiders cards in Madden's MUT mode. But if you're a Madden rookie, this is the gist: Football Outsiders cards can be some of the best cards in Madden 18 from a value standpoint, giving you some of the biggest stat gains for lower-than-usual coin investments. 

Football Outsiders cards are released on a monthly basis and are chosen by the Football Outsiders' team based on those players' real-life performances. Certain players that make the FO list are high-stat household names, while others are those that have stood out because of their advanced stats and future potential. Regardless of the reason players are chosen to appear in FO card packs, they can set your MUT apart from the pack -- if you choose them wisely. 

The problem is that it's not entirely clear how to find these players when scouring through all the cards in MUT Mode. Here's how to do it. 

How to Get Football Outsiders in Madden 18

Football Outsiders' cards can be found in Madden 18's MUT mode by going to the Auction House. To get started, you'll first want to choose MUT mode from the main menu and navigate to the Auction & Trades tab in the MUT submenu. 

Once there, choose Auction House. Next, go to "Program" in the Auction House menu (it will be the second-to-last option) and then select Football Outsiders at the bottom of the first column. This will highlight all of the available Football Outsiders cards currently in the Auction House. From there, you'll be able to place bids or purchase them outright. But before you make any decisions, makes sure to compare them to the players already on your team! 


Although some of these FO cards are expensive, some of them are certainly worth looking at, especially if you're partial to specific players and want to increases those players' stat lines across the board. What's more, investing coins in these players can take your MUT team to the next level -- regardless of their Auction House prices. 

Looking for more Madden 18 tips and tricks? Make sure to check out our other Madden 18 guides! Here are a few to get you started:

Beginner's Tips for Rainbowtail,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/r/a/i/rainbowtail-66aa4.png 2glk1/beginners-tips-for-rainbowtail Tue, 10 Oct 2017 10:30:16 -0400 ESpalding

While the premise of Rainbowtail may seem familiar, there are a few mechanics in the game that set it apart from other matching mobile games. Aside from the common element of matching colored gems in lines of three or more, this game uses various creatures to give you bonus effects. To sum it up: the more games you play, the higher the chances of leveling up your Gemling creatures -- which means higher scores and more rewards.

If you want to know more about the gemlings, then look out for our handy guide to the Rainbowtail gemlings coming up soon! In the meantime, here are our best tips for progressing through the game and getting those coveted high scores.

Know Your Collectibles

In addition to finding gemlings, there are a number of other things you will be collecting while playing Rainbowtail. Here's the full rundown of all the collectibles in the game and how they're meant to be used:

  • Gembeans: These multicolored bean pods can be exchanged for attempts to win rare gemlings, and can be used to buy gemlings directly from a selection that are offered daily.
  • Rainbow Gems: These gems are dropped from boss fights and are used to get rare gemlings.
  • Eggs: Eggs drop during nearly every match you play and can contain any gemling, no matter how rare it is.

Replay Levels

Even though stars don't actually convey any bonuses, you'll probably want to get three stars on each level if you're a completionist. Of course, doing so will net you more chances of rare eggs dropping, as well as getting more gembeans. Even if you get gemlings you've already hatched and upgraded, you can release them for more gembeans.

Get Your Daily Stamp

As with most mobile games, you get a daily bonus in Rainbowtail, but it isn't just a "five days in a row" kind of bonus. In this game, you get a bonus for every day you log in. Each week accumulates in a rare gemling, but only if you have stamped every day that week. Other bonuses include beans, rainbow crystals, and level one gemlings.

Upgrade When You Can

Whenever you get a gemling from an egg and you already have it, you can use it to upgrade. But when I say upgrade, I don't just mean the creatures. As you go through matches and find more gemlings, you are going to run out of room in your Gemling Box. This is where all your gemlings go. To upgrade this, you will need to spend a rainbow gem or watch an ad to unlock five spaces at a time.

While Rainbowtail isn't a hard or taxing game to play, the above points are things you really need to remember when playing. If you enjoy this game then make sure you check out or other Rainbowtail guides and check back with us for any more game related news!

Destiny 2 Guide: EDZ Servitors Locations,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/4/0/5/4059dbf327167ad.jpg fu62r/destiny-2-guide-edz-servitors-locations Tue, 10 Oct 2017 10:24:37 -0400 Kieran Desmond

Each day, Destiny 2 brings three new challenges to each activity in the game. One such challenge you might see while exploring the European Dead Zone on Earth is the "You Got Served" challenge. This Destiny 2 challenge tasks you with destroying five Fallen Servitors which may seem easy, but in practice, isn't exactly so. You'll quickly notice how infrequently you encounter the floating purple spheres in the wilds of the EDZ on Earth. So read on for a quick way of knocking out this challenge.

Where to Find Fallen Servitors in the EDZ

The most reliable source of Fallen Servitors in the European Dead Zone can be found via the "Servitor Resupply" public event which takes place in two separate locations in the EDZ. In each event, you can find five Servitors -- including the Boss Servitor, which is much harder to eliminate than its other servitor ads.

At the start of the event, there will be one Servitor shielding the Boss Servitor. After reducing the Boss Servitor to half health, three Servitors will appear and boost the Boss Servitor's attack and defense. To quickly destroy them before they disappear, save your Super for this moment and melt them accordingly.

Remember that if you don't have your Super charged before the event starts, you can automatically recharge all of your abilities by Rallying at the Flag that marks the location of the event.

Note: By killing the three Servitors that appear at 50% boss health quickly enough, you can activate the Heroic version of this public event which offers a greater chance at better loot.

Public Event Location 1 -- EDZ Outskirts


The first public event is located in the northeast corner of the Outskirts area in the lower half of the EDZ map. You'll know if an event is occurring when the public event icon appears in that location on your map.

The "Servitor Resupply" public event isn't the only event that takes place here, however. There is also the chance that the "Weapons Exchange" public event will occur which has you taking down a Fallen Walker, but will feature less (if any) Servitors.

Public Event Location 2 -- Firebase Hades

This event spawns in the centre of the Firebase Hades area of the European Dead Zone in the top left of the EDZ map. As far as I'm aware, the only public event that takes place here is the "Servitor Resupply" event, so you don't have to worry about a different event starting in this location.

Farming this public event in the Firebase Hades area should net you enough Servitor eliminations to complete the "You Got Served" challenge.


Hopefully, you found this guide helpful, and if you know of a more reliable way of finding Fallen Servitors on Earth in the EDZ, let us know in the comments below and we'll add your method to the list!

For more tips and tricks likes this, check out some more of our Destiny 2 guides! Here are a few to get you started: 

Idiot Savant is the Best Way to Play Fallout 4,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/f/a/l/fallout-header-0c57b.png ui2b5/idiot-savant-is-the-best-way-to-play-fallout-4 Tue, 10 Oct 2017 10:17:02 -0400 Kengaskhan

No matter the RPG, players like to maximize their XP gained/hour, and Fallout 4 understands that – every point you have invested in your Intelligence stat boosts your XP gain by 3%, meaning players can specifically tailor their characters to earn levels as fast as possible.

If, somehow, a constant 130% (with 10 Intelligence) XP income isn’t enough, a character with 5 or more Luck can take the Idiot Savant perk, which can boost the amount of XP a character gains to astronomical amounts.

/u/minusra performed a very detailed breakdown of Idiot Savant on Reddit, and the numbers clearly show that the best way to maximize your XP gains is by taking the perk.

It's important to note that, despite the implication that you need low Intelligence to benefit from Idiot Savant, a lower Intelligence merely boosts the perk's proc rate. And given that Idiot Savant has no drawback, you will always earn more XP with the perk, regardless of your character’s Intelligence.

In fact, if you only plan on taking Idiot Savant I, the 3x XP bonus chance isn't quite enough to outweigh the benefit of having high Intelligence. 5 Intelligence may be the "sweet spot" for Idiot Savant I, but you'll gain more experience at 8+ Intelligence if you're willing to invest the stat points.

However, Idiot Savant II's 5x XP bonus chance makes those procs valuable enough that 1 Intelligence is the sweet spot -- you'll need 14+ Intelligence to outpace a character with only 1 Intelligence in this case.

If you're one of those players that loves watching that experience bar fill up over and over again, then the Idiot Savant perk is for you!


Hopefully that answers your question! Be sure to check out the rest of our Fallout 4 guides if you need more tips for enjoying your next playthrough. 

Complete Fortnite Battle Royale Weapons Stats List,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/c/o/v/covcov-d9445.jpg 9mt22/complete-fortnite-battle-royale-weapons-stats-list Mon, 09 Oct 2017 16:30:09 -0400 Ty Arthur

Developed alongside the game's base multiplayer campaign, the F2P Battle Royale mode offers up a fast paced new way to experience Fortnite, and this time without any shambling zombies!

Those who paid to get in on Early Access will notice that the weapon lists are quite a bit different between the main PvE campaign and the PvP Battle Royale mode.

At the moment, there's no player progression and no skill tree for Battle Royale. You also can't pick specific types of heroes like in the base game, so everyone has the same base stats. Anything you've unlocked along the skill tree or any weapons you've upgraded in the campaign mode won't matter in these free-for-all combat sessions.

What that means is that -- all other things being equal -- the player who has found the better weapon first is typically going to win.  Of course there are exceptions to this rule for those who are playing smart by swooping down on injured combatants or keeping out of sight and killing from a hidden vantage point.

For more info on being that jerk player who keeps winning, check out our advanced tactics article for using the map to your advantage and dominating in these 100 player matches.

Fortnite Battle Royale Weapon Rarity

While exploring the Battle Royale map and opening golden loot chests you may discover the exact same weapon with different levels of rarity, and their stats will change along with color.

An orange sniper rifle is going to deal more damage than a green one, for instance. Here are the weapon breakdowns, in order from weakest / most common to strongest / rarest:

  • Common – Gray
  • Uncommon – Green
  • Rare – Blue
  • Epic – Purple
  • Legendary – Orange
  • Mythic – Gold

Fortnite Battle Royale Weapon List

Below we list out each type of weapon and its basic stats. When comparing damage to DPS, remember that a high damage rating won't always equal a high damage per second due to varying firing rate and reload speeds.

Rocket Launchers for instance actually have a lower DPS than their damage rating, due to slow firing speed and the fact that they have a clip size of 1.

Keep in mind that Battle Royale is still in development, with stats being tweaked and new weapons being added in regular updates. Some of these guns we simply don't have stats yet for because we haven't yet come across a legendary M16 or a common grenade launcher yet.

Have you found any of the weapon rarities we don't have listed below, or have you noticed an incorrect stat? Let us know in the comments and we'll work to get it updated! And if you're looking for the top-tier weapons to use in your next run, check out our guide to the best weapons in Fortnite's Battle Royale mode for more information!

Battle Royale Assault Rifles
Weapon DPS Damage Magazine Size
M16 (Common)   176  32  30
 M16 (Uncommon)  181  33   30
 M16 (Rare)  192  35  30
 SCAR (Epic)  203  37  30
 SCAR (Legendary)  214  39  30
 Scoped Rifle (Rare)  80  23  20
 Scoped Rifle (Epic)  84  24  20
 Assault Rifle Burst (Common)  118  29  30
  Assault Rifle Burst (Uncommon)  122  30  30
  Assault Rifle Burst (Rare)  203  37  30


Battle Royale Grenade Launchers
Weapon DPS Damage Magazine Size
 Grenade Launcher (Rare)  100  100  6
Grenade Launcher (Legendary)   110  110  6


Battle Royale Pistols
Weapon DPS Damage Magazine Size
 Revolver (Common)  48  54  6
 Revolver (Uncommon)  51  57  6
 Revolver (Rare)  54  60  6
 Pistol (Common)  155  23  16
 Pistol (Uncommon)   162  24  16
 Pistol (Rare)  169  25  16


Battle Royale Rocket Launchers
Weapon DPS Damage Magazine Size
 Rocket Launcher (Rare)  82 110   1
Rocket Launcher (Epic)   87 116   1
 Rocket Launcher (Legendary)  91 121   1


Battle Royale Shotguns
Weapon DPS Damage Magazine Size
 Pump Shotgun (Common)  63 90   5
Pump Shotgun (Uncommon)   66 95   5
 Tactical Shotgun (Uncommon)  100 67   8
 Tactical Shotgun (Rare)  105 70   8
Tactical Shotgun (Epic)  111 73   8


Battle Royale SMGs
Weapon DPS Damage Magazine Size
 Submachine Gun (Common)  150 10   25
Submachine Gun (Uncommon)   165 11   25
 Tactical SMG (Uncommon)  140 14   30
Tactical SMG (Rare)   150 15   30
 Tactical SMG (Epic)  160 16   30
 Tactical SMG (Legendary)  170 17   30


Battle Royale Sniper Rifles
Weapon DPS Damage Magazine Size
Bolt Action Sniper AWP (Rare)   35 105   1
Bolt Action Sniper AWP (Epic)    37 110   1
 Bolt Action Sniper AWP (Legendary)   38 116   1
 Semi-Auto Sniper (Epic)  75  63   10
 Semi-Auto Sniper (Legendary)  80 66   10


Which specific gun is the best? It's a bit of a personal preference issue, and can vary depending on situation (short range shotgun versus long range sniping, and so on) but you can check out our list of the best weapons in Fortnite's Battle Royale mode for a full rundown of all the top-tier gear you have at your disposal. 

For more tips and tricks, be sure to check out the rest of our Fortnite guides and ensure you'll stay alive in your next Battle Royale showdown.

How to Get the Lustrous Golden Key in Black Desert Online,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/b/d/o/bdo-header-1299e.png f92by/how-to-get-the-lustrous-golden-key-in-black-desert-online Mon, 09 Oct 2017 15:32:05 -0400 Kengaskhan

Golden treasure chests were introduced to Black Desert Online’s NA/EU region a few months ago, but they were pretty tough to find out in the wild.

However, for the duration the Kamasylvia launch event, players receive a golden treasure chest every day, which has led to a lot of players asking, “What are Lustrous Golden Keys, and where can I find one?” If you're one of those players, this BDO guide is here to help you out!

The simple answer is that Lustrous Golden Keys are not in the game yet, and the implication that they are is just another result of the lack of UI polish in BDO.

In fact, according to BDDatabase, there’s a pretty good chance that the item name, “Lustrous Golden Key”, is a mistranslation of the “Pure Gold Key” (which also isn’t in the game).

Based on the item description, if these special Gold Keys do eventually come to NA/EU, it’ll be as a cash shop item that you’ll have to purchase with real money. If further updates or official statements prove otherwise, we'll update this guide accordingly. 

In the meantime, you'll have to use your regular, event-distributed Gold Keys to open those chests. But if you have faith that the Lustrous/Pure Gold Keys will eventually be added to our region -- and you're willing to spend money on them if they're added to the cash shop -- then it might be worth holding on to your Sealed Golden Treasure Chests until then.


That's all we have for now! Stay tuned for updates on these special keys and whether or not they'll make their way to western versions of the game. And until then, you're welcome to check out the rest of our Black Desert Online guides for more tips and tricks!

A Hat In Time Guide: How to Get the Why Achievement,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/c/o/v/cov-c5c18.jpg ce609/a-hat-in-time-guide-how-to-get-the-why-achievement Mon, 09 Oct 2017 15:20:39 -0400 Ty Arthur

Why... just why? That's the question this A Hat In Time achievement poses to you, as it assumes all gamers will immediately go with the dirty option when given the chance (or the anatomically correct one, I suppose).

On the whole, A Hat In Time goes out of the way to be adorably cutesy and kid friendly to offer up that classic N64 platforming vibe. Along the way there are also 28 achievements to earn. While some of those will test your skills, some will test your willingness to be obnoxious.

With this particular achievement -- called the "Why Achievement" -- you've got to go back in time with more than just graphics and gameplay, deciding to unleash your inner 12-year-old while reliving that classic platforming glory.

You know who he is... it's that version of you that thinks words like "butts" are hilarious. You get to let that brat out one more time with this silly achievement, which can actually be unlocked in a couple of different ways.

How to Unlock the Why Achievement in A Hat In Time 

Method #1

When you hit World 2, eventually you will meet a crow who asks about which specific body part you are most ashamed of. Let your imagination run wild here... or just literally enter the first thing that comes to your mind, because it's probably what the developers had in mind.

You can get the A Hat In Time Why achievement to unlock by typing in any of those "naughty" body parts that kids games don't normally want to mention (thanks to Steam player spooky snek for the screenshot below).

These words are confirmed to get the Why trophy to pop (although there are almost certainly more words that will work if you want to get creative and keep trying):

  • Penis
  • Vagina
  • Dong
  • Ass
  • Boobs

Honestly never thought I'd make a bullet list with those items, but here we are (and this isn't even a NSFW article!) So thanks for that, A Hat In Time. Oddly, "Butt" and "Bum" don't seem to be recognized. I guess the Gears For Breakfast developers are all pretty confident in the booty department?

       I mean, they aren't wrong...

Method # 2

It seems like the Why achievement isn't strictly locked just to that particular World 2 scene from method #1 above, and can instead be earned by using "dirty" words just about anywhere you get the option to type specific options.

For instance, there are computers on your ship where you can input words. Typing anything like "Ass," Dick," or any of the words listed above seems to get the Why trophy to unlock. Go wild!

Method #3

I haven't actually confirmed this one personally, but I've seen a few people in the forums saying you can get the Why achievement by entering any of the usual four letter cuss words when the game prompts you to enter your mother's sister's maiden name. 

Another potential location is when one NPC asks you what your super hero name would be. Have fun dirtying up your name!

In other words, it doesn't seem to matter exactly where you type the word, just so long as you cuss or bring up genitals somewhere along the way while playing A Hat In Time.

 Why? Because we can, that's why!

Let us know what naughty words and phrases you used to get the Why achievement in the comments below!

We're nearing the end of 2017, and this has been a great year for some really solid throwback platformers. Looking for more games like A Hat In Time that let you be a kid again? Check out the full list of 2017's adorable platformer titles for other games you can try out.

Divinity: Original Sin 2 -- Is Spider's Kiss Worth It?,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/d/o/s/dos2-banner-1afea.png 94tfg/divinity-original-sin-2-is-spiders-kiss-worth-it Mon, 09 Oct 2017 14:55:49 -0400 Kengaskhan

If Spiderman taught me anything, it's that you should always let weird, mutant spiders bite you -- and it's a lesson that you'd do well to remember in Divinity: Original Sin 2.

Beneath the tavern in Driftwood, you’ll find a strange woman named Dorotya who offers you a very short and simple quest (it’ll take you 2 minutes, tops) that can result in your character gaining the Spider’s Kiss talent -- which gives them a small boon in exchange for a penalty to their Constitution.

The penalty from Spider’s Kiss is always the same: -2 Constitution. However, the bonus you gain from depends on which vision you see when you first speak with Dorotya:

  • A towering oak: +2 Strength
  • A curved quill: +2 Intelligence
  • A golden chest: 2k gold
  • A dragon: +2 Wits
  • A chrysalis: Glowing Idol of Rebirth

You can complete the quest with each character in your party (choosing a different option each time), and you’re free to kill Dorotya for her loot after you’re done.

2,000 gold is clearly not worth the Constitution loss, but the rest of the bonuses are certainly worth letting a spider kiss you for.

For starters, Constitution is a pretty common dump stat – your character’s Vitality is obviously important, but the best way to avoid death is to dish out as much CC as possible and to mitigate any incoming CC, and Constitution doesn’t help with either of those things.

On the other hand, +2 to Strength, Intelligence, or Wits will help your characters in the CC department, as more damage (and higher Initiative if you pick Wits) means you can apply your stuns, knockdowns, and freezes that much sooner.

And then there’s the Glowing Idol of Rebirth, which will automatically resurrect the holder with full Vitality and armor should they fall in battle. The best part is that it requires only a single AP and a Resurrection scroll to recharge mid-combat.

So, unless your build specifically demands Constitution (eg. shield-users or Unstable builds), it's always worth letting Dorotya give you a little nip on the neck.


That's all for now! But before you venture out with your newfound spider powers, be sure to check out the rest of our Divinity: Original Sin 2 guides for more tips and tricks!

Reasons You Should Consider an OLED Gaming Monitor,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/4/8/1/4815-c99f2.jpg fl9oo/reasons-you-should-consider-an-oled-gaming-monitor Sat, 07 Oct 2017 13:04:06 -0400 RainSixtyGaming

The monitor you’re currently using is probably decent enough as is, but if you wanted to go above and beyond the norm, OLED monitors are going to be your new best friends. 2017 calls for an abundance of different technological advancements to consider, especially in the monitor department - there are a lot of things that go into the monitor manufacturing process. Some companies take it upon themselves to provide customers with the highest-quality monitor options as possible, but it's up to you to seek out those companies.

What is OLED?


OLED stands for “Organic Light Emitting Diode”, which is significantly better than your average LCD screen (that you’ll find in most monitors or televisions). The largest benefit you’ll receive from using an OLED monitor would be that they are lightweight, and much thinner than the average counterpart. They can be much more flexible in the sense that they can actually be folded and messed about with! If durability is something that you’re seriously concerned about, OLED displays of any sort will keep your entertainment in check.

OLED's that feature an active matrix sport amazing image quality, much better than any other television you’ve used in the past. The range of color is immense, in par with NTSC requirements or even above and beyond that. The pictures you’ll be seeing with an OLED monitor are not only stellar, but also rich in color and tone. There’s a major difference between OLED displays and LCD, but the average person wouldn’t know that - good thing I’m here to help you out!

What Makes OLED So Good?

OLED monitor

The image quality is obviously a beneficial trait to receive from any sort of display, but that isn’t the only thing OLED’s offer up to consumers. They don’t use as much power as the LCD variety does, which is great for many different reasons - it allows you to minimize the amount of energy you consume every year, and also lets your hydro bill stay as low as possible. The images and screen are going to appear much brighter in comparison to LCD’s, since the display is very thin and allows light to shine through easily. Additionally, you can leave OLED’s on for extended periods of time without worrying about an image being burnt into your screen - OLED displays also never require glass, which is a must when you’re working with LCD (or even LED) displays.

OLED’s are said to have around twice as long of a lifespan when compared to LEDs or LCDs, so if longevity is a key component to your purchase, you’re on the right path. As more OLED monitors and OLED gaming monitors start to pop up on the market, you’ll begin to notice an abundance of new features being implemented.

What Makes Them Bad?


One of the biggest issues with OLED monitores is that they aren’t being mass produced just yet. OLED televisions and monitors typically use smaller factories to create their displays, which is why there is such a large demand for them right now. When you can’t produce a certain number of monitors every single month, there’s going to a supply and demand issue - it’s like running out of stock on a popular pair of shoes!

Because of the lack of supply OLED monitors are pretty expensive, especially when compared to more standard monitors, but they feature superior panel technology, which makes them the best monitor on the market right now. You get what you pay for in this modern world, so of course, it’s going to be expensive when you’re buying a high-quality product. Although they’re going to cost quite a bit of money, the many positive aspects of this display outweigh the financial burden. If you’re good on cash and can spend it, you may as well! If you aren’t and OLED's seem out of your price range, it’s a good idea to look into buying a used product.

The Conclusion

With stellar refresh rates, optimal color ranges and everything else you could ask for out of a display - OLED monitors are changing the way people approach television, movies and gaming.

I have nothing but good things to talk about in regards to OLED displays. Sure, they cost a pretty penny, but everything in life that’s “worth it” is going to cost you. Whether it’s money or time, anything worthwhile is never going to come cheap. If you’re still confused as to which OLED monitor you should be considering, just do a bit of research - check out Amazon and other online marketplaces. Look at reviews and identify the proper product for you

Fortnite Battle Royale Advanced Tips and Tactics to Win a Match,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/c/o/v/cov1-15df8.jpg ciwuq/fortnite-battle-royale-advanced-tips-and-tactics-to-win-a-match Fri, 06 Oct 2017 15:19:27 -0400 Ty Arthur

Back in my day, we Fortnite players didn't have a Battle Royale mode... we just played the Eye Of The Storm campaign and we didn't complain about it! Also, that was only like two months ago.

If you're just jumping into FBR after being away from Early Access for awhile, there's actually quite a bit to learn in this frantic free-for-all mode -- so first up you probably want to master the basics and study the five best guns to grab in a match.

With that out of the way, now its time to drill down to the nitty gritty and learn the best practices that separate those who die immediately from those who consistently make it into the top 10 for Fortnite Battle Royale.

When To Build

Knowing when to build in FBR can be tricky for those who spent a lot of time playing the campaign and are used to building a lot. In many cases, building isn't even worthwhile in Battle Royale, because the Storm is just going to wipe out your construction anyway, and while you are in craft mode an enemy is going to snipe you.

There are times when building is essential though, like when using bandages. If you aren't in excellent cover, throw up a wall before you spend the three seconds of downtime to heal. This has saved my life dozens of times.

Single panel walls also make effective barriers in cramped conditions of half-destroyed buildings. Throwing up a wall when a better armed opponent with higher health is about to corner you in a barn can hilariously turn the tables. From there, chuck a grenade over the wall if you have one, or instead turn around and tear down the other side of the building to flank the opponent who is wasting time trying to take out your wall.

 A wall and a grenade take you from sitting duck to efficient death-dealer

This is critical, and lots of players who aren't used to the campaign don't utilize this tactic -- don't forget that you can build stairways. If you are in a valley and need to get to high ground to avoid a battle, just throw up three or four wood stair panels and you're out.

Can't reach the top of a structure? Build your own access point. Shielding it on two or three sides makes an excellent sniper nest until the storm approaches.

Choosing Landing Points

In general, jumping straight into a large structure filled with loot is an excellent way to die at rank 100 or 99. Everyone else is foolishly doing that as well, and they are all going to be gunning each other down immediately.

Remember the opening moments of the first battle royale from The Hunger Games? Yeah, that's you -- a 10 year old kid too stupid to realize he needed to run the other direction. There are two major exceptions to this rule at the middle and far edge of the Battle Royale map.

Loot Lake

There's a shining jewel in the center of the map called Loot Lake that is a gamble, but one that's frequently worth it. This house on the lake island has at least two golden chests, plus another golden chest in the boat on the lake.

The problem is that you move at half speed in the water and it's wide open terrain, meaning you are certain to die if there are a few players running around the sides of the lake who notice you.

If you saw anyone dropping from the tour bus nearby, avoid the island like the plague -- but otherwise, this is a great spot to hit first (and then quickly flee) before anyone else heads there.

 Heading for Loot Lake

Anarchy Acres

The other exception is the Anarchy Acres farm area on the end of the map near the storm's edge. You have to wait a lot longer to jump from the bus, so you will be at a disadvantage if anyone else has made it there. However, if most people dropped from the bus straight away, you can get some crazy good weapons and healing items while sticking to the "edge of the storm" strategy and moving forward slowly (see below).

While these are the two spots I've had the best luck with avoiding early campers, there are plenty of excellent jump locations to pick depending on your strategy. Try out different options and see what works best with your play style.

No matter where you land, keep in mind that as the map circle gets smaller, buildings become more dangerous because it's more likely someone is hiding in there looking out from a window or the rooftop.

 Learn the map!

Staying Alive 

There's a difference between surviving and winning. Although the map is smaller than in a certain other Battle Royale style game (and it shrinks all the time) so you run into enemies more often, you can pretty consistently get into the top 10 - 20 just by hiding. 

Is that really how you want to get into the top though? From bushes to back hallways in multi-story buildings, keeping out of sight isn't that hard, but if you aren't using it to snipe or scope out better locations, all you are really killing is time.

There are different tactics to take here, and each has pros and cons or is more useful at various times:

  • Scouting heavily scavenged locations and killing those who are coming out laden down with new loot (be on the lookout while approaching structure for other players employing this strategy)
  • Building a sniper's nest on top of an existing structure for clear line of sight to anyone advancing
  • Waiting near the edge of the safe zone to take out those rushing in as the storm is about to advance
  • Staying consistently at the edge of the storm and only moving when you absolutely have to, which reduces the chances of getting shot from behind down to nearly 0%

No matter which strategy you employ, eventually you are going to get into a firefight, and in these cases that annoying spazztastic motion can actually help, especially when fighting an enemy using an automatic weapon.

These weapons have crazy spray and aren't super accurate, so randomly jumping, zagging left and right, and crouching and standing back up can keep you alive. Throwing up a last second wall can also help if you have a direction to escape.

Better than spazzing out, however, is just not being seen at all. To that end, avoid sprinting, since other enemies will hear you, and always avoid being out in the open whenever possible.

 Sniping until being forced to move can clear out the competition

Sound Cues

Seriously, you should be playing Fortnite's Battle Royale mode with a set of quality headphones on. Sound plays a much bigger role in BR than in the campaign.

You can hear movement -- especially sprinting -- from much farther away, and that's a telltale sign that someone has noticed you and is getting ready to blow you away. If you're lucky, it might instead be an inattentive player sprinting out in the open and basically screaming to the world that they want to get shot in the back.

Likewise, firing off a weapon is significantly louder in Battle Royale, and you can usually trace a bullet back to its origin through sound if there isn't a pitched battle going on.

The golden chests also give off a distinctive sound when you are nearby. Sometimes you have to smash through a wall or floor to get it, but usually they are just in corners or behind crates waiting to be looted.

Random Tips From The Pros

If your inventory slots are full, switch to the pickaxe while grabbing things. The healing items and ammo will go where they need to go, and you won't accidentally swap your current weapon for a lower quality gun you didn't mean to grab.

Don't discount it as a weapon in that situation either -- if you are cornered and low on ammo while trying to pick up loot, rushing ahead is a last ditch tactic, but there's plenty of players who have come out victorious that way and then picked up their opponents guns.

On the flip side, being a vulture is an excellent method to win. Wait for other players to battle it out while you hide behind a bush, then take out the victor while he's looting, since he'll likely be low on health. Life's not fair, and neither is Battle Royale mode.

 Looting out in the open is asking to be shot


This has to be addressed because it is currently a major problem. Epic has reportedly banned "thousands" of players so far, but they are going to keep coming back until some basic elements of the game change, so be on the lookout.

If that kill didn't feel right to you, stick around in spectator mode and see how your murderer fares for the next few minutes. If you notice the player somehow manages to spin a full 180 and headshot someone who was jumping out of cover for half a second, it's time to use the report feature and keep these scum out of our game.

Honestly, how narcissistic and self-centered do you have to be to cheat at a free-to-play game that has no rewards at the end of a match?!

 Hopefully before long you'll get this screen!

Do you have any other Fortnite Battle Royale tips and strategies we didn't cover here that have gotten you to the top? Let us know in the comments! And check out the rest of our Fortnite guides for more tips and tricks!

Stellaris Guide: How to Make and Use Vassals in Your Empire,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/s/t/e/stellaris-header-cf31c.jpg 5uhfu/stellaris-guide-how-to-make-and-use-vassals-in-your-empire Fri, 06 Oct 2017 11:06:43 -0400 Kieran Desmond

Stellaris is a sci-fi grand strategy game from genre veterans, Paradox. Set in the vastness of space, you are tasked with raising an Empire to rule the galaxy. But you won't be able to do it alone -- to accomplish your ultimate goal you're going need some allies, whether they like it or not.

While there are few different types of allies available in Stellaris, but this guide will focus on Vassals. Whether you want to conquer a species' homeworld and force them into servitude or liberate a species from the tyranny of another empire, there's a method for every play style when it comes to creating Vassals. 

What Are Vassals and What Are They Used For in Stellaris?

Vassals are one of the types of Subject Empires that can serve you, and they're the Subjects that you can exert the most control over. The subservient Vassals can be used to bolster your military ranks, as they will automatically join your wars -- this applies regardless of whether you're attacking or defending, which can be very helpful when a larger Empire attempts to overwhelm you or you need few extra ships to take out an annoying fleet.

Vassals also cannot colonize new worlds outside of their border range, and have no autonomy in relation to foreign policy or diplomatic relations. Depending on your relationship with them, Vassals will either be loyal or disloyal to your Empire. Be wary of disloyal Vassals, as they may join an opposing Empire or attack you when on opportune moment arises (such as during catastrophic event or an invasion).

How To Make Vassals in Stellaris

There are a few ways of acquiring Vassals, which are listed below. If I missed anything, make sure to call me out in the comments!

Method 1: War

Open up the "Empires" tab, select the Empire you want to Vassalize, and click on the "Communicate" button. Select "Declare War" on the right side of the menu, which will bring up the "War Demands" screen. 

Here you can choose from a list of demands, each requiring a certain Warscore Cost to achieve. You can get more Warscore by raiding planets and destroying fleets belonging to this Empire. Drag the Vassalize option over from the available demands on the left to the selected demands on the right, and then hit Confirm.

Once you've caused enough damage to this Empire, they will eventually contact you with details of surrender, in which case you can accept and they will become your Vassals. 

Method 2: Demanding Vassalization

To do this method, whoever you're trying to make your Vassal must be at peace.

Open up the "Empires" tab, select the Empire you want to Vassalize, and click on the "Communicate" button. Next to the "Demand Vassalization" button will either be a green tick or a red cross. If it's a tick, you're good to go -- hit the button and they'll agree to be your Vassal.

If it's a cross, however, hover over it to see the details of why they won't accept. If there's a lot of factors in the red, then you'll have to work on those specific areas until they're green and the target is more aligned with your Empire. The most important factors are ethics, the strength of your Empire, and their opinion of you.

Having similar ethics provides boosts all around, but cannot be influenced or manipulated. Some ethical alignments, such as fanatical xenophobes, will completely prevent any form of peaceful Vassalization.

Having a strong Empire can be achieved by having a large fleet and extensive territory. The stronger your Empire, the more likely other Empires are to accept peaceful Vassalization.

Method 3: Make a Sector a Vassal

Select a planet within a Sector you control and navigate to the "Governor" screen.

There should be a "Create Vassal" button in the bottom left corner. This button may be bugged however, as many players have reported it to be missing.

Method 4: Liberation

When at war, instead of simply conquering planets, you can choose to liberate them. The liberated population will create a new empire with ethics similar to that of your own government, and they will have a high opinion of you because you liberated them. 

After doing this, use the "Demand Vassalization" option we discussed in method 2 of this guide. You may want to pause the game after liberating a species, as they may choose to ally with someone else before you get a chance to induct them into your ranks.


That's it for this Stellaris guide on how to make and use Vassals! If there's anything more you want to know, let me know in the comments below and I'll get back to you! For more on this galactic domination sim, check out our other Stellaris guides for tips and tricks that are out of this world.

Forza Motorsport 7 Money Glitch for Infinite Credits,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/9/5/5/9559d6978903fe9.jpg m5nsz/forza-motorsport-7-money-glitch-for-infinite-credits Fri, 06 Oct 2017 09:15:40 -0400 Ty Arthur

The credits, prize crate, and VIP systems added into Forza Motorsport 7 are probably the new elements that fans are liking the least, but there's good news for those who hate these systems and are willing to cheat a bit.

If you've been having trouble getting what you want from the Rewards screen or the randomized price crates, there are two very simple methods for earning endless amounts of credits and other bonuses.

Below we cover both a non-glitch method that takes advantage of an easy workaround, and a full-on glitch method that uses a Forza 7 money bug.

Forza 7 Free Money Non-Glitch Method

Several of the Forza edition cars give extra credits on a win at certain circuits, such as the Nissan GT-R Forza Edition at Suzuka circuit, or the Acura NSX Forza Edition. Be sure to also equip any of your Mods that give bonus credits on the vehicle as well for maximum earnings.

Set the race time to 30 seconds, then set the Drivatars to 0. It will just be you on the race, it only takes 30 seconds, and you basically get a free 10,000 credit bump to your account. Now do it again. And again. And again. Just keep hitting Restart (that way you don't have to re-select the map and settings) and say hello to those prize crates!

What's great about this option is that it isn't a glitch or cheat -- it's just a feature that can be taken advantage of -- so you won't get your account banned and it probably won't be patched out anytime soon.

Forza 7 Free Money Glitch Method

This one is in fact a glitch and is very likely going to get patched out quickly, so jump on it as fast as you can!

Pick your fastest available vehicle and then head to Free Play and go to Homestead Miami Speedway circuit. Open up the Race Setup screen and set the game type to Circuit Race, then drop the Drivatars to 0 and set the laps to 3. 

With those settings changed, tap over to Setup and access the Assists screen, then set the Global Assists to Super Easy to change everything to the easiest difficulty. On this setting, the car steers and brakes for you, so you only have to press the gas to reach the finish line.

 Race Settings

After you finish the three laps, choose the Restart option on the race win screen. Hit Continue, and you will know the glitch is working for you if you don't get any rewards for winning the race -- you just get a black screen and then it goes back to the Free Play race settings.

Instead of choosing Start Race to restart, at this point you need to completely shut down and restart Forza Motorsports 7. On the Xbox, you have to highlight the game's entry on the menu screen, hit Start, and choose Quit. If you just shut off your console it won't actually restart the program, since the Xbox runs on low power mode by default.

When the game restarts, go back to Free Play and you should already be back at the same Homestead Miami track with the same settings. Go into Race Setup again and change it from Circuit Race to Timed Race, then again select 30 seconds and 0 Drivatars.

Start the race and just drive for 30 seconds until it ends. This time, choose Quit instead of Restart and then choose Continue. This time the rewards screen should appear. Stay on this screen for about 30 seconds without pressing anything, then again shut down and restart Forza 7 entirely.

When the game restarts, tab over to Progress and you should notice there are Rewards waiting for you! Just keep collecting the bonus credits or free cars for each Reward, and you should pretty quickly have a big stockpile.

Here's the best part... you can do this all again. Start again with the Homestead Miami Speedway race and repeat the process for an endless stream of free Forza 7 credits and cars.

 Collecting Glitch Rewards

What are you going to buy with all your free credits and how many times have you taken advantage of these easy Forza 7 cheats? Let us know in the comments!

If you still need help with other aspects of the game besides getting free money, be sure to check out the rest of our Forza Motorsport 7 guides for more tips and tricks. 

Middle-earth: Shadow of War Mobile Guide -- When to Brand or Execute,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/n/e/x/nexus2cee-maxresdefault-f0907.jpg u391o/middle-earth-shadow-of-war-mobile-guide-when-to-brand-or-execute Thu, 05 Oct 2017 16:39:06 -0400 Autumn Fish

In Middle-earth: Shadow of War Mobile, you take over Sauron's fortresses by systematically tackling increasingly tough legions of orcs led by a collection of brutish Commanders, Warchiefs, and Overlords. Upon reaching and weakening an orc leader, you have the chance to either Brand it to add it to your Orc Army or Execute it for special rewards.

The problem is, you only get to make this choice once with every orc leader you come across. How can you possibly know whether to Brand or Execute? Well, luckily, the decision becomes easier to make if you know how to navigate the Nemesis page.

When to Brand a Nemesis in Middle-Earth: Shadow of War Mobile

It's pertinent to always do research on the Nemesis of a level before battling it, and not just to save your own hide. Seek out and Brand orc leaders with skills that you want. If you wish to know their weaknesses beforehand, spend some Dominance to gather Intel on it.

Commanders come with 4 skills, Warchiefs get 5, and Overlords have all 6 skills unlocked from the start. While the extra skills of a Warchief or Overlord may be nice, you should still consider Branding the Commanders if they come with a decent array of skills. Besides, you can upgrade them to a Warchief or Overlord later if they amass enough Glory.

If an orc leader has good skills and a weakness that's not too bad, you shouldn't pass up the opportunity to Brand it and add it to the ranks of your Orc Army. If it's bad or even kind of mediocre, just Execute it for the rewards.

When to Brand or Execute in Middle-earth: Shadow of War Mobile Guide

Why You Should Execute Orcs in Middle-Earth: Shadow of War Mobile

At first, I asked myself why I shouldn't just Brand every Nemesis I came across and amass a glorious, unstoppable Orc Army. However, I quickly realized that by Branding everything, I was missing out on a crucial material needed for upgrading my party's power level.

When you Execute a Nemesis, you receive Rune Fragments -- a material which is otherwise impossible to get in the Campaign levels. With Rune Fragments, you can create and upgrade runes for your characters, which can be equipped after upgrading their Ring Level. Since you can only use Orc Allies every so often in a fight, it's important to keep your party's power level up as well. So make sure you don't neglect to Execute a Nemesis every now and again.

Now go forth and conquer some orcs while you wait for the release of the full game. Be sure to check back with GameSkinny for all the latest on Middle-earth: Shadow of War.

League of Legends S8 Guide: How to Get the Most Blue Essence,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/l/d/p/ldpkv1507231625-34a54.png 8kkav/league-of-legends-s8-guide-how-to-get-the-most-blue-essence Thu, 05 Oct 2017 15:43:37 -0400 Craig Snyder

Starting in the preseason for Season 8, which is expected to start in early November, League of Legends is going to undergo more changes than we've ever experienced before. Along with runes being completely revamped and your current ones being converted to currency, the loot system is going to be much different.

With these changes come a few strategies that will allow you to maximize on your overall rewards. In this guide, let me explain to you a few simple things that you can do right now to ensure that you're getting the most Blue Essence out of your resources before the preseason starts!

Understanding the IP Conversion

First, here's what's going to happen: Influence Points (IP) are being turned into Blue Essence (BE). If you have 190k IP right now, that means you'll be given 190k additional BE at the start of the preseason.

That sounds like a lot, right? It's harder to get BE than IP right now. To compensate for that, your current Blue Essence is being multiplied by 6.5. If you have 1000 BE right now, that'll convert into 6500 BE at the start of preseason.

Now let's get into the ways that you can take advantage of this conversion rate being imperfect.

Spend All of Your IP on Hextech Mystery Champion Shards

Hextech Mystery Champion Shards can be found in the Accessories tab of the Shop for 1700 IP. The annoying part is that you can't buy multiple at a time, meaning that converting hundreds of thousands of IP could take some time.

This spreadsheet shows the math behind purchasing 138 Hextech Mystery Champion Shards (including all champions). Hextech Mystery Champion Shards can get you BE in two ways:

  • Innately, by having BE included in the shard
  • By disenchanting the champion shard into BE

For example, a Hextech Mystery Champion Shard containing a Master Yi Champion Shard will also include 110 BE in the shard.

As you can see above, that shard will then disenchant for 87, totaling 197 BE. Multiplying 197 by 6.5 gives 1280.5. However, you paid 1700 for the Hextech Mystery Champion Shard. So, you lost currency? Yes, you did. However, it's extremely uncommon that this is going to happen. Only 35 out of 138 of the champion shards will result in a net loss.

When it's all mathed out, you can expect an average gain of 8.4% BE if you do this.

Reroll or Disenchant All Champion Shards You Won't Use

This kind of ties into what we just talked about but for an entirely different reason.

Not only will you be getting more out of champion shards if you use them as an IP converter, but disenchanting them is also going to net you less BE in the preseason. Right now, disenchanting a champion shard will pay back roughly 33% of the cost to purchase that champion. However, starting in the preseason, that's getting toned down to 20%.

Additionally, you won't be able to reroll champion shards into permanent champions anymore. Either way you look at it, you're getting more value out of doing something with them right now.

Devise Your Own Hextech Chest Strategy

This is a little tricky and it's a gray area where I simply can't give you a hard-lined answer on what to or not to do.

Here's an excerpt from Riot's official post on the loot changes:

"To offset the disenchant rate changes, we’re going to change the way loot chests work so you’ll have a chance to get two drops in each chest. Get ready for chests inside of your chests. We’ll also add "bad luck protection," so you won’t ever go on long streaks without getting a skin shard or a gemstone from chests."

Since then, Riot has not released any information on if these changes will be applied retroactively to chests before Season 8's preseason. Two things can happen here:

  1. This will be applied retroactively, in which your chests will contain more reward, protection from bad luck, and the potential for including another chest.
  2. This won't be applied retroactively, in which you lost out on converting the champion shards you get from these chests to earn more BE or rerolling permanent champions.

My gut tells me that chests earned before Season 8 will not follow the new model. I'm personally going to be cracking open all of the chests I get until the preseason, but it's on you to look out for any future information on how chests from the past will be treated. This is a bit of a gamble!

Rune and Rune Page Compensation

Along with IP being converted, all runes purchased with IP before Season 7 are going to be turned into BE. With the new runes coming out and old ones going away, Riot has decided to compensate players who spent on them. All tier 1 Marks, Seals, and Glyphs are being converted to 100 BE. All Quintessences are being converted to 300 BE. If you purchased runes during Season 7, the price of those is simply being refunded as BE.

Rune pages purchased with IP will be giving you 1500 BE each. Rune pages purchased with RP will be giving you an Epic Skin Shard per every 4. This rounds up, meaning that if you purchased 5 rune pages with RP then you'll be getting 2 Epic Skin Shards.


If you're looking for a quick and easy way to know how much BE you'll be getting out of all of your goods come preseason, a League of Legends' content creator named Phy has created a preaseason Blue Essence calculator. Bring that into Google Sheets, plug in your numbers, and you'll know what to expect. Be savvy with your resources and follow the tips above!

Looking for more League of Legends content? Check out some of our other articles:

Total War: Warhammer 2 Map and Mortal Empires Settlement List,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/c/o/v/cov2-07eb2.jpg jkv9g/total-war-warhammer-2-map-and-mortal-empires-settlement-list Thu, 05 Oct 2017 15:35:49 -0400 Ty Arthur

There might only be four starting factions with Total War: Warhammer 2, but the Vortex campaign still covers a staggering area of the map with several different continents and seas on display.

That small number of races is about to increase significantly within the next two months. Developer Creative Assembly has confirmed the Warhammer 2 Vortex campaign map will be combined with the original Total War: Warhammer Old World map for a combined campaign titled Mortal Empires.

Warhammer 2 Vortex Campaign Map And Settlements

Looking down at that overland campaign map for the base game, you might notice some similarities there to real world topography -- and that's absolutely not coincidence. Warhammer is essentially set on Earth in the past, while "Holy Terra" is Earth in the far future with Warhammer 40,000.

Many players coming into Warhammer from the Total War franchise (rather than the other way around) didn't realize that the Old World is purposefully analogous to Europe, while the New World Vortex campaign map is essentially North and South America, Africa, and an area representing lost Atlantis.

Below is a list of every single settlement currently available in the game at launch, broken out by faction. Note that the Skaven settlements appear as abandoned ruins to all other players and aren't on a fixed location on the map.

Faction Settlement
High Elves   Lothern
 High Elves   Order of Loremasters
 High Elves   Avelorn
 High Elves   Caledor
 High Elves   Chrace
 High Elves   Citadel of Dusk
 High Elves   Cothique
 High Elves   Ellyrion
 High Elves   Fortress of Dawn
 High Elves   Nagarythe
 High Elves   Saphery
 High Elves   Tir Anoc
 High Elves   Tor Elasor
 High Elves   Yvresse
 Dark Elves  Naggardon
  Dark Elves  Cult of Pleasure
  Dark Elves  Bleak Holds
  Dark Elves  Blood Hall Coven
  Dark Elves  Clar Karond
  Dark Elves  Cult of Excess
  Dark Elves  Deadwood Sentinels
  Dark Elves  Drakla Coven
  Dark Elves  Ghrond
  Dark Elves  Hag Graef
  Dark Elves  Har Ganeth
  Dark Elves  Kardond Kar
  Dark Elves  Scourge of Khaine
  Dark Elves  Ss'ildrator
  Dark Elves  The Forgebound
 Skaven  Clan Mors
 Skaven  Clan Pestilens
 Skaven  Clan Eshin
 Skaven  Clan Gnaw
 Skaven  Clan Mordkin
 Skaven  Clan Moulder
 Skaven  Clan Septik
 Skaven  Clan Skryre
 Skaven  Clan Spittel
 Lizardmen   Hexoatl
 Lizardmen  Last Defenders
 Lizardmen  Itza
 Lizardmen  Sentinels of Xeti
 Lizardmen  Southern Sentinels
 Lizardmen  Tlaqua
 Lizardmen  Tlaxtan
 Lizardmen  Xlanhuapec
 Lizardmen  Zlatlan


An overview of the entire Warhammer 2 base Vortex campaign map (via flyby) can be seen in the video clip below for a more up close experience than the overland map.

Mortal Empires Combined Map And Settlements

With the two campaigns combined, there will be changes in the Old and New World maps to include features from both games, like the Lizardmen's Geomantic Web, the Black Arks of the Dark Elves, and of course the Skaven ability to spread corruption in neighboring provinces.

Getting the two maps to snap together will require some terrain changes -- and while we don't have the full combined Mortal Empires map yet to actually look at, we do know which settlements will be included. Below we've listed out all 295 Mortal Empires campaign settlements currently confirmed.

Based on the settlement list, it seems like some areas have been removed entirely or shifted to new areas, so there may be different starting points for several Total War: Warhammer factions in Mortal Empires.

Province Settlement
 Aghol Wastelands  Fortress of the Damned
 Aghol Wastelands  Palace of Princes
 Aghol Wastelands  The Palace Of Ruin
Ash River   Numas
 Ash River   Quatar
 Ash River   Springs of Eternal Life
Atalan Mountains   Eye of the Panther
 Atalan Mountains   Martek
 Atalan Mountains   Vulture Mountain
 Avelorn  Evershael
 Avelorn   Gaean Vale
 Avelorn  Tor Saroir
 Blackspine Mountains  Plain of Dogs
 Blackspine Mountains   Plain of Spiders
 Blackspine Mountains  Red Desert
Caledor   Tor Sethai
 Caledor   Vauls Anvil
 Charnel Valley  Granite Massif
 Charnel Valley  Karag Orrud
 Chrace  Elisia
 Chrace  Tor Achare
Coast of Araby   Al Haikk
 Coast of Araby   Copher
 Coast of Araby   Fyrux
Cothique   Mistnar
Cothique  Tor Koruali
 Crater of the Walking Dead  Doom Glade
 Crater of the Walking Dead  Rasetra
 Deadwood  Dargoth
 Deadwood   Nargrar
 Deadwood  Shagrath
 Deadwood  The Frozen City
 Devil's Backbone  Lahmia
 Devil's Backbone  Lybaras
 Devil's Backbone  Mahrak
 Doom Glades  Hag Hall
  Doom Glades   Ice Rock Gorge
 Doom Glades  Temple of Addaioth
 Doom Glades  Vauls Anvil
 Eataine  Angerrial
 Eataine  Lothern
 Eataine  Shrine of Asuryan
 Eataine  Tower of Lysean
 Ellyrion  Tor Elyr
 Ellyrion  Whitefire Tor
 Great Desert of Araby  Bel Aliad
Great Desert of Araby   Black Tower of Arkhan
 Great Desert of Araby  El-Kalabad
 Great Desert of Araby  Pools of Despair
 Headhunters Jungle  Mangrove Coast
  Headhunters Jungle  Marks of the Old Ones
  Headhunters Jungle  Jungle Oyxl
Hell Pit   Hell  Pit
 Huahuan Desert  Chamber of Visions
 Huahuan Desert  Sentinels of Xeti
 Huahuan Desert  The Golden Colossus
 Iron Mountains  Altar of Ultimate Darkness
 Iron Mountains  Har Kaldra
 Iron Mountains  Naggarond
 Iron Mountains  Rackdo Gorge
 Ironfrost Glacier  Dagraks End
 Ironfrost Glacier  Ironfrost
 Ismuths of Lustria  Fallen Gates
  Ismuths of Lustria  Hexoatl
  Ismuths of Lustria  Skeggi
  Ismuths of Lustria  Ziggurat of Dawn
 Jungles of Green Mists  Spektazuma
 Jungles of Green Mists  Wellsprings of Eternity
 Kingdom of Beasts  Serpent Coast
  Kingdom of Beasts  Temple of Skulls
  Kingdom of Beasts  The Cursed Jungle
 Land of Assassins  Lashiek
 Land of Assassins  Palace of the Wizard Caliph
 Land of Assassins   Sorcerers Island
 Land of the Dead  Khemri
 Land of the Dead  Pyramid of Nagash
  Land of the Dead  Zandri
 Nagarythe  Shrine of Khaine
 Nagarythe  Tor Anlec
 Nagarythe  Tor Dranil
 Northern Great Jungle  Chaqua
 Northern Great Jungle   Temple of Tlencan
 Northern Great Jungle  Xahutec
 Northern Great Jungle  Xlanhuapec
 Northern Great Jungle of Pahualaxa  Macu Peaks
 Northern Great Jungle of Pahualaxa   Port Reaver
 Northern Great Jungle of Pahualaxa  Shrine of Sotek
 Northern Great Jungle of Pahualaxa  Swamp Town
 Obsidian Peaks  Circle of Destruction
  Obsidian Peaks  Clar Karond
  Obsidian Peaks  Storag Kor
  Obsidian Peaks  Venom Glade
 Saphery  Port Elistor
 Saphery  Tor Finu
 Saphery  Tower of Hoeth
 Shifting Sands  Antoch
Shifting Sands   Bhagar
 Shifting Sands  Ka-Sabar
 Skavenblight  Skavenblight
 Southern Great Jungle  Axlotl
  Southern Great Jungle  Itza
  Southern Great Jungle  Subatuun
Southern Great Jungle of Pahualaxa  Floating Pyramid
Southern Great Jungle of Pahualaxa   Monument of the Moon
 Southern Great Jungle of Pahualaxa  Pahuax
 Southern Great Jungle of Pahualaxa  The High Sentinel
 Southlands Jungle  Tower of the Gods
 Southlands Jungle  Teotiqua
 Southlands Worlds Edge Mountains  Karak Zorn
 Southlands Worlds Edge Mountains   Lost Plateau
 Southlands Worlds Edge Mountains  Mount Arachnos
 Spine of Sotek  Hualotal
 Spine of Sotek  Mine of the Bearded Skulls
 Spine of Sotek  Monument of Izzatal
The Black Coast   Arnheim
The Black Coast    Bleak Hold Fortress
 The Black Flood  Cragroth Deep
 The Black Flood  Hag Graef
 The Black Flood  Shroktak Mount
 The Black Flood  Temple of Khaine
 The Broken Land  Blacklight Tower
  The Broken Land  Karond Kar
  The Broken Land  Slavers Point
 The Chill Road  Ashrak
  The Chill Road  Ghrond
  The Chill Road  The Great Arena
 The Clawed Coast  Hoteks Column
 The Clawed Coast  The Monoliths
 The Clawed Coast  The Twisted Glade
 The Creeping Jungle  Temple of Kara
 The Creeping Jungle   Tlanxla
 The Creeping Jungle  Tlaxtlan
 The Road of Skulls  Har Ganeth
 The Road of Skulls   Kauark
 The Road of Skulls  Spite Reach
 The Road of Skulls  The Black Pillar
 Tir Anoc  Tor Anroc
  Tir Anoc  Whitepeak
  Titan Peaks  Ancient City of Quintex
  Titan Peaks  Ironspike
  Titan Peaks  Ssildra Tor
  Titan Peaks  The Moon Shard
 Vampire Coast  Pox Marsh
 Vampire Coast   The Awakening
 Vampire Coast  The Blood Swamps
 Volcanic Island  Fuming Serpent
 Volcanic Island   The Star Tower
 Yvresse  Elessaeli
  Yvresse  Tor Yvresse
 Athel Loren  Crag Halls
 Athel Loren  Vauls Anvil
 Athel Loren  Waterfall Palace
 Athel Loren  Yn Edryl Korian
 Averland  Averheim
 Averland   Grenzstadt
 Bastonne Et Montfort  Castle Bastonne
 Bastonne Et Montfort  Montfort
 Black Mountains  Karak Angazhar
 Black Mountains  Karak Hirn
 Black Mountains  Mighdal Vongalbarak
 Blightwater  Deff Gorge
 Blightwater   Karak Azgal
 Blightwater  Kradtommen
 Blightwater  Misty Mountain
 Blood River Valley  Barag Dawazbag
 Blood River Valley  Barak Varr
 Blood River Valley  Dok Karaz
 Blood River Valley  Varenka Hills
 Bordeleaux Et Aquitaine  Aquitaine
 Bordeleaux Et Aquitaine  Bordeleaux
Bordeleaux Et Aquitaine  Brionne
 Bordeleaux Et Aquitaine  Castle Carcassonne
 Chaos Wastes  Chaos Wastes
 Couronne Et Languille  Couronne
  Couronne Et Languille   Languille
 Death Pass  Iron Rock
 Death Pass  Karag Dron
 Death Pass  Karak Drazh
 Desolation of Nagash  Black Iron Mine
  Desolation of Nagash  Karak Azul
  Desolation of Nagash  Spitepeak
 Eastern Badlands  Crooked Fang Fort
Eastern Badlands   Dringorackaz
Eastern Badlands   Karak Eight Peaks
 Eastern Badlands  Valayas Sorrow
 Eastern Border Princes  Akendorf
Eastern Border Princes   Matorca
 Eastern Oblast  Praag
 Eastern Oblast   Volksgrad
 Eastern Sylvania  Castle Drakenhof
 Eastern Sylvania   Eschen
 Eastern Sylvania  Waldenhof
 Estalia  Bilbali
 Estalia  Magritta
 Estalia  Tobara
 Forest of Arden  Castle Artois
  Forest of Arden  Gisoreux
 Gianthome Mountains  Khazid Bordkarag
 Gianthome Mountains   Kraka Drak
 Gianthome Mountains   Sjoktraken
 Gianthome Mountains  Baersonlings Camp
 Gianthome Mountains  Frozen Landing
 Helspire Mountains  Graelingmoot
 Helspire Mountains   Serpent Jetty
  Helspire Mountains  The Monolith Of Latam
 Hochland  Brass Leep
 Hochland  Hergig
 Ice Tooth Mountains  Doomkeep
 Ice Tooth Mountains  Icedrake Fjord
 Ice Tooth Mountains  Longship Graveyard
 Lyonesse  Lyonesse
 Lyonesse  Mousillon
 Middenland  Carroburg
 Middenland   Middenheim
 Middenland  Weismund
 Mountains of Hel  Aeslings Conclave
Mountains of Hel  Altar of Spawns
Mountains of Hel  Winter Pyre
 Mountains of Naglfari  Naglfari Plain
 Mountains of Naglfari  Varg Camp
 Nordland  Dietershafen
 Nordland  Salzenmund
 Northern Grey Mountains  Blackstone Post
 Northern Grey Mountains  Grung Zint
 Northern Grey Mountains  Karak Ziflin
Northern Oblast   Fort Ostrosk
Northern Oblast  Fort Straghov
 Northern Worlds Edge Mountains  Karak Ungor
Northern Worlds Edge Mountains  Khazid Irkulaz
 Ostermark  Bechafen
 Ostermark  Essen
 Ostland  Castle Von Rauken
 Ostland  Norden
 Ostland  Wolfenburg
 Parravon Et Quenelles  Parravon
Parravon Et Quenelles  Quenelles
 Peak Pass  gnashraks_lair
 Peak Pass  Karak Kadrin
 Reikland  Altdorf
 Reikland  Eilhart
 Reikland  Grunburg
 Reikland  Helmgart
 Rib Peaks  Grom Peak
 Rib Peaks  Mount Gunbad
 Southern Badlands  Agrul Migdhal
Southern Badlands  Galbaraz
Southern Badlands  Gor Gazan
Southern Badlands  Gronti Mingol
 Southern Grey Mountains  Grimhold
Southern Grey Mountains  Karak Azgaraz
Southern Grey Mountains  Karak Norn
 Southern Oblast  Fort Jakova
Southern Oblast  Kislev
Southern Oblast  Zavastra
 Stirland  The Moot
 Stirland  Wurtbad
 Talabecland  Kemperbad
 Talabecland  Talabheim
The Silver Road  Karaz A Karak
The Silver Road  Mount Squighorn
The Silver Road  The Pillars of Grungni
 The Vaults  Karak Bhufdar
  The Vaults   Karak Izor
 The Vaults  Zarakzil
 The Wasteland  Gorssel
  The Wasteland  Marienburg
 Tilea  Luccini
 Tilea  Miragliano
 Troll Country  Erengrad
Troll Country  Zoishenk
 Trollheim Mountains  Bay of Blades
Trollheim Mountains  Sarl Encampment
Trollheim Mountains  The Tower of Khrakk
 Vanaheim Mountain  bjornlings_gathering
 Vanaheim Mountain  Pack Ice Bay
Vanaheim Mountain  Troll Fjord
 Western Badlands  Bitterstone Mine
 Western Badlands  Dragonhorn Mines
 Western Badlands  Ekrund
 Western Badlands  Stonemine Tower
 Western Border Princes  Zvorak
 Western Border Princes  Myrmidens
 Western Sylvania  Castle Templehof
 Western Sylvania  Fort Oberstyre
 Western Sylvania  Schwartzhafen
 Wissenland  Nuln
 Wissenland  Pfeildorf
 Wissenland  Wissenburg
 Yn Edri Eternos  The Oak of Ages
 Zhufbar  Karag Dromar
 Zhufbar  Oakenhammer
 Zhufbar  Zhufbar


What faction are you planning on playing in the combined Mortal Empires campaign and what settlements are you planning on raiding first? Let us know in the comments section below! And be sure to check out the rest of our Warhammer 2 guides for more tips and tricks. 

PUBG Guide: Complete Vehicles List with Spawn Locations,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/h/e/a/header-4918c.jpg rz5tp/pubg-guide-complete-vehicles-list-with-spawn-locations Thu, 05 Oct 2017 10:35:30 -0400 Kieran Desmond

Grabbing a vehicle may not be the stealthiest method of travel in PlayerUnknown's Battlegrounds, but it sure is the quickest. And not all vehicles are made equal -- so if you want to get the edge over your opponents with some PUBG vehicle knowledge, then you're in right place.

There are currently 5 different types of vehicles, with a 6th to be added soon. Brendan "PlayerUnknown" Greene recently tweeted a picture of PUBG's New Vehicle (which strongly resembles the Volkswagen Type 2 Mini Bus) and hinted that it was the first of 3 new vehicles for the game. It's been speculated by the PUBG community that the other 2 vehicles could be a jet ski and the ZIL 313 armored truck.

Where To Find Vehicles in PUBG

Unfortunately there's no guaranteed spawn spots for vehicles in PUBG. However, using player data and feedback from Reddit, ShatterNL created a very helpful map (below). The map details the locations of garages (which have a high chance of spawning vehicles), possible land vehicle and boat spawn locations, and the best places to look for loot. Thanks to ShatterNL for such a comprehensive breakdown!

ShatterNL MAp

Another great member of the PUBG community, Bravenwolf, has tested all the vehicles in the game and produced some really great speed statistics. The stats published cover vehicles' top speeds and time taken to reach 50km/h with and without boosting. I'll drop those in with each vehicle's entry below.

All Vehicles in PUBG

Without further ado here's a run down of each of the vehicles currently in PUBG with information about their speed, how many players can squeeze in, and more!

  • Seats: 2
  • Normal Speed: 0-50km/h in 6 seconds
    • Top Speed: 91km/h in 16 seconds
  • Boosted Speed: 0-50km/h in 4 seconds
    • Top Speed: 91km/h in 11 seconds

The Buggy's regular top speed and its boosted top speed are the same. This is the only vehicle in PUBG with this feature.

Therefore you can boost up to the Buggy's top speed and then stop boosting. This way you maintain the vehicle's max speed whilst making less noise and saving fuel. 


Dacia 1300 Sedan
  • Seats: 4
  • Normal Speed: 0-50km/h in 6 seconds
    • Top Speed: 91km/h in 29 seconds
  • Boosted Speed: 0-50km/h in 4 seconds
    • Top Speed: 117km/h in 9 seconds

The Dacia frequently spawns in garages across the map and comes in 4 different color variations -- blue, yellow, orange and gray.

  • Seats:
    • 2 for regular Motorcycle
    • 3 for Motorcycle with sidecar
  • Normal Speed: 
    • 0-50km/h in 2 seconds
    • 0-100km/h in 8 seconds
  • Top Speed: 121km/h in 23 seconds

The Motorcycle is currently the only vehicle that cannot boost, but is also the fastest vehicle in PUBG. Like the Dacia, Motorcycles can be found in garages throughout the map.

The Motorcycle is currently the only vehicle in PUBG that has bulletproof tires. It is unknown whether this is a bug or an intentional gameplay balancing mechanic to make up for how exposed players are whilst riding Motorcycles.

  • Seats: 5
  • Normal Speed: 0-50km/h in 5 seconds
    • Top Speed: 85km/h in 25 seconds
  • Boosted Speed: 0-50km/h in 3 seconds
    • Top Speed: 99km/h in 16 seconds

The UAV has 3 variants -- soft top, hard top, and open top. The hard top provides the most protection from gunfire, whilst the open top leaves you the most exposed to the enemy.

This vehicle is a gas guzzler at top speed -- so it's best utilized off-road, travelling short distances between locations.

PG-117 Boat
  • Seats: 5
  • Normal Speed: 0-50km/h in 3 seconds
    • Top Speed: 74km/h in 9 seconds
  • Boosted Speed: 0-50km/h in 2 seconds
    • Top Speed: 91km/h in 6 seconds

Even though the PG-117 is quick, this boat is one of the more risky vehicles to use due to the lack of cover or protection provided.


PUBG Vehicle Tips and Tricks

  • To safely exit a vehicle, make sure you're travelling less than 25km/h.
  • If you exit a vehicle with no armor equipped whilst travelling at around 60km/h or more, you will definitely die.
  • A well-placed Frag Grenade can flip an overturned vehicle back onto its wheels. (Of course, you may just blow up your car.)
  • If you leave a vehicle and don't plan on using it again, pop its tires so no one else can use it.
  • Be wary when shooting from a vehicle as a passenger, as it's possible to hit other players in the same vehicle.
  • To refuel a vehicle, right click a Gas Can in your inventory while sitting in a stationary vehicle. You'll be left vulnerable while refueling, so make sure to do it in a safe or secluded area. 

That's it for this guide on PUBG's vehicles! For more PUBG guides, check out the links below:

Forza Motorsport 7 Beginner's Road Guide to Racing,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/c/o/v/cov1-53911.jpg wsswy/forza-motorsport-7-beginners-road-guide-to-racing Wed, 04 Oct 2017 16:26:19 -0400 Ty Arthur

Technically the 10th iteration of the series, Forza Motorsport 7 is a thing of beauty to behold for racing fans, pushing the Xbox One to its graphical limits (and even offering up 4K on the rapidly-approaching Xbox One X).

If you played the previous games you should already know what to expect, with just a few changes in the formula appearing this time around. For the newbies just jumping into the series, however, there is a challenging learning curve here to figure out how to even win a race.

Forza 7 Driving Tips

If you are just starting out -- or your racing game experience can essentially be boiled down to "I like playing Mario Kart" -- then the Assists screen will be your best friend.

High performance vehicles driving at top speeds on tight tracks are difficult to handle, and that's why you want to learn with the Assists on first. Most notably, the Suggested Line, Traction Control, Shifting, Rewind, and Damage options are where you want to focus.

You don't want to be worrying about shifting while figuring out a track, and allowing vehicle damage to do anything but show cosmetic changes will quickly see you losing races.

Turning the Assists on doesn't lower your earnings, which is crucial for the new player. You can still end up with just as much money with all Assists set to super easy as you can on the hardest difficulty.

 Changing Assist Settings

The Suggested Line is a powerful tool showing you the best way to move through a track, shifting to blue when its time to accelerate and red when its time to brake for a curve. For the most part, this nifty tool can help you get into the lead fairly quickly, and it teaches you how to think about a circuit to win later on when the Assist is turned off.

There's a key exception to note here though: the Suggested Line is not the be-all, end-all of the road, and it isn't always perfect. There are times where it's better to avoid the Line entirely, especially if all the other cars on the track are crowding into that single lane.

Passing to take the lead requires paying attention to the driving pattern of the car ahead of you. Don't just hit the gas and go for it, as you are going to end up losing speed as you bump into a car or a nearby obstacle. Instead, wait until you can clearly tell the car is about to start drifting left or right to match the Suggested Line, then pull in front.

Don't forget -- the other drivers will hit you. The AI racers aren't super attentive, or maybe they are just jerks, but either way they won't give up their lead and pull over to avoid hitting you if you are trying to pass as they are drifting closer to the edge.

If you get into a situation where you've consistently lost speed or you can't quit match up to the Suggested Line, be sure to take advantage of Rewind if you have it turned on. Its simple to just go back 5 or 10 seconds in the race and perform that section better.

 Aiming for the Suggested Line

The Forza 7 campaign makes a point of saying it over and over, but it bears repeating again: after you have the basics down, and whether you are using Assists or not, adaptability is the name of the game here.

Weather conditions will change how you need to drive. A race filled with semi trucks instead of sports cars will change how you need to drive. Getting clipped by another car because you weren't paying attention will change how you need to drive.

Practice is your best method of mastering these changes, so jump in and try out different vehicles on different tracks with different weather. There are 700+ vehicles to choose from, so its not like you are ever going to be short on options or new driving styles.

Forza 7 New Mechanics

For those returning to the series, there are some changes you need to be aware of before jumping in. Most notably are the ways in which you can earn more money or get new options for your vehicle collection.

As was mentioned above, turning on the easy Assists doesn't lower your earnings... but increasing the Drivatar difficulty will increase what you earn. Changing the Drivatar skill level to Above Average or higher bumps up your race rewards -- so if you want more cash, give it a try. Keep in mind though that the difficulty gets crazy, quickly. At the higher levels on the more difficult circuits it can be a challenge to ever win if you haven't mastered your particular vehicle and the current track.

Next up are Mods, which you can earn through the randomized prize crates. Yeah, we know, nobody's stoked about this change all AAA games seem to have nowadays, but its here so you've got to learn to deal with the change.

 Opening a prize crate and hoping for the best...

While you might get a minor cosmetic and mechanical change to your vehicle in a loot crate, you can also get a Mod that increases your earnings significantly, and that's what you want to shoot for. So open these up as often possible.

Finally, make sure to lay down the cash to buy new cars frequently, because this time around your Car Collection rating actually has an impact not just on achievements, but on the quality of other vehicles you can buy and what rewards you receive on increasing your ranking.

 Gotta keep upgrading those cards with Mods!

Ready to race? Get to it then, because that's the basics of everything you need to know to play! Have any other Forza 7 driving tips and tricks we should try out? Let us know in the comments section.

Divinity: Original Sin 2 Guide: How to Complete the Delusions of Grandeur Quest,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/d/i/v/divinity-180df.jpg 09sag/divinity-original-sin-2-guide-how-to-complete-the-delusions-of-grandeur-quest Wed, 04 Oct 2017 10:44:00 -0400 Kieran Desmond

Divinity: Original Sin 2 is a modern take on the way games used to be made -- with very little handholding. It boasts quests within quests that require players to really use their brains (and throwing some for a loop in the process).

Delusions of Grandeur is one such quest. It's a sub-quest within the side quest called The Forgotten and the Damned. So in order to complete that side quest, you must get through Delusions of Grandeur. If you're having trouble, though, this guide should help you along with a step-by-step breakdown of this quest so you can continue your progress through one of the decade's best RPGs. 

How to Start the Delusions of Grandeur Quest

To activate this sub-quest you’ll need to have reached Bloodmoon Island in Act 2 and have found the 3 vaults that relate to The Forgotten and the Damned side quest. Discovering the vaults unlocks the quest. Although not a requirement, it’s definitely recommended that you be at least level 15 for this one.

If you need help reaching Bloodmoon Island, check out this guide on How to Get to Bloodmoon Island to get exact instructions.

Delusions of Grandeur Walkthrough

Step 1: Cast Spirit Vision Inside the Vault to Reveal Brother Robert's Spirit

Once you enter the Vault, you must use Spirit Vision in order to see the spirit of Brother Robert. 

The Spirit Vision Spell Book is located in Meistr Siva’s basement in Driftwood, obtainable after the first Godwoken ritual during the Powerful Awakening quest.

Step 2: Open the Locked Door

There are multiple methods that you can use to open the locked door, but one of them will make you forfeit your rewards for this quest -- so be careful!

Method 1: Repair the Broken Lever with a Silver Lever Shaft.

Craft a Silver Lever Shaft by putting anything made of silver into the ancient forge, located at coordinates (X:314, Y:475). There’s a Silver Bar near the forge -- but if you already used it for something else, you can find more along the shore and on a body in the Unfinished Crypt.

Make sure to repair the broken lever with whichever character has the Silver Lever Shaft in their inventory, as it seems a bug prevents Magic Pockets from activating.

Method 2: Persuade Brother Robert to open the door.

This option is only available if you have high enough proficiency in Persuasion. If you do, you can simply persuade Brother Robert through a dialogue exchange, and he'll open the door for you. 

Method 3: Consume Brother Robert.

This is a last resort option if, for whatever reason, you can’t do either of the other two methods listed above. You may consume Robert using the Source Vampirism spell to claim a source point and break his control over the lever that controls the door.

  • Note: Consuming Brother Robert will mean forfeiting your reward for this sub-quest.
Step 3: Enter the Inner Chamber and Defeat Rajjarima

Upon entering the chamber behind the locked door, you'll meet the lizard Rajjarima -- who is in source chains and believes herself to be a Godwoken. You'll see a Source puddle on the ground once inside. After you step into the puddle you'll initiate a conversation with Rajjarima that (as far as we know) will always end in combat.

A successful Persuasion will allow you to resist her attempt to steal some of your Source powers, which she reacts to with anger and attacks you. A failed Persuasion will see you fail to resist her attempt to steal some of your Source powers, which makes her stronger in the upcoming fight.

Before activating dialogue with Rajjarima, you'll want to separate your party however you see fit. The first thing she'll do is cast Arrow Storm, which could potentially wipe your entire party straightaway if you don't spread out beforehand.

Step 4: Return to Brother Robert to Collect Your Reward

Unless you consumed Robert to progress through the door earlier, then you can collect your reward for this quest by returning and speaking to him.

For completing this quest you are rewarded with a Love Grenade, Nimble Belt, and some Gold.

You also have the choice of one of the following three items:

  • Silent Watcher (Epic Helmet)
  • Spiritual Boots (Epic Boots)
  • Rivet Gloves (Epic Gloves)

I hope this guide helped you complete the Delusions of Grandeur quest! If you have any questions or you think we left something out, let us know in the comments below! If you need help with other aspects of the game, check out the rest of our Divinity Original Sin 2 guides for more tips and walkthroughs. Here's a few to get you started:

How to Get Swornbreaker in Divinity: Original Sin 2,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/u/n/t/untitled-0d70c.jpg ampe0/how-to-get-swornbreaker-in-divinity-original-sin-2 Wed, 04 Oct 2017 10:23:26 -0400 Sergey_3847

As a part of the Key to Freedom quest in Divinity: Original Sin 2, you will be given a schematic of the Swornbreaker Scythe by either Ryker at Stonegarden or Almira, the Succubus.

You will need to collect two pieces of the scythe in order to be able to craft it: the haft and the blade. These pieces are hidden in two different locations -- and if you're having trouble finding them, then follow our step-by-step guide below.

How to Find the Haft and the Blade of Swornbreaker in Divinity: Original Sin 2

Step 1: Enter the Black Ring Encampment

Travel to the Nameless Isle and visit the Elven Temple in the north-eastern part of the map. You need to speak to Bishop Alexandar, who resides on the top level of the temple.

He will give you a task to kill the Sallow Man, a leader of the Black Ring. If you agree, he will grant you with a magic item -- Cowl of True Sight. You will need it to enter the Sallow Man's camp.

After that go to coordinates x:268 z:807. There you will encounter a troll that protects an entrance into the cave. You must kill the troll first before entering the cave, which accomodates the Black Ring Encampment.

Step 2: Find the Haft of the Swornbreaker

As you enter the cave you will stumble upon a Decrepit Altar, and behind the altar you will see a blocking wall. Equip one of your characters that has the highest level of Intelligence with the Cowl of True Sight and use it to dispel the illusory wall.

Inside the camp you will have to fight Sallow Man and his thugs. When you're finished, go to the war room at coordinates x:129 z:202 and open the golden chest. Inside the chest you will find the first piece to the Swornbreaker.

Step 3: Enter the Portal

Travel to the Lunar Gate located at coordinates x:335 z:823 and enter the temple. Go inside the Teacher's Hall and go through the doors at coordinates x:620 z:632.

Behind the door you will see a portal that will teleport you to another location. There you will immediately encounter a dead bird. Cast a Spirit Vision source skill so you could talk to its spirit -- Ghechswol, the Arena Master.

Step 4: Find the Blade of the Swornbreaker

After the conversation you will begin the fight with the Great Guardian of the Arena. In order to kill him you need to electrically charge one of the phase generators behind the Guardian to create a giant electric beam. Then, you need to line up the reflectors and aim the beam right at the Great Guardian -- this will stun him permanently.

After you defeat the Great Guardian, he will drop loot, among which you will see the second piece to the Swornbreaker. 

Finally, in order to craft the Swornbreaker Scythe combine the two pieces of the Swornbreaker with the schematic, and you will have one of the coolest looking weapons in the game.


If you're looking for other Divinity: Original Sin 2 guides, then check out the list below:

Stellaris Guide: What is the Control Center and What Does it Do?,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/s/y/n/synthetic-dawn-banner-236f1.png nj2xr/stellaris-guide-what-is-the-control-center-and-what-does-it-do Tue, 03 Oct 2017 17:35:34 -0400 Kengaskhan

Stellaris’ Synthetic Dawn expansion adds brand new machine civilizations to the game, all of which feature distinct playstyles when compared to the empires already present.

While a lot of that has to do with their unique civics, Synthetic Dawn also introduces some machine-only buildings that are actually lost if a non-machine empire conquers the planet. One of those buildings is the Control Center.

The Control Center has a base cost of 250 Minerals and a base Building Time of 360. The Control Center is not available to Assimilator or Servitor empires, and your empire must have unlocked both Organic Intermediaries and Processing Hub from the Synchronicity tradition tree in order to construct it.

The Control Center produces 2 Energy Credits, which may not seem like a lot given its steep cost. But it also produces 4 Unity, and most importantly, it provides a planet-wide production output boost of 5% for your Robotic pops.

Control Center vs Power Plant IV

You’re probably going to want to take full advantage of the Control Center's multiplicative production boost, which means you'll want to build it on every planet -- since multiplicative bonuses are usually awesome. But first, you need to make sure that your Control Center breaks even with a Power Plant IV (which produces 5 energy) in terms of energy output.

Because Control Centers only produce 2 energy, the 5% production bonus is going to need to generate at least 3 energy to make up for the deficit.

Using some simple math, we can figure out that 5% of 60 is exactly 3, meaning the rest of the planet’s tiles need to produce a total of at least 60 energy for the Control Center to break even.

With each Power Plant IV producing 5 energy, you need 12 tiles on the planet, plus another for your Control Center. Any more tiles than that, and your Control Center will be more productive than a Power Plant IV (which isn’t even accounting for the Control Center's Unity production or the planet's natural resources).


The Control Center has the potential to be a powerhouse for your machine empire -- just be sure you know where you're building it! That's all the advice we have for now, but you can check out the rest of our Stellaris guides for more tips and tricks to help you in your galactic adventures. 

Total War: Warhammer 2 Skaven Faction Strategy and Campaign Walkthrough,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/s/k/a/skavencov-a4561.jpg 24h3o/total-war-warhammer-2-skaven-faction-strategy-and-campaign-walkthrough Tue, 03 Oct 2017 17:32:23 -0400 Ty Arthur

There may only be four base Total War: Warhammer 2 factions to pick from, but there's a surprising amount of variety between those vastly different races.

The chaotic Skaven are always on the hunt for Warpstone so they can take over the magical Vortex, and they have a lot of mechanics that set them apart from the Lizardmen or Elves.

To win as the Skaven, you sort have to think like a cowardly rat while also behaving like a horde of unstoppable plague rats rolling over a city. Below we cover all the basics you need to know to get started. Looking for help with other Warhammer II factions? Check out these guides instead:

The Best Skaven Lord for Your Total War: Warhammer 2 Campaign

Your basic decision with the starting Skaven Legendary Lord is between fighter or wizard, but there's actually a bit more to it than just melee or spells when you consider the faction effects of both choices.

Queek Headtaker is your straight up melee duelist, who has high armor and can penetrate enemy armor. Queek offsets your weak starting units in the early campaign. The exact opposite of Malekith from the Dark Elves faction, Queek actually steals some of the XP earned by any other Lord, so he will consistently be at high level even if he doesn't go directory into combat all the time. He's not big on wizards though, so Grey Seers you recruit will have reduced loyalty.

Lord Skrolk is your spell casting option, and he doesn't include a tutorial mission -- so make sure you've mastered the game's basics first! There's a lot of reasons to pick Skrolk, though, like the fact that plague buildings cost half as much to build or that the Pestilent Scheme rite is reduced in cost by a whopping 75%! Additionally, Skrolk is actually a competent melee fighter besides just casting spells, and his skills let you increase his combat prowess even further.

 Picking a Skaven Legendary Lord

Warhammer II Skaven Campaign Strategy

Skaven spread corruption, but it works a bit differently than vampiric or chaos corruption does for any other faction. Your public order will go down as corruption spreads just like with the other types, but it will also cause problems for the other factions and let you use the vital Menace Below ability. Spreading corruption to a nearby province before going on the offensive can be a great way to get ready to invade that area.

Unlike the other three main factions, Skaven settlements are underground and invisible to the other players, showing up as ruins that have to be explored. Some will have nothing, and some will be flooded with your vile ratmen. The result here is that its less dangerous to leave a settlement undefended than with the other Warhammer II factions.

While moving around your Lords, your typical stance will be Ambushing -- but don't forget you can use the Underway to move through otherwise impassable terrain, making the Warhammer II campaign map much more wide open to Skaven than any other faction.

Your strengths as Skaven are your ability to constantly ambush enemy armies and your overwhelming numbers. Your weakness is that those numbers are hungry. While Dark Elves have slaves, Skaven also have a third resource -- in this case, it's simply food. Your endless vermin tides have to consume a lot, and they eat all the time.

Keeping food stocks high gives bonuses, but when food hits 40% or less you take a hit to growth, leadership, and public order. And it gets exponentially worse as the food supplies tumble from there.

Some buildings provide food, but in the beginning your main food gathering technique will be combat -- eat survivors after a battle and loot a settlement when raiding. The end result is that you essentially have to play aggressively. Your empire is a horde of rats expanding outward in a tide. Many of those rats will die. But that's OK, because there's always another wave just behind ready to push forward.

Constant expansion is usually needed to keep up with the pace of food and army growth, and that's where Rites like the Scheme of DOOOOOM! come in, letting you knock down enemy walls so you can easily invade without needing siege equipment.

The Pestilent Scheme Rite (which is super cheap if you picked Lord Skrolk) will kill off armies quickly, again making it quite easy to siege cities after they have been devastated by plague (just don't accidentally infect your own units).

 Skaven Rites

You have to be strategic in how you expand as the Skaven faction, however, because every army and settlement uses up food every round. Don't take more locations than you can consistently feed! Being low on food will set you back significantly, both in keeping armies on the map an in being able to overwhelm opponents in battle.

When you do take a settlement, food comes into play yet again, as you can spend food supply to skip previous buildings in the chain and start with up to a tier III building immediately.

This is a huge advantage and can put you way ahead of the competition, since you get to skip all those turns waiting to build the previous tier buildings. Use this ability wisely to get needed infrastructure while skipping anything that isn't immediately useful.

 Going straight to a Tier III Laboratory

Warhammer II Skaven Combat Strategy

All of the factions play differently in combat, and with Skaven your early campaign battles are all about waves of cannon fodder that swarm over the enemy. You need to outnumber the opponent because your units overall are much weaker. Until much later in the game, you won't have much in the way of mounted units or well-armored characters, so get used to having big groups of rats sacrifice themselves and be replaced.

The flow of combat significantly changes when playing Skaven as opposed to a faction like the Lizardmen, where you would usually want your melee bruisers to rush in and stay put until the enemy is dead.

Most skaven melee units flee easily, but they actually get a speed bonus when ignoring your commands and running for their lives -- which can be used to your advantage. Although they lose morale and flee at the drop of a hat, they recover and regroup quickly. Combat becomes a fluid movement with Skaven, re-positioning across the battlefield and bringing in new units to flank enemies who are chasing your fleeing cowardly rats.

The Menace Below ability is your trump card, so make frequent use of it as needed. The summoned rats aren't super powerful, but having a sneaky surprise attack always available to flank enemy units can be devastating when used properly.

There are plenty of ways to increase your Menace Below usages available, from high food supply to spreading corruption. Anywhere you drop the rats is going to force your opponent to move some units to deal with them, which is perfect for flanking attacks from Night Runners or some ranged fire from Slingers. You can even drop them on much more powerful units -- like right behind a bunch of charging cavalry -- and still get decent results.

While using hordes of weak creatures in the early game, you need to pick your battles wisely. Armored saurus warriors or devastating ranged spells from enemy heroes can annihilate your forces. In the mid to late game, Plague Monks, Storm Vermin, and Warp Lightning Cannons are your saving graces and finally let you meet more heavily armored melee fighters on even ground. Field these better units to finally bring about some serious devastation.

 Summoning the Menace Below to flank mounted units

Those are all the basic tactics you need to know to get started! Do you have any other strategies or tips for the Warhammer II Skaven campaign that have worked well? Let us know in the comments!

Stellaris Guide: Bio-Trophies and How To Use Them,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/s/y/n/synthetic-dawn-banner-e98bc.png bklj2/stellaris-guide-bio-trophies-and-how-to-use-them Tue, 03 Oct 2017 15:47:16 -0400 Kengaskhan

Stellaris’ Synthetic Dawn expansion introduces machines species and empires to the game -- and you’ll find that these AI civilizations will play very differently compared to their organic counterparts. In fact, one of the more notable features is the way in which your synthetics interact with organic populations.

The three default machine empires are the Exterminators, the Assimilators, and the Rogue Servitors. While it should be pretty easy to guess how the first two empires deal with organics (Exterminators may only exterminate organics pops and Assimilators may only assimilate organics pops), the Rogue Servitors are a bit more novel in their approach to synthetic-organic relations.

The Rogue Servitor prime directive makes them the ultimate servants, deriving both satisfaction and purpose from the comfort of their masters -- their “Bio-Trophies”.

What Are Bio-Trophies in Stellaris?

Rogue Servitors venerate organics, and they begin the game with two Bio-Trophy populations representing the entirety of their organic creator race.

It’s not just their creators either -- any organic pops within your Rogue Servitor empire can be assigned the unique Bio-Trophy citizenship status and have the “Mandatory Pampering” living standard forced upon them (whether they like it or not).

Each Bio-Trophy produces Influence and Servitor Morale, but at a very steep cost -- Mandatory Pampering is a very expensive standard of living, and each Bio-Trophy will put a pretty heavy strain on your stockpiles, consuming 3.00 Consumer Goods per month.

How does Servitor Morale Work?

Your Rogue Servitors get Servitor Morale for every 10% of your empire’s population with Bio-Trophy citizenship -- which translates to a 10% production boost and 0.5 Influence per month. So, if your population is composed of 80% synthetics and 20% Bio-Trophies, you’ll get a 20% production boost and 1 Influence per month.

There are, however, two things to note about Servitor Morale:

  • Servitor Morale’s bonuses caps at a Bio-Trophy population of 40%. So, having a population composition of 50% synthetics and 50% Bio-Trophies will still only result in a 40% production boost and 2 Influence per month.

  • Servitor Morale does not run parallel to your Bio-Trophy population. Instead, there are Bio-Trophy population thresholds at every 10%. So, a Bio-Trophy population of 39% wouldn’t give you a 39% production boost, it’d give you 30%.


If you're looking to create a robotic empire without annihilating, assimilating, or subjugating (okay, maybe you could argue this one) every organic you come across,  you should try giving the Rogue Servitors a shot and see why they care so much about their Bio-Trophies!

That's all for this guide, but be sure to check out the rest of our Stellaris guides if you need more help with this epic space game!

Complete Forza Motorsport 7 Car List,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/c/o/v/cov1-5b7ff.jpg rfbz6/complete-forza-motorsport-7-car-list Tue, 03 Oct 2017 14:32:08 -0400 Ty Arthur

Ready to race? Forza Motorsport 7 features an absolutely staggering list of more than 700 distinct vehicles, including a crop of cars from Fate Of The Furious as a day-one DLC and a few included with the Hoonigan Car Park pre-order exclusive.

Below we list out all of the Forza 7 cars available on launch day, broken out by make and listed in order of model and year. You won't have any shortage of vehicle choices to leave your friends in the dust!

Complete Forza Motorsport 7 Car List

While you can play any of these vehicles (minus the DLC entries) in Free Play mode, not all of them are immediately available in the Buy Cars menu. Buckle up, because this is an absurdly long list! 

  • 2016 Abarth 695 Biposto
  • 2013 Abarth Punto SuperSport
  • 1968 Abarth 595 esseesse
  • 2017 Acura NSX
  • 2002 Acura RSX Type-S
  • 2001 Acura Integra Type-R
Alfa Romeo
  • 2014 Alfa Romeo 4C
  • 2011 Alfa Romeo Giulietta Quadrifoglio Verde
  • 2007 Alfa Romeo 8C Competizione
  • 1992 Alfa Romeo Milano Quadrifoglio Verde
  • 1992 Alfa Romeo 155 Q4
  • 1990 Alfa Romeo SZ Sprint Zagato
  • 1986 Alfa Romeo Spider Quadrifoglio Verde
  • 1986 Alfa Romeo GTV-6
  • 1970 Alfa Romeo Montreal
  • 1965 Alfa Romeo 33 Stradale
  • 1965 Alfa Romeo Giulia Sprint GTA Stradale
  • 1965 Alfa Romeo Giulia TZ2
  • 1950 Alfa Romeo 150
  • 1934 Alfa Romeo #12 Scuderia Ferrari P3
Alumi Craft
  • 2015 Alumi Craft Class 10 Race Car
  • 1977 AMC Pacer X
  • 1971 AMC Javelin AMX
  • 1970 AMC Rebel “The Machine”
  • 2016 Ariel Nomad
  • 2013 Ariel Atom 500 V8
Aston Martin
  • 2017 Aston Martin DB11
  • 2016 Aston Martin Vulcan
  • 2016 Aston Martin Vantage GT12
  • 2014 Aston Martin V12 Vantage S
  • 2012 Aston Martin Vanquish
  • 2012 Aston Martin V12 Zagato
  • 2010 Aston Martin One-77
  • 2008 Aston Martin DBS
  • 2006 Aston Martin #007 Aston Martin Racing DBR9
  • 1998 Aston Martin V8 Vantage V600
  • 1977 Aston Martin V8 Vantage
  • 1964 Aston Martin DB5
  • 1960 Aston Martin DB4GT Zagato
  • 1958 Aston Martin DBR1
  • 2016 Audi R8 V10 plus
  • 2015 Audi TTS Coupé
  • 2015 Audi S3 Sedan
  • 2015 Audi S1
  • 2015 Audi RS 6 Avant
  • 2014 Audi #2 Audi Team Joest R18 e-tron quattro
  • 2014 Audi #67 Rotek Racing S3 Saloon
  • 2014 Audi #45 Flying Lizard Motorsports R8 LMS Ultra
  • 2013 Audi R8 Coupé V10 plus 5.2 FSI quattro
  • 2013 Audi RS 7 Sportback
  • 2013 Audi RS 4 Avant
  • 2012 Audi #1 Audi Sport Team Joest R18 e-tron quattro
  • 2011 Audi RS 5 Coupé
  • 2011 Audi #2 Audi Sport Team Joest R15++ TDI
  • 2011 Audi RS 3 Sportback
  • 2010 Audi TT RS Coupé
  • 2009 Audi RS 6
  • 2009 Audi Q7 V12 TDI
  • 2006 Audi RS 4
  • 2004 Audi S4
  • 2003 Audi RS 6
  • 2001 Audi RS 4 Avant
  • 1995 Audi RS 2 Avant
  • 1989 Audi #4 Audi 90 quattro IMSA GTO
  • 1986 Audi #2 Audi Sport quattro S1
  • 1983 Audi Sport quattro
Auto Union
  • 1939 Auto Union Type D
  • 2014 BAC Mono
  • 2017 Bentley #17A LIQUI MOLY M-Sport Continental GT3
  • 2017 Bentley Continental Supersports
  • 2016 Bentley Bentayga
  • 2015 Bentley EXP 10 Speed 6 Concept
  • 2014 Bentley #7 M-Sport Bentley Continental GT3
  • 2013 Bentley Continental GT Speed
  • 2016 BMW M4 GTS
  • 2016 BMW M2 Coupé
  • 2015 BMW i8
  • 2015 BMW X6 M
  • 2014 BMW M4 Coupe
  • 2014 BMW #5 eBay Motors 125i M Sport
  • 2014 BMW #55 BMW Team RLL Z4 GTE
  • 2014 BMW #56 BMW Team RLL Z4 GTE
  • 2013 BMW M6 Coupe
  • 2012 BMW M5
  • 2011 BMW X5 M
  • 2011 BMW Z4 sDrive35is
  • 2011 BMW 1 Series M Coupe
  • 2010 BMW M6 Coupe
  • 2009 BMW M5
  • 2009 BMW #92 Rahal Letterman Racing M3 GT2
  • 2008 BMW M3
  • 2005 BMW M3
  • 2003 BMW M5
  • 2002 BMW Z3 M Coupe
  • 2000 BMW Z8
  • 2000 BMW 323ti Sport
  • 1999 BMW #15 BMW Motorsport V12 LMR
  • 1999 BMW #16 BMW Motorsport V12 LMR
  • 1997 BMW M3
  • 1995 BMW M5
  • 1995 BMW 850CSi
  • 1991 BMW M3
  • 1988 BMW M5
  • 1986 BMW M635CSi
  • 1981 BMW M1
  • 1979 BMW #6 BMW Motorsport M1 Procar
  • 1975 BMW #25 BMW Motorsport 3.0 CSL
  • 1973 BMW 2002 Turbo
  • 1959 BMW 507
  • 1957 BMW Isetta 300 Export
  • 2012 Bowler EXR S
  • 1967 Brabham BT24
  • 1992 Bugatti EB110 Super Sport
  • 2011 Bugatti Veyron Super Sport
  • 1987 Buick Regal GNX
  • 1970 Buick GSX
  • 2016 Cadillac ATS-V
  • 2016 Cadillac CTS-V Sedan
  • 2013 Cadillac XTS Limousine
  • 2012 Cadillac Escalade ESV
  • 2011 Cadillac CTS-V Coupe

 Cadillac ATS-V Test Drive

  • 2013 Caterham Superlight R500
  • 1966 Chaparral #66 Chaparral Cars 2E
  • 2017 Chevrolet Camaro ZL1
  • 2017 Chevrolet #2 Team Penske IndyCar
  • 2017 Chevrolet #24 Hendrick Motorsports Mountain Dew Super Sport
  • 2017 Chevrolet #24 Hendrick Motorsports NAPA Super Sport
  • 2017 Chevrolet #24 Hendrick Motorsports KBB Super Sport
  • 2017 Chevrolet #4 AJ Foyt Enterprises IndyCar
  • 2016 Chevrolet Camaro Super Sport
  • 2015 Chevrolet Corvette Z06
  • 2015 Chevrolet #10 Konica Minolta Corvette Daytona Prototype
  • 2014 Chevrolet #4 ROAL Motorsport RML Cruze TC1 WTCC
  • 2014 Chevrolet #3 Corvette Racing Corvette C7.R
  • 2014 Chevrolet Super Sport
  • 2012 Chevrolet Camaro ZL1
  • 2011 Chevrolet #4 Corvette Racing ZR1
  • 2010 Chevrolet #55 Level 5 Motorsports ORECA FLM09
  • 2010 Chevrolet #89 Intersport Racing Oreca FLM09
  • 2010 Chevrolet #99 Green Earth Team Gunnar Oreca FLM09
  • 2009 Chevrolet Corvette ZR1
  • 2002 Chevrolet Corvette Z06
  • 2002 Chevrolet Camaro 35th Anniversary Super Sport
  • 1995 Chevrolet Corvette ZR-1
  • 1990 Chevrolet Camaro IROC-Z
  • 1988 Chevrolet Monte Carlo Super Sport
  • 1979 Chevrolet Camaro Z28
  • 1972 Hoonigan Chevrolet “Napalm Nova” 
  • 1971 Chevrolet Vega GT
  • 1970 Chevrolet El Camino Super Sport 454
  • 1970 Chevrolet Corvette ZR-1
  • 1970 Chevrolet Chevelle Super Sport 454
  • 1970 Chevrolet Camaro Z28
  • 1969 Chevrolet Camaro Super Sport Coupe
  • 1969 Chevrolet Nova Super Sport 396
  • 1967 Chevrolet Corvette Stingray 427
  • 1967 Chevrolet Chevelle Super Sport 396
  • 1966 Chevrolet Nova Super Sport
  • 1964 Chevrolet Impala Super Sport 409
  • 1960 Chevrolet Corvette
  • 1957 Chevrolet Bel Air
  • 1955 Hoonigan Chevrolet Bel Air 
  • 1953 Chevrolet Corvette
  • 2012 Chrysler 300 SRT8
  • 1972 Chrysler VH Valiant Charger R/T E49
  • 1979 Datsun #33 Bob Sharp Racing 280ZX Turbo
  • 1970 Datsun 510
  • 1969 Datsun 2000 Roadster
  • 2016 Dodge Viper ACR
  • 2015 Dodge Challenger SRT Hellcat
  • 2014 Dodge #93 SRT Motorsports Viper GTS-R
  • 2013 Dodge Dart GT
  • 2012 Dodge Charger SRT8
  • 2012 Dodge Challenger SRT8 392
  • 2008 Dodge Viper SRT10 ACR
  • 2005 Dodge SRT-4 ACR
  • 1999 Dodge Viper GTS ACR
  • 1986 Dodge Shelby Omni GLHS
  • 1970 Dodge Challenger R/T
  • 1970 Dodge Coronet Super Bee
  • 1969 Dodge Charger R/T
  • 1969 Dodge Charger Daytona HEMI
  • 1968 Dodge Dart HEMI Super Stock
  • 1967 Dodge Coronet WO23
  • 2013 Donkervoort D8 GTO
  • 1998 Eagle Talon TSi Turbo
  • 1967 Eagle-Westlake T1G
  • 2015 Ferrari F12tdf
  • 2015 Ferrari 488 GTB
  • 2014 Ferrari FXX K
  • 2014 Ferrari California T
  • 2014 Ferrari #51 AF Corse 458 Italia GTE
  • 2014 Ferrari #62 Risi Competizione 458 Italia GTLM
  • 2013 Ferrari LaFerrari
  • 2013 Ferrari 458 Speciale
  • 2012 Ferrari F12berlinetta
  • 2011 Ferrari FF
  • 2011 Ferrari #62 Risi Competizione 458 Italia GTC
  • 2010 Ferrari 599XX
  • 2010 Ferrari 599 GTO
  • 2009 Ferrari 458 Italia
  • 2008 Ferrari California
  • 2007 Ferrari 430 Scuderia
  • 2004 Ferrari 612 Scaglietti
  • 2003 Ferrari 360 Challenge Stradale
  • 2002 Ferrari Enzo Ferrari
  • 2002 Ferrari 575M Maranello
  • 1998 Ferrari #30 MOMO Doran Racing F333 SP
  • 1998 Ferrari #12 Risi Competizione F333 SP
  • 1996 Ferrari F50 GT
  • 1995 Ferrari F50
  • 1994 Ferrari F355 Berlinetta
  • 1992 Ferrari 512 TR
  • 1990 Ferrari #1 Scuderia Ferrari 641
  • 1989 Ferrari F40 Competizione
  • 1987 Ferrari F40
  • 1984 Ferrari 288 GTO
  • 1982 Ferrari #72 N.A.R.T. 512 BB/LM
  • 1982 Ferrari #71 Ferrari France 512 BB/LM
  • 1976 Ferrari #1 Scuderia Ferrari 312T2
  • 1971 Ferrari #2 Ferrari Automobili 312 P
  • 1969 Ferrari Dino 246 GT
  • 1968 Ferrari 365 GTB/4
  • 1967 Ferrari #24 Ferrari Spa 330 P4
  • 1964 Ferrari F-158 F1
  • 1963 Ferrari 250LM
  • 1962 Ferrari 250 GTO
  • 1962 Ferrari 250 GT Berlinetta Lusso
  • 1957 Ferrari 250 Testa Rossa
  • 1957 Ferrari 250 California
  • 1953 Ferrari 500 Mondial
  • 1952 Ferrari 375
  • 1948 Ferrari 166MM Barchetta
  • 1980 Fiat 124 Sport Spider
  • 1980 Abarth Fiat 131
  • 1975 Fiat X1/9
  • 1969 Fiat Dino 2.4 Coupe
  • 1952 Fiat 8V Supersonic
  • 2017 Ford GT
  • 2017 Ford F-150 Raptor Race Truck
  • 2017 Ford #17 Shell V-Power Racing Team Falcon FG X
  • 2017 Ford F-150 Raptor
  • 2016 Ford Shelby GT350R
  • 2016 Ford #55 Supercheap Falcon FG X
  • 2016 Ford #66 Ford Racing GT Le Mans
  • 2016 Ford GYMKHANA 9 Focus RS RX
  • 2016 Ford #22 Team Penske Pennzoil Fusion
  • 2016 Ford #22 Team Penske Duralast GT Fusion
  • 2016 Ford #22 Team Penske Autotrader Fusion
  • 2015 Ford Mustang GT
  • 2015 Ford Falcon XR8
  • 2015 Ford Falcon GT F 351
  • 2015 Ford #02 Chip Ganassi Racing Riley Mk XXVI Daytona Prototype
  • 2015 Ford #17 Xbox Racing Ford Falcon FG X
  • 2015 Ford #5 Pepsi Max Crew PRA Falcon FG X
  • 2014 Ford FPV Limited Edition Pursuit Ute
  • 2014 Ford #11 Rockstar F-150 Trophy Truck
  • 2014 Ford Ranger T6 Rally Raid
  • 2014 Ford Fiesta ST
  • 2013 Ford Shelby GT500
  • 2013 Ford F-150 SVT Raptor Shelby
  • 2013 Ford Formula Ford EcoBoost 200
  • 2011 Ford Transit SuperSportVan
  • 2011 Ford F-150 SVT Raptor
  • 2010 Ford Crown Victoria Police Interceptor
  • 2009 Ford Focus RS
  • 2007 Ford Shelby GT500
  • 2005 Ford GT
  • 2003 Ford Focus RS
  • 2000 Ford SVT Cobra R
  • 1995 Ford SVT Cobra R
  • 1993 Ford SVT Cobra R
  • 1992 Ford Falcon GT
  • 1992 Ford Escort RS Cosworth
  • 1987 Ford Sierra Cosworth RS500
  • 1985 Ford RS200 Evolution
  • 1981 Ford #2 Zakspeed Racing Capri Turbo
  • 1981 Ford #55 Liqui Moly equipe Capri Turbo
  • 1981 Ford Fiesta XR2
  • 1978 Hoonigan Ford Escort RS1800 
  • 1978 Ford Mustang II King Cobra
  • 1977 Ford Escort RS1800
  • 1975 Ford Bronco
  • 1973 Ford XB Falcon GT
  • 1973 Ford Escort RS1600
  • 1973 Ford Capri RS3100
  • 1972 Ford Falcon XA GT-HO
  • 1971 Ford Mustang Mach 1
  • 1971 Ford Falcon XY GTHO Phase III
  • 1969 Ford Mustang Boss 302
  • 1967 Ford Falcon XR GT
  • 1966 Ford #2 GT40 Mk II Le Mans
  • 1965 Hoonigan Ford "Hoonicorn" Mustang 
  • 1965 Ford Mustang GT Coupe
  • 1964 Ford Fairline Thunderbolt
  • 1956 Ford F-100
  • 1946 Ford Super Deluxe Station Wagon
  • 1940 Ford De Luxe Coupe
  • 1932 Ford De Luxe Five-Window Coupe
Formula E
  • 2017 Formula E #11 ABT Schaeffler Audi Sport FE02
  • 2017 Formula E #28 MS Amlin Andretti ATEC-02
  • 2017 Formula E #33 Techeetah Z.E. 16
  • 2017 Formula E #47 Panasonic Jaguar Racing I-Type 1
  • 2017 Formula E #9 Renault e.Dams Z.E 16
  • 2015 Formula E #2 Virgin Racing VIR 01E
  • 2015 Formula E #21 Mahindra M2Electro
  • 2015 Formula E #23 Venturi 1
  • 2015 Formula E #6 Dragon Racing Spark SRT_01E
  • 2015 Formula E #99 NEXTEV TCR FE01
  • 1983 GMC Vandura G-1500
  • 2012 Hennessey Venom GT
  • 2017 Holden #22 Walkinshaw Performance VF Commodore
  • 2015 Holden #14 Freightliner Racing VF Commodore
  • 2015 Holden #22 Holden Racing Team VF Commodore
  • 2016 Holden #22 HRT Sharkbite VF Commodore
  • 2015 Holden #97 Tekno Autosports VF Commodore
  • 2014 HSV Limited Edition GEN-F GTS Maloo
  • 2014 HSV GEN-F GTS
  • 2011 HSV GTS
  • 2009 Holden HSV W427
  • 2003 Hoonigan Holden Commodore Ute •
  • 1996 HSV GTSR
  • 1988 Holden VL Commodore Group A SV
  • 1985 HDT VK Commodore Group A
  • 1977 Holden Torana A9X
  • 1974 Holden Sandman HQ panel van
  • 1973 Holden HQ Monaro GTS 350
  • 1951 Holden 50-2106 FX Ute
  • 2017 Honda #5 Schmidt Peterson Motorsports IndyCar
  • 2017 Honda #9 Chip Ganassi Racing IndyCar
  • 2016 Honda Civic Type R
  • 2014 Honda #2 Castrol Honda Civic WTCC
  • 2014 Honda #5 Zengo Motorsport Civic WTCC
  • 2014 Honda Civic Si
  • 2009 Honda S2000 CR
  • 2007 Honda Civic Type-R
  • 2005 Honda NSX-R
  • 2004 Honda Civic Type-R
  • 2000 Honda Prelude Type SH
  • 1997 Honda Civic Type R
  • 1994 Honda Prelude Si
  • 1992 Honda NSX-R
  • 1991 Honda CR-X SiR
  • 1986 Honda Civic Si
  • 1984 Honda Civic CRX Mugen
  • 1970 Honda S800
  • 1967 Honda RA300
  • 2006 Hummer H1 Alpha
  • 2013 Hyundai Veloster Turbo
  • 2015 Infiniti Q60 Concept
  • 2014 Infiniti Q50 Eau Rouge
  • 2012 Infiniti IPL G Coupe
  • 2003 Infiniti G35 Coupe
  • 1970 International Scout 800A
  • 2017 Jaguar F-PACE S
  • 2016 Jaguar F-TYPE Project 7
  • 2015 Jaguar XKR-S GT
  • 2015 Jaguar XFR-S
  • 2015 Jaguar XE-S
  • 2015 Jaguar F-TYPE R Coupe
  • 2014 Jaguar #14 Emil Frey GT3 Jaguar XK
  • 2012 Jaguar XKR-S
  • 1993 Jaguar XJ220
  • 1990 Jaguar XJ-S
  • 1988 Jaguar #1 Jaguar Racing XJR-9
  • 1988 Jaguar #60 Castrol Jaguar Racing XJR-9
  • 1961 Jaguar E-Type S1
  • 1959 Jaguar Mk II 3.8
  • 1956 Jaguar D-Type
  • 1954 Jaguar XK120 SE
  • 2016 Jeep Trailcat
  • 2014 Jeep Grand Cherokee SRT
  • 2012 Jeep Wrangler Rubicon
  • 2009 Jeep Grand Cherokee SRT8
  • 1991 Jeep Grand Wagoneer
  • 1976 Jeep CJ5 Renegade
  • 1945 Jeep Willys MB
  • 2011 Koenigsegg Agera
  • 2015 Koenigsegg One:1
  • 2016 Koenigsegg Regera
  • 2013 KTM X-Bow R
  • 2016 Lamborghini Centenario LP-770-4
  • 2016 Lamborghini Aventador LP-750-4
  • 2015 Lamborghini #63 Squadra Corse Huracan LP-620-2 Super Trofeo
  • 2014 Lamborghini Huracán LP 610-4
  • 2014 Lamborghini Urus
  • 2014 Lamborghini #14 GMG Racing LP-570-4 Super Trofeo
  • 2014 Lamborghini #18 DragonSpeed Gallardo LP 570-4 Super Trofeo
  • 2013 Lamborghini Veneno
  • 2012 Lamborghini Aventador LP700-4
  • 2011 Lamborghini Gallardo LP-570-4 Superleggera
  • 2011 Lamborghini Sesto Elemento
  • 2010 Lamborghini Murciélago LP 670-4 SV
  • 2008 Lamborghini Reventón
  • 1997 Lamborghini Diablo SV
  • 1988 Lamborghini Jalpa
  • 1988 Lamborghini Countach LP5000 QV
  • 1986 Lamborghini LM 002
  • 1967 Lamborghini Miura P400

  Lamborghini Centenario driving on the Dubai race

  • 1992 Lancia Delta HF Integrale EVO
  • 1986 Lancia Delta S4
  • 1985 Lancia Delta S4 Group B
  • 1982 Lancia 037 Stradale
  • 1980 Lancia #31 Lancia Corse Beta Montecarlo Turbo
  • 1975 Lancia Stratos HF Group 4
  • 1974 Lancia Stratos HF Stradale
  • 1968 Lancia Fulvia Coupé Rallye 1.6 HF
Land Rover
  • 2015 Land Rover Range Rover Sport SVR
  • 2012 Land Rover Range Rover Supercharged
  • 1997 Land Rover Defender 90
  • 1972 Land Rover Series III
Local Motors
  • 2014 Local Motors Rally Fighter
  • 1969 Lola #10 Simoniz Special T163
  • 1969 Lola #6 Penske Sunoco T70 MkIIIB
  • 2016 Lotus 3-Eleven
  • 2012 Lotus Exige S
  • 2011 Lotus Evora S
  • 2009 Lotus 2-Eleven
  • 2005 Lotus Elise 111S
  • 2002 Lotus Esprit V8
  • 2000 Lotus 340R
  • 1999 Lotus Elise Series 1 Sport 190
  • 1990 Vauxhall Lotus Carlton
  • 1976 Lotus #5 Team Lotus 77
  • 1971 Lotus Elan Sport
  • 1967 Lotus Type 49
  • 1966 Ford Lotus Cortina
  • 1956 Lotus Eleven
  • 2014 Maserati Ghibli S 4C
  • 2014 Maserati #35 M.Calamia Swiss Team MC Trofeo
  • 2010 Maserati GranTurismo S
  • 2004 Maserati MC12
  • 1997 Maserati Ghibli Cup
  • 1961 Maserati Tipo 61 Birdcage
  • 1957 Maserati 300 S
  • 1953 Maserati A6GCS/53 Pininfarina Berlinetta
  • 1939 Maserati 8CTF
  • 2016 Mazda MX-5
  • 2015 Mazda Formula Mazda
  • 2014 Mazda #70 SpeedSource Lola B12/80
  • 2013 Mazda MX-5 Cup
  • 2013 Mazda MX-5
  • 2011 Mazda RX-8 R3
  • 2010 Mazda #16 Mazda Racing B09/86
  • 2010 Mazda #16 Dyson Racing B09/86
  • 2010 Mazda MX-5 Super20
  • 2010 Mazda Mazdaspeed 3
  • 2005 Mazda Mazdaspeed MX-5
  • 1997 Mazda RX-7
  • 1994 Mazda MX-5 Miata
  • 1992 Hoonigan Mazda RX-7 Twerkstallion •
  • 1991 Mazda #18 Mazdaspeed 787B
  • 1991 Mazda #55 Mazda 787B
  • 1991 Mazda #62 Mazda Motorsport RX-7
  • 1990 Mazda Savanna RX-7
  • 1990 Mazda MX-5 Miata
  • 1985 Mazda RX-7 GSL-SE
  • 1973 Mazda RX-3
  • 1972 Mazda Cosmo 110S Series II
  • 2015 McLaren 650S Coupe
  • 2015 McLaren 570S Coupe
  • 2015 McLaren P1 GTR
  • 2014 McLaren #60 Bhaitech 12C GT3
  • 2013 McLaren P1
  • 2011 McLaren MP4-12C
  • 2011 McLaren #59 McLaren GT 12C GT3
  • 1997 McLaren F1 GT
  • 1993 McLaren F1
  • 1988 McLaren #12 Honda McLaren MP4/4
  • 1976 McLaren #11 Team McLaren M23
  • 1969 McLaren #4 McLaren Cars M8B
  • 1966 McLaren M2B
  • 2017 Mercedes-AMG GT-R
  • 2016 Mercedes-AMG C 63 S Coupé
  • 2015 Mercedes-AMG GT-S
  • 2017 Mercedes-Benz #33 Mac Tools Ciceley Motorsports A-Class (A45)
  • 2015 Mercedes-Benz #24 Tankpool24 Racing Truck
  • 2015 Mercedes-Benz #9 Erebus Motorsport E63 AMG V8 Supercar
  • 2014 Mercedes-Benz #84 HTP Motorsport SLS AMG GT3
  • 2013 Mercedes-Benz G 65 AMG
  • 2013 Mercedes-Benz E 63 AMG
  • 2013 Mercedes-Benz A 45 AMG
  • 2012 Mercedes-Benz SLK 55 AMG
  • 2012 Mercedes-Benz C 63 AMG Coupé Black Series
  • 2011 Mercedes-Benz #35 Black Falcon SLS AMG GT3
  • 2011 Mercedes-Benz SLS AMG
  • 2009 Mercedes-Benz SL 65 AMG Black Series
  • 2009 Mercedes-Benz ML 63 AMG
  • 2004 Mercedes-Benz C 32 AMG
  • 1998 Mercedes-Benz AMG CLK GTR
  • 1990 Mercedes-Benz 190E 2.5-16 Evolution II
  • 1989 Mercedes-Benz #63 Team Sauber-Mercedes C9
  • 1972 Mercedes-Benz 300 SEL 6.3
  • 1967 Mercedes-Benz 280 SL
  • 1955 Mercedes-Benz 300 SLR
  • 1954 Mercedes-Benz 300 SL Coupe
  • 1939 Mercedes-Benz W154
  • 1990 Mercury #15 Whistler Radar Cougar XR-7
  • 1970 Mercury Cougar Eliminator
  • 1949 Mercury Coupe
  • 1971 Meyers Manx
  • 2013 Mini X-RAID All4 Racing Countryman
  • 2012 Mini John Cooper Works GP
  • 2009 Mini John Cooper Works
  • 1965 Mini Cooper S
  • 2008 Mitsubishi Lancer Evolution X GSR
  • 2006 Mitsubishi Lancer Evolution IX MR
  • 2004 Mitsubishi Lancer Evolution VIII MR
  • 1999 Mitsubishi Lancer Evolution VI GSR
  • 1997 Mitsubishi GTO
  • 1995 Mitsubishi Eclipse GSX
  • 1992 Mitsubishi Galant VR-4
  • 1988 Mitsubishi Starion ESI-R
  • 2017 Nissan GT-R
  • 2017 Nissan #23 Nissan Motorsport Altima
  • 2016 Nissan Titan Warrior Concept
  • 2015 Nissan IDx NISMO
  • 2015 Nissan #1 NISMO MOTUL AUTECH GT-R
  • 2015 Nissan #23 GT-R LM NISMO
  • 2014 Nissan Juke Nismo RS
  • 2012 Nissan GT-R Black Edition (R35)
  • 2010 Nissan 370Z
  • 2003 Nissan Fairlady Z
  • 2002 Nissan Skyline GT-R V-Spec II
  • 2000 Nissan Silvia Spec-R
  • 1998 Nissan Silvia K’s Aero
  • 1998 Nissan R390
  • 1997 Nissan Skyline GT-R V-Spec
  • 1995 Nissan NISMO GT-R LM
  • 1994 Nissan #75 Cunningham Racing 300ZX
  • 1994 Nissan Silvia K’s
  • 1994 Nissan Fairlady Z Version S Twin Turbo
  • 1993 Nissan Skyline GT-R V-Spec
  • 1993 Nissan 240SX SE
  • 1992 Nissan Silvia CLUB K’s
  • 1991 Nissan #23 Nissan R91CP
  • 1987 Nissan Skyline GTS-R (R31)
  • 1973 Nissan Skyline H/T 2000GT-R
  • 1971 Nissan Skyline 2000GT-R
  • 1969 Nissan Fairlady Z 432
  • 1969 Nissan #21 Nissan Racing R382
  • 1966 Nissan Silvia
  • 2010 Noble M600
  • 1969 Oldsmobile Hurst/Olds 442
  • 1984 Opel Manta 400
  • 1979 Opel Kadett C GT/E
  • 1968 Opel GT
  • 2016 Pagani Huayra BC
  • 2012 Pagani Huayra
  • 2010 Pagani Zonda R
  • 2009 Pagani Zonda Cinque Roadster
  • 2011 Penhall Cholla
  • 2011 Peugeot #10 Team Matmut 908
  • 2011 Peugeot 308 GTI
  • 2009 Peugeot #9 Peugeot Sport Total 908
  • 1993 Peugeot #3 Peugeot Talbot Sport 905 EVO 1C
  • 1984 Peugeot 205 T16
  • 2000 Plymouth Prowler
  • 1971 Plymouth GTX 426 HEMI
  • 1971 Plymouth Cuda 426 HEMI
  • 1958 Plymouth Fury
  • 2016 RJ Anderson #37 Polaris RZR-Rockstar Energy Pro 2 Truck
  • 2015 Polaris RZR XP 1000 EPS
  • 2009 Pontiac Solstice GXP
  • 2009 Pontiac G8 GXP
  • 2002 Pontiac Firebird Trans Am Ram Air
  • 1987 Pontiac Firebird Trans Am GTA
  • 1977 Pontiac Firebird Trans Am
  • 1973 Pontiac Firebird Trans Am SD-455
  • 1969 Pontiac GTO Judge
  • 1969 Pontiac Firebird Trans Am
  • 1965 Pontiac GTO
  • 2018 Porsche 911 GT2 RS
  • 2017 Porsche #1 Porsche Team 919 Hybrid
  • 2016 Porsche Cayman GT4
  • 2016 Porsche GT3 RS
  • 2015 Porsche #19 Porsche Team 919 Hybrid
  • 2015 Porsche Macan Turbo
  • 2014 Porsche 918 Spyder
  • 2014 Porsche 911 Turbo S
  • 2012 Porsche Cayenne Turbo
  • 2012 Porsche 911 GT3 RS 4.0
  • 2012 Porsche 911 GT2 RS
  • 2011 Porsche #45 Flying Lizard 911 GT3-RSR
  • 2008 Porsche #7 Penske Racing RS Spyder Evo
  • 2004 Porsche 911 GT3 (996)
  • 2003 Porsche Carrera GT
  • 1998 Porsche 911 GT1 Strassenversion
  • 1995 Porsche 911 GT2
  • 1993 Porsche 928 GTS
  • 1991 Hoonigan Rauh-Welt Begriff Porsche 911 Turbo 
  • 1989 Porsche 944 Turbo
  • 1987 Porsche 959
  • 1987 Porsche #17 Porsche Dunlop 962C
  • 1987 Porsche #17 Porsche AG 962C
  • 1982 Porsche 911 Turbo 3.3
  • 1973 Porsche 911 Carrera RS
  • 1970 Porsche 914/6
  • 1960 Porsche 718 RS 60
  • 1957 Porsche 356A Speedster
  • 1955 Porsche 550A Spyder

 Porsche Spyder in the Forza 7 Passing Challenge

  • 2016 Radical RXC Turbo
  • 2011 Radical SR8 RX
  • 2013 RAM Runner
  • 2017 Renault R.S.17
  • 2013 Renault Clio RS 200
  • 2010 Renault Megane RS 250
  • 2010 Renault Clio RS
  • 2003 Renault Sport Clio V6
  • 1993 Renault Clio Williams
  • 1990 Renault Alpine GTA Le Mans
  • 1980 Renault 5 Turbo
  • 1973 Renault Alpine A110 1600s
  • 2016 Rolls-Royce Dawn
  • 2014 Rolls-Royce Wraith
  • 2004 Saleen S7
  • 1965 Shelby Cobra Daytona Coupe
  • 1965 Shelby Cobra 427 S/C
  • 2016 Spania GTA GTA Spano
  • 2013 SRT #91 SRT Motorsport GTS-R
  • 2013 SRT Viper GTS
  • 2016 SUBARU #199 WRX STI VT15r Rally Car
  • 2016 SUBARU #75 WRX STI VT15r Rally Car
  • 2015 Subaru WRX STI
  • 2013 Subaru BRZ
  • 2011 Subaru WRX STI
  • 2008 Subaru Impreza WRX STi
  • 2005 Subaru Legacy B4 2.0 GT
  • 2005 Subaru Impreza WRX STI
  • 2004 Subaru Impreza WRX STi
  • 1998 Subaru Impreza 22B STi
  • 1996 Subaru SVX
  • 1990 Subaru Legacy RS
  • 1980 Subaru BRAT GL
  • 2017 Tamo Racemo
  • 2016 Toyota #18 Joe Gibbs Racing M&Ms Camry
  • 2016 Toyota #18 Joe Gibbs Racing Snickers Camry
  • 2016 Toyota #18 Joe Gibbs Racing Skittles Camry
  • 2007 Toyota Hilux Arctic Trucks AT38
  • 1993 Toyota #1 T100 Baja Truck
  • 1992 Toyota #99 All American Racers Toyota Eagle Mk III
  • 2005 Sagaris
  • 2015 Ultima Evolution Coupe 1020
  • 2016 Vauxhall Corsa VXR
  • 2012 Vauxhall Astra VXR
  • 2009 Vauxhall Corsa VXR
  • 2006 Vauxhall Astra VXR
  • 2014 Volkswagen Beetle GRC
  • 2014 Volkswagen Golf R
  • 2011 Volkswagen Scirocco R
  • 2010 Volkswagen Golf R
  • 2008 Volkswagen Touareg R50
  • 2003 Volkswagen Golf R32
  • 1998 Volkswagen GTI VR6 Mk3
  • 1995 Volkswagen Corrado VR6
  • 1992 Volkswagen Golf Gti 16v Mk2
  • 1988 Volkswagen Scirocco 16v
  • 1984 Volkswagen Rabbit GTI
  • 1981 Volkswagen Scirocco S
  • 1970 Volkswagen #1107 Desert Dingo Racing Stock Bug
  • 1967 Volkswagen Karmann Ghia
  • 1963 Volkswagen Type 2 De Luxe
  • 1963 Volkswagen Beetle
  • 2015 Volvo V60 Polestar
  • 2015 Volvo S60 Polestar
  • 2014 Volvo #1 Volvo Polestar Racing S60 STCC
  • 2014 Volvo #13 Volvo Polestar Racing S60 STCC
  • 1997 Volvo 850 R
  • 1983 Volvo 242 Turbo Evolution
  • 1972 Volvo 1800E
  • 1967 Volvo 123GT
W Motors
  • 2016 W Motors Lykan HyperSport
  • 2016 Zenvo TS1

What Forza Motorsport 7 car are you most looking forward to driving? Let us know in the comments, and be sure to leave us a note if we missed any of the launch day cars!

How to Unlock Supply Drops in Fortnite's Battle Royale Mode (Updated),h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/u/n/t/untitled-6337d.jpg ytvvu/how-to-unlock-supply-drops-in-fortnites-battle-royale-mode-updated Tue, 03 Oct 2017 11:32:03 -0400 Sergey_3847

The latest patch for Fortnite has brought some significant changes to the gameplay, such as adjustments to assault rifles, increased ammo stack sizes, supply drops, and new weapons that will only appear in those drops and nowhere else.

UPDATE (10/4/2017)

Due to bugs in the supply drops system for Fortnite's Battle Royale mode, the developers have temporarily disabled the option. It should be back soon some time later this week.

Here are the messages on the developers' official Twitter:

The supply drops happen randomly and rarely, so don't expect it to happen every match. But first, you need to unlock the supply drops through the skill tree -- and if you don't know how to do it, then read our step-by-step guide below.

How to Get Supply Drops in Fortnite

Follow the red line

Step 1: Unlock Skill Tree Tier 1

In order to unlock a skill tree, you need to purchase it with a certain number of skill points that can be obtained from rewards. You get the rewards after completing missions and quests, leveling up your commander, and breaking Llamas.

This first Skill Tree includes 74 skill nodes, but you don't need to unlock them all in order to get to supply drops.

Step 2: Unlock the Outlander Branch

All you need is to go through the initial ten nodes until you reach the Outlander perks branch (the second from the bottom). The list of the first ten nodes includes:

  1. Constructor Leadership: Allows Constructors to join you hero squads.
  2. Upgrade Pickaxe: Do more damage to objects when hitting them with pickaxe
  3. Unlock Survivor Squads: Fire Team Alpha nd EMT Squad
  4. Unlock Research: Tier 1
  5. Fortitude: Improves fortitude
  6. Offense: Improves offense
  7. Resistance: Improves resistance
  8. Tech: Improves tech
  9. Unlock Recycling and Collection Book: Allows resycling and retirement of schematics, survivors, defenders, and heroes of up to uncommon rarity.
  10. Defender Slot: Unlocks the Rifleman slot in the Homebase Storm Shield.
Step 3: Unlock Supply Drops

After you've unlocked the first ten skills, you will come to the last skill before venturing into the Outlander's branch:

  • Land Expedition Vehicle: Heroes can be sent from your homebase for several hours, returning with the resources they have gathered.

After that go down the branch, and finally, you will be able to unlock the Supply Drop gadget. It has the cooldown of 330 seconds, and it drops 60 wood, 60 stone, and 60 metal.

When you see a crate attached to a balloon dropping from the sky, shoot the balloon immediately, so it lands faster. This will work in your favor, especially if you're closer to it than other players, so you can get all the good loot first.


That is all you need to know in order to unlock the Supply Drops, and for other Fortnite guides follow the links below:

FIFA 18 Squad Battle Rewards: Rank Up and Earn Mega Packs!,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/s/q/u/squad-battles-rewards-6f9aa.jpg cjt9x/fifa-18-squad-battle-rewards-rank-up-and-earn-mega-packs Tue, 03 Oct 2017 09:58:38 -0400 Joseph Rowe

One of the most interesting features of FIFA 18's Football Ultimate Team is the Squad Battle. This mode allows you to use your FUT squad to go against AI-controlled squads that were picked from those of existing players. Your squad competes against theirs to earn points in order to rank up and earn weekly rewards. Every day, four new squads appear for you to challenge. Do you have what it takes to hit reach the top and be rank 1?

Every week, the ranking resets and players will receive their rewards from the previous week's Squad Battles. Each rank comes with its own set of rewards. The higher your rank, the more rewards you get in FIFA 18 squad battles. Points for ranking are earned by completing and winning matches, playing well, scoring goals, and setting the match to a higher difficulty. 

Below, I've broken down all the ranks you can hit in these Squad Battles and what rewards come with each tier. 

FIFA 18 Squad Battle Rewards

Bronze 3 (100% of All Players Reach This Rank)
  • 1 Premium Loan Player Reward Pack
  • 1 Kit - FURSAN Nations
Bronze 2 (93%)
  • 1 Ultimate Loan Player Reward Pack
  • 1 KIT - Fursan Nations
Bronze 1 (86%)
  • 1 Gold Pack
  • 1 Silver Pack
  • 1,150 Coins
  • 1 KIT - FURSAN Nations
Silver 3 (79%)
  • 2 Gold Packs
  • 2,000 Coins
  • 1 KIT - FURSAN Nations
Silver 2 (64%)
  • 1 Premium Gold Pack
  • 2 Gold Packs
  • 4,850 Coins
  • 1 KIT - FURSAN Nations
Silver 1 (51%)
  • 2 Premium Gold Packs
  • 1 Gold Pack
  • 10,900 Coins
  • 1 KIT - FURSAN Nations
Gold 3 (39%)
  • 2 Jumbo Preimum Gold Packs
  • 12,000 Coins
  • 1 KIT - FURSAN Nations
Gold 2 (27%)
  • 1 Premium Gold Players Pack
  • 1 Jumbo Premium Gold Pack
  • 13,000 Coins
  • 1 KIT - FURSAN Nations
Gold 1 (15%)
  • 1 Premium Gold Players Pack
  • 2 Jumbo Premium Gold Packs
  • 12,400 Coins
  • 1 KIT - FURSAN Nations
Elite 3 (9%)
  • 1 Rare Gold Pack
  • 1 Premium Gold Players Pack
  • 1 Jumbo Premium Gold Pack
  • 20,800 Coins
  • 1 KIT - FURSAN Nations
Elite 2 (4%)
  • 2 Mega Packs
  • 25,200 Coins
  • 1 KIT - FURSAN Nations
Elite 1 (1%)
  • 2 Mega Packs
  • 39,800 Coins
  • 1 KIT - FURSAN Nations
Rank 51-100
  • 1 Rare Players Pack
  • 2 Mega Packs
  • 65,000 Coins
  • 1 KIT - FURSAN Nations
Rank 21-50
  • 1 Jumbo Rare Players Pack
  • 2 Mega Packs
  • 65,000 Coins
  • 1 KIT - FURSAN Nations
Rank 11-20
  • 1 Jumbo Rare Players Pack
  • 2 Rare Players Packs
  • 75,000 Coins
  • 1 KIT - FURSAN Nations
Rank 2-10
  • 1 Ultimate Pack
  • 2 Rare Players Packs
  • 87,500 Coins
  • 1 KIT - FURSAN Nations
Rank 1
  • 2 Ultimate Packs
  • 2 Rare Mega Packs
  • 100,000 Coins
  • 1 KIT - FURSAN Nations

Players who wish to earn the best FIFA 18 squad battle rewards will need to pull out their A game every single day to ensure they maintain their lead because the leader boards refresh constantly. Just because you're rank 1  today doesn't mean you will be if someone earns more points than you by tomorrow.


Was our FIFA 18 squad battle rewards guide helpful? What's the highest rank you've earned so far? Let us know in the comments! And if you're itching for more FIFA 18 content, check out my review, tips and tricks guide, and trophy guide

Divinity Original Sin 2 Guide: How to Douse the Historian,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/d/o/s/dos-menu-55780.jpg k2njz/divinity-original-sin-2-guide-how-to-douse-the-historian Mon, 02 Oct 2017 17:32:37 -0400 Ty Arthur

Every last nook and cranny of Larian's fantasy RPG extravaganza seems to packed with secrets, from stray cats that can join as party members to unexpected items hidden just out of sight.

Of course there's also puzzles galore in Divinity Original Sin 2, with most revolving around the game's many elemental battlefield effects like blood, acid, and cursing. One such puzzle involves breaking a curse that sees the Historian wreathed in hellfire that just won't go out, no matter how much water you use.

Like most of Divinity: Original Sin 2, there are several different ways to approach this problem. Below we cover three of the easiest methods for dousing the Historian's necrofire flames. 

Meeting the flaming Historian

To overcome his fiery curse, the Historian needs to be both blessed and in a pool of blood simultaneously. Some people have tried casting a spell like Rain first, but this doesn't seem to actually help or be required. Even tipping over a barrel of water doesn't cut it.

The point is to use the Sourcery skill Bless on the Historian (which will cause flowers to appear at his feet) while there's either a blood puddle underneath or blood raining from up above.

Rain Of Blood Method

The Necromancy skill Rain Of Blood is a simple way to send a deluge of blood over the area and fully douse the hellfire. Afterwards, use the Bless skill (which costs Source points, so make sure you have some) on the bloody ground where the Historian is standing. In some cases it takes a few turns for the event to actually trigger when you cast Rain Of Blood, so be patient.

Rain Of Blood can usually be acquired from any of the Necromancy skill book vendors, or you can craft it yourself by combining a level 1 Necromancy skill book with a level 1 Hydrosophist skill book in the crafting screen.

Bleeding Party Member Method

If you don't have the Rain Of Blood skill, however, you can use another method like teleporting one of your own characters up on the dais. You can do this with the teleport gloves found on the Fort Joy beach, or by using a skill like Tactical Retreat that lets you move instanteously.

Once the character is up there near the Historian, hit your own party member with an arrow to make them bleed (keep in mind you have to get through physical armour first) and cover the dais in a blood surface ready to be blessed. Sometimes friendly fire works in your favor!

Flesh Sacrifice Method

If you have an elf character like Sebille, you can instead use the Flesh Sacrifice ability to cause bleeding, and then just teleport the Historian into the blood (or teleport Sebille onto the dais as in the previous method).

After that's out of the way, use Bless on the bloody surface to douse the fire. This one's easy to do if you don't have a Necromancer and don't want to directly cause vitality harm to your own party member.

 Using Flesh Sacrifice to create a bloody surface

After being released from the flames a set of dialogue options appear, but there's not much to do as the Historian will leave through a portal. It actually seems like you actually get more experience and go through less trouble to just kill the Historian and skip dousing him altogether.

Have you found any other ways to put out the Historian's relentless flames? Let us know in the comments section! And if you're looking for more Divinity: Original Sin 2 guides, be sure to check out our other tips and tricks for every aspect of this turn-based fantasy experience:

Total War: Warhammer 2 Dark Elves Faction Guide and Campaign Walkthrough,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/c/o/v/cov1-8356b.jpg 6tq34/total-war-warhammer-2-dark-elves-faction-guide-and-campaign-walkthrough Mon, 02 Oct 2017 14:49:38 -0400 Ty Arthur

Ready to dive into the complex tactical combat and cutthroat fantasy diplomacy in Total War: Warhammer 2? There are four starting Warhammer factions to pick from, from dinosaur-riding lizards to hordes of subterranean rats -- and each plays incredibly different from the others.

As the Dark Elves, your goal is to obtain the Scrolls of Hekarti to take control of the Vortex through a series of magic rituals. Along the way you'll be raiding settlements, taking slaves, and battling off armies of rat men or weakling High Elves.

Below we cover everything you need to know to get up and running with an unstoppable force of Dark Elves and slaughter your way through the Warhammer 2 campaign!

Looking for a guide how to beat the Total War: Warhammer 2 as dino-taming lizards instead? Check out our guide to the Lizardmen campaign for more information.

The Best Dark Elf Lord for Your Total War: Warhammer 2 Campaign

You've got two starting options for your Legendary Lord: a melee/spell-caster hybrid, or his Hydra-riding mother. The main differences between them revolves around experience points and loyalty.

Dark Elves want to be raiding and engaged in battle whenever possible. If you sit around defending an area instead of going to war, your loyalty will take a big hit -- and that can be disastrous if you aren't prepared.

Malekith automatically gifts out experience to other Lords, which is a major double-edged sword. If a Lord is higher level than Malekith, or if a Lord gets wounded and flees a battle, expect to take a big loyalty hit. While Malekith is technically the easier of the two, you have to keep him in battle constantly or the other Lords (and their armies) will rebel against you. His Bladewind combat ability is extremely useful, however.

Morathi, Malekith's mother, actually gives a bonus to loyalty for other Lords in the area. While technically the more difficult of the two, she can be a better option for the mid game when you need your armies to do what you want them to do. Just keep in mind that she doesn't include a tutorial mission, so you better know what you are doing ahead of time if you go with Morathi.

 Picking Your Dark Elf Legendary Lord

Dark Elf Black Arks

While the Lizardmen have their powerful Geomantic Web to offer bonuses across their empire, the Dark Elves instead get the mobile Black Arks, which support armies and have building slots like any other settlement.

That's not the big draw, though. Black Arks offer bombardments to aid battles close to the Ark. Make sure to position these Arks near where you are about to be engaged in warfare!

Essentially, you've got extra long range spells to rain down death on concentrations of enemy units without actually having to bring in any spell-casting characters, so don't overlook this massive advantage.

 Dropping concentrated fire bombardments

Warhammer II Dark Elf Campaign Strategy

The Dark Elves occupy the frozen north at the campaign's start, with the Skaven being your primary problem throughout the early campaign. To begin, focus on taking Naggarond and then recruit another Lord so you have two armies flush with Darkshards and Dreadspears.

Afterwards, your mid-range goal here is to forge alliances to the south and east to keep people from attacking you while you work towards taking Ghrond. This task should be done via siege rather than a straight fight, as it's very difficult to win that battle in a direct assault. You want the army to come out and fight you instead.

Don't forget that Dark Elves have a leg up over the competition on the technology tree, which can be advanced faster without having to build as many precursor buildings first as other factions.

As mentioned above, you are going to deal with serious loyalty issues throughout the Dark Elves campaign. Completing quests and faction-wide battle wins increase overall loyalty, but losing quests and faction-wide battle losses decreases loyalty. You can help pump this up further by stealing tech, which frequently results in captured slaves as well. Giving these slaves to your Lords will keep loyalty high. 

Don't forget that your Legendary Lord -- no matter which one you picked -- can utilize a Rite to boost loyalty as well. Finally, the Khanite assassin eventually gets the Stalker trait that can also boost loyalty. 

Dark Elves have a third resource to juggle: slaves! You can use this resource to balance out other aspects of the economy in ways the other factions can't use. More slaves means a province produces more gold, which is good -- but get too many slaves and public order starts to drop when the servants outnumbers the actual populace.

If you have a province with high public order but you need gold, upgrade your slave capacity buildings and then start raiding. While order will go down, you will be flush with currency. Likewise, choosing to the option to take slaves after battle is frequently a better idea than killing the survivors for extra experience, since Dark Elves have a high turnover rate and you will be replenishing units often.


Warhammer II Dark Elf Combat Strategy

Darkshard missile infantry are key here, and you can basically formulate your whole battle strategy around them. Later on, Shades can become indispensable and in some situations, even better than Darkshards.

Whether utilizing Darkshards or Shades, you need to master forming them up properly to avoid the problems of friendly fire or missing your enemies entirely. Archers have problems hitting if they are spread out too thin. In general, it's a good idea not to keep them in a long, shallow line, but rather to have two close ranks lined up one behind the other.

You want several groups positioned next to each other that can concentrate fire and reposition quickly to hit moving targets. Make sure to set control groups of your rows of Darkshards so they can quickly rain down fire and you aren't wasting time clicking and dragging to reposition your archers.

In this formation, with several moderately deep ranks that aren't long left to right and are concentrated together, your primary concern should be long range artillery fire from the enemy. If the opposing army has artillery, it needs to be ambushed and taken out early in a battle.

Dark Riders are your initial mounted units, and frankly they aren't that great -- but you should use them for side and back attacks when you are stuck with them. Upgrade these guys as soon as you can to their crossbow version for better tactical options.

What melee unit you want to focus on is up to you, but essentially their goal here is to protect the Darkshards and hold off the larger melee or hero units while you can kill at range. Coupled with abilities like Bladewind and bombardments from your Dark Arks, you can annihilate most enemies.

 Have fun mowing down enemies with your archers!

That's just one of several possible strategies for playing the Dark Elves, but so far for us it's been a winning one. Do you have any other hints and tips for playing these diabolical hit and run combatants?

Let us know your favorite Warhammer 2 Dark Elf strategy in the comments below, and be sure to check out our other Total War: Warhammer 2 guides if you feel like playing a different race or want more help with the game in general.

Road Redemption Guide: Best Perks to Buy in the Store,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/m/a/x/maxresdefault-6ce07.jpg tzgck/road-redemption-guide-best-perks-to-buy-in-the-store Mon, 02 Oct 2017 11:27:21 -0400 Sergey_3847

Road Redemption sets you on the road with just a few items attached to your rider, so it's very important to spend your hard-earned cash on some really useful perks at the in-game store.

Typically, you will have to choose and spend your money on one perk, but there are a few that may come in really handy in certain situations. If you want to know which perks are worthy to purchase, then follow our instructions below.

The Best Perks in Road Redemption

There are two types of perks in Road Redemption: perks that can be bought several times per game, and powerful ones that can be bought only once.

Most Useful Perks (Up to 5 Purchases):
  • Experience Gain: Increases all of your experience gain by 15%
  • Cash Gain: Increases all of your cash gain by 10%
  • Critical Damage: Increases melee damage and critical hit chance by 20%
  • Medical Toolkit: Increases health gain for each kill by 20%.
  • Upgrade Automatic Weapon/Shotgun: If you've unlocked firearms, then this type of perk is a must-have.

Buy as many of these perks as you can, because they'll be the most useful during any racing match. Other perks, such as Durability and Nitro, are optional -- so invest in them only when you have extra cash.

Powerful-But-Dangerous Perks:
  • Razor Blade: Increases your attack damage by 125%, but in the process your rider receives damage. So use this only on bosses or other opponents that are hard to eliminate. If you have no Health Gain perk, then do not even consider Razor Blade, it'll kill you sooner than your enemies.
  • Midas Vest: Increases all of your experience and cash gain by 150%, which is huge -- but again, your rider becomes more vulnerable to damage.
  • This Time's the Charm: Decreases your life total by 60% in exchange for extra three lives. This perk is only useful if you already have a huge health pool. Otherwise, don't bother buying it -- especially if you've already purchased Midas Vest.
  • Mushrooms: A resurrection perk that brings you back to life with full HP restored.


That is all for the best perks in Road Redemption. But if you are a completely new player, and you have no idea where to start, then check out the guide below:

Road Redemption Beginner Tips and Tricks,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/r/o/a/road-redemption-download-5660a.jpg fwsuq/road-redemption-beginner-tips-and-tricks Mon, 02 Oct 2017 11:16:36 -0400 Sergey_3847

Road Redemption is the spiritual successor of a once extremely popular arcade-style racing combat game called Road Rash. There are some minor differences in the presentation of these two games, but the core gameplay remains the same.

If you've never played Road Rash before, don't worry! We've got you covered with the most essential tips you need to consider when you sit down to play Road Redemption for the first time.

Choose the Best Bike and Rider for Your Playstyle

Currently, there are 9 bikes and 17 riders available in Road Redemption. Six of these bikes are locked for now, and only one rider is open in the beginning. But as you progress through the game and earn your XP points, you will unlock more of them.

Handling a bike is crucial for your campaign progress, so picking the right bike will guarantee you a spot in the top 3 at the finish -- which is the game's requirement for further progression.

In the beginning you will have access to three bikes -- so try each of them, and find out which one you can ride the best:

  • Hundo CBD: Has a solid acceleration and steering, but it lacks in the Nitro department -- which is important in case you get sidetracked and need to quickly get back on the highway to reach your opponents.
  • BMG R695: The weakest bike on this list. Although it is very similar to Hundo, it has problematic acceleration.
  • Hardley Davidson: The fastest of all three initial bikes. But if you can't handle high speed, then make Hundo your first choice.

Stick to the Road and Hit Your Opponents

When you set out on your journey through the first map, you will be placed against other ten riders that will not tolerate a competitor. So as soon as you get closer to your first opponents, use your LMB and RMB to hit them, or else they'll hit you first and immediately send you off the highway. You can also deflect their hits by pressing Shift.

At the same time, you need to pay close attention to all the curves and obstacles on the road, such as poles, fences, roadsigns and civilian cars. One miss and you're gone!

On your way you will see many bridges, but don't try to cheat the system and ride underneath them -- the game will throw you out of the competition, and you will lose your position.

If you find yourself back in the race, use the double-W combo to activate Nitro that will accelerate you significantly -- but its capacity is limited, so use it sparingly.

Learn the Skill Tree and Invest XP Wisely

After each racing match you'll be rewarded with a certain amount of XP points depending on your performance in the match. You can then invest those points into the permanent upgrades that can significantly boost your gameplay.

There are 36 upgardes in total that are divided into four main branches. Investing in each branch will give you the following benefits:

  • Health: Increases your health pool
  • Nitro: Gives you a bigger chance of unlocking new bikes
  • Damage: Unlocks new types of weapons
  • Find: Lets you start your game from a higher level

Later in the game, when you have enough XP points, you can reach the maximum potential of your skills and gain top tier skills, such as:

  • +50% Maximum Health
  • Gain 35% Nitro after each mission
  • Start with C4 explosives
  • Cash Find +20%

Practice, practice, practice!

Road Redemption has a really high difficulty cap, so don't expect to take first place or hit all the targets from your first attempt. It may take you as many as a dozen tries before you will learn the tracks and will be able to identify all the dangerous spots.

Learn to switch your weapons on the fly, since some of your opponents will carry shields, which can be broken only by using swords. So arrange your weapons with hotkeys in such a way that you could smash to smithereens any other rider that is blocking your way.

That is all you need to know to be able to start playing this great game, and remember that constant practice is the only real way to master Road Redemption.


That's all you need to know when you're first starting out. But if you're having trouble deciding which perks to buy from an in-game store, then check out the following guide:

Beginners Tips for Stormbound: Kingdom Wars,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/s/t/o/stormbound-62e89.png yr19x/beginners-tips-for-stormbound-kingdom-wars Mon, 02 Oct 2017 10:56:44 -0400 ESpalding

Stormbound: Kingdom Wars is a new mobile game from Dutch developers Paladin Studios, and it is the latest in a long line of successful mobile games from the studio. It is a collectible card game that has some unique mechanics to set itself apart from the rest of the mobile CCGs out there.

The idea of the game is to move your forces across a small 4x4 board towards your opponent's base. There is no difficult to understand combat mechanics. Basically, if you have more soldiers on a square in front of or next to an opponent, you will destroy them. Some cards will spawn more soldiers, while some are instant attacks that will damage an opponent's forces, buildings, or base. Compared to other CCGs out there, Stormbound: Kingdom Wars is easy to understand and has a no-fuss style about it.

As there are a few new things about this game, we've put together this little beginners guide to Stormbound: Kingdom Wars to help you get started and make sure that you keep winning.

Hold Your Line

The way to get ahead in Stormbound: Kingdom Wars is to always advance and hold your line. Similarly, you need to make sure that your opponent's line does not move, or that it stays far away from your base.

Every turn, your troops will advance. Each time you do, your line will move forward. This line dictates where you can place new soldiers, so you want to make sure that your line is as forward as possible. Obviously, your opponent can destroy your frontline troops -- which could move your line back to soldiers further back in the field.

Using buildings to hold the line

You want to make sure that there are buildings in your deck. They obviously can't move, but can be a real bonus to making sure your frontline stays protected. Each building will have a certain number of hit points -- and when opponent soldiers attack it, they will destroy any unit that comes under those hit points. Some buildings also spawn new soldiers every turn. Placing a building right on your front line will buy you more time to get reinforcements in the field.

Keep on Top of your Deck

When you start playing, you will come to realize that there are different themed decks you will collect along the way. The deck you start with is made up entirely of neutral cards that can be used in any other deck you wish to create. Once you start earning gold coins and getting card books, you will get more and more themed cards.

Each deck consists of 12 cards. A good deck-building plan to follow would be to have only one or two high-cost cards and three or four 2-3 cost cards in your deck. This means that you are likely to be able to play two cards at once the first round, meaning that you can get the upper hand quickly. You also want to make sure you have one or two instant damage cards and/or buildings.

Even though the deck has a relatively small amount of cards in it, you keep drawing cards no matter how many you have already used. Because you can only have 4 cards in your hand at once, there's a feasible chance you can use them all in one go when you get to the point of having 11 mana!

Safety in Numbers

One way to own the battlefield is to swamp your opponent in troops. There are ample cards that grant extra troops, and these are "must have" cards in any deck. Such cards include Dreadfauns from the Swarm of the East (which spawn more troops), or Emerald Towers from the neutral cards (which reinforces troops that are placed in front of it). The more troops you have out, the better chance you have of moving your line forward and resisting your opponents attacks. 

Upgrade your Cards

If you like a certain card and don't want to swap it out of your deck for a stronger card, you can always upgrade the card. To do this, you need to have duplicates of said card. If you don't, then there is the possibility of upgrading cards using the green triangular fusion stones and red rubies.

Take heed of these few tips and soon you'll be winning duel after duel in Stormbound: Kingdom Wars. Make sure you check back with us for new developments in-game and more guides in the future!

Pokemon GO Guide: How Super Incubators Work,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/p/o/k/pokemon-header-40e97.jpg d42b2/pokemon-go-guide-how-super-incubators-work Mon, 02 Oct 2017 10:41:36 -0400 Joshua Broadwell

Pokemon GO is all about getting players out of the house and maybe even exercising -- and Pokemon Eggs are designed to help that exercise process along. Like their mainline counterparts, the eggs in Pokemon GO have different requirements for how far you need to walk in order to hatch.

That's all well and good. But sometimes, it just isn't viable to walk 10km to get that rare Pokemon. Incubators made the process a bit easier, but with the advent of the Equinox Event, there's a Super Incubator to help speed the process up even further.

How to Get the Super Incubator

For now, the only way to get a Super Incubator was through purchasing an Equinox Event Box -- so if you're reading this, hopefully you picked at least one of those boxes up.

To use your Super Incubator, you'll need those little eggs you get randomly from visiting Pokestops. The type of egg you get is completely random, though some speculate that your trainer level influences the rarity of the Pokemon inside.

With a distance multiplier rate of 0.6666667, the Super Incubator hastens your hatching time by 1.5.

To give you a better idea of how that translates into practical terms, your walking distance for a 2km egg goes down to 0.8285 miles, the 5km egg gets cut to 2.0712 miles, and the 10km, rare egg drops down to 4.1424 miles. And yes, it does have three uses like a regular Incubator -- despite the initial confusion. Just make sure not to walk faster than 10 mph, or the game thinks you're cheating.

What Pokemon Will Each Egg Hatch?

With all this in mind, you may be wondering why you should bother hatching eggs to begin with. Eggs give you a better chance of catching a Pokemon that might not be available in your area, or that's simply rare to find at all. Here's a short list of these eggs by distance, the Pokemon they hatch, and the rarity of each hatch.

2km Eggs

These might seem like your basic run-of-the-mill eggs, but there are still some classic favorite Pokemon to be found. There are also fewer categories of rarity.

  • Common Pokemon
    • Spinarak
    • Krabby
    • Geodude
  • Uncommon Pokemon
    • Magikarp
    • Abra
    • Slowpoke
    • Slugma
    • Igglybuff
  • Ultra-Rare Pokemon
    • Misdreavus
5km Eggs

The 5km Eggs bring in more variety, both in terms of Pokemon and their overall rarity.

  • Common Pokemon
    • Cubone
    • Chinchou
    • Eevee
    • Poliwag
    • Rhyhorn
  • Uncommon Pokemon
    • Totodile
    • Cyndaquil
    • Chikorita
    • Mantine
    • Houndour
    • Natu
    • Gligar
  • Rare Pokemon
    • Onix
    • Seel
    • Tangela
  • Ultra-Rare Pokemon
    • Grimer
    • Koffing
    • Quilfish
    • Sneasel
  • Hyper-Rare Pokemon
    • Dunsparce
    • Shuckle
    • Wobbuffet
    • Girafarig
10km Eggs

10 km Eggs are the rarest of the bunch, and their yields include some pretty powerful Pokemon too.

  • Uncommon Pokemon
    • Dratini
    • Larvitar
  • Rare Pokemon
    • Sudowoodo
    • Mareep
    • Chansey
  • Ultra-Rare Pokemon
    • Miltank
    • Snorlax
    • Lapras
    • Skarmory

Enjoy the Outdoors!

With so many Pokemon to obtain, and with the Super Incubators making it easier than ever before to hatch them, it's the perfect reason to head outside and take a walk in the park. Or get a treadmill -- whichever you prefer.

Either way, let us know in the comments what you've hatched so far, and be sure to check out our other Pokemon GO guides!

Blocky Beast Mode Football Tips and Tricks,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinny/e5d951aa8174633a09e9e15627a7cb60.jpg 9rbie/blocky-beast-mode-football-tips-and-tricks Mon, 02 Oct 2017 10:05:39 -0400 Jeffrey Rousseau

There's no safer (or quicker) way to live out your NFL dream than by playing Blocky Beast Mode Football. In the game, your goal is to run down to the endzone untouched as NFL star running back Marshawn Lynch.

Considering his pedigree, it's only natural the game focuses on Lynch's skills to outrun and juke his way through the opposition victory. And like real life football, the mobile game is quite fun and rather addictive. It's also pretty tough. So here are some helpful tips that will hopefully get you across the goal line and into the Blocky Beast Mode Football hall of fame!


How to Get Past Defenders

As you run in Blocky Beast Mode Football, more and more defenders populate the field the further you go. So how do you stop those pesky defenders? Knock over defenders by shooting off the side of the track, smashing into them from the side as you come back around. Timing is important because you'll jump to the side for a second or so. Keep this up and you'll eventually clear a lot of ground.

Using Beast Mode

What is Beast Mode and how does it work? Glad you asked, friend. When you hit enough defenders, you'll activate beast mode. Beast mode provides you certain buffs, such as running at double the speed and invincibility for 20 seconds. This will allow you go through any defender in your way and cover a large portion of the field faster. Activating this super move often will better your chances of a high score. 

Experience System

You'll earn stars for long runs and by completing daily missions. You also have a star bar in the top left-hand corner of the screen. Once your star bar fills up, you'll gain a level. 

You'll then be rewarded with the opportunity to play a match game to win a new character. This meta game involves matching three cards to unlock more powerful players. If you happen to mismatch them, you can watch an ad in order to flip one more card.

Gaining Characters

The game does offer alternatives for earning characters other than the experience match game. You can play the gumball machine to earn 100 gems, and each run at the machine is a chance to earn a new character.

You can burn through those gems pretty fast though. So how do you win free gems? Your fast track is to head to the title screen and hit "free gems". You'll then be able earn 10 free gems for each video you watch. So you can sit back and watch videos until you get 100 and repeat the chance for new characters.

Game Over? Not Yet!

Watching an ad also allows you to continue your run if you fail to hit a high score. In fact, you can watch multiple ads to keep going. Each time you get knocked down, you can watch an ad to keep going until you get a high score. So if you're having a bad day, take a minute to watch a video.

Hopefully, these tips result in landslide victories for you. Like they say in football, take things day by day. Blocky Beast Mode Football can be purchase from the Google Play Store and iTunes Store for free.

Quick n' Easy Cuphead Controls Guide,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/c/u/p/cuphead-controls-a3b39.png olent/quick-n-easy-cuphead-controls-guide Sat, 30 Sep 2017 14:36:23 -0400 Ashley Gill

Cuphead's controls are pretty straightforward but there are a few things the game doesn't really explain, such as how to use Special Arts or one of the biggest benefits to parrying.

This guide's pretty cut and dry and covers the default buttons/keys for the keyboard, Xbox One, and PlayStation 4 controllers (for those using a PS4 controller on their PC). Simple and to the point.

One tip I do want to mention is that if you are having trouble with the controls using a controller, things may be easier if you swap the buttons for dash and EX shoot. You generally dash more often than you use your EX shot, so it may be more comfortable to have dash set to B (XB1)/Circle (PS4) and EX shoot to Y (XB1)/Triangle (PS4).

Standard Controls in Cuphead

Keyboard: X
Xbox controller: X
PS4 controller: Square

Keyboard: Z
Xbox controller: A
PS4 controller: X

EX shoot
Keyboard: V
Xbox controller: B
PS4 controller: Circle

Switch weapon
Keyboard: Tab
Xbox controller: Left bumper
PS4 controller: L1

Lock in place
Keyboard: C
Xbox controller: Right bumper
PS4 controller: R1

Keyboard: Left shift
Xbox controller: Y
PS4 controller: Triangle

How to Parry
The game goes over this a bit, but it's tricky to actually do as you have to jump and press the jump button again right as you touch a pink projectile to parry it.

In some games, there's a slight delay between jump -> contact -> parry but here in Cuphead, there is no delay and it must be done at the exact moment of contact.

Learning to parry is your key to success pushing through the game since parrying gives you 1 EX charge. It's easiest to practice parrying on the pink spiked balls in the first run & gun stage.

How to use your Super Art
Let your EX meter fill all the way up (5 cards) and press the EX shoot button to unleash your currently equipped Super Art.

Flying Controls in Cuphead

Keyboard: X
Xbox controller: X
PS4 controller: Square

Keyboard: V
Xbox controller: B
PS4 controller: Circle

Keyboard: Z
Xbox controller: A
PS4 controller: X

Keyboard: Shift
Xbox controller: Y or right bumper
PS4 controller: Triangle or R1

This guide being cut and dry was no exaggeration. Hopefully, having these written out, or the couple of tips within, have been of some help. Make sure to check out our other Cuphead guides for more tips and tricks.

Cuphead - How to Get the Pacifist Achievement,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/c/u/p/cuphead-pacifist-header-8e179.png zajtn/cuphead-how-to-get-the-pacifist-achievement Sat, 30 Sep 2017 13:38:17 -0400 Ashley Gill

How are you even supposed to be a pacifist in a game so bent on killing you? Well, for starters: You don't have to be nice all the time to get Cuphead's Pacifist achievement.

As one might expect, the out-of-place Pacifist achievement does require that you take it easy on your foes to some degree, but only certain ones. All those bosses you have to go against? They're still fair game when going for this achievement, but lesser enemies get a huge breather while you're trying to take it on.

You only have to show mercy during run & gun stages to get the achievement, which requires that you complete every run & gun stage without killing a single enemy. That sounds a lot more realistic, and it is possible even if you aren't amazing at the game. Trust me.

So how are you even supposed to do all this? First, you have to know these few points:

  • You can parry-kill enemies in run & gun stages and still have it count toward the achievement, and in many instances this is required

  • Getting past some obstacles or minibosses that seem impossible often requires parry-jumping over them

  • You cannot use the Whetstone Charm

  • You can use Special Art 2 (Invincibility)

You can choose pretty much any Charm you want, but I highly recommend using the Smoke Bomb over the others since you can avoid so much damage. Coffee is pretty useful as well, provided you make good use of the Invincibility Special Art.

Just to note: you can tell if you have successfully completed a stage the pacifist way as your letter score after you finish will be a 'P' and from then on the stage's flag on the world map will have a 'P' displayed.

How to Get Past the "Impassable" Obstacles at Each Stage

Forest Follies

Before the acorn dispenser is a mushroom that puffs out small clouds you can parry. You can parry to get over the dispenser and keep moving. (Be careful not to go down to the dispenser before the mushroom sends out a cloud, as you cannot get back up.)

Treetop Trouble

Just dash through the bug at the end of the stage.

Funfair Fever

Don't fret once you get inside the circus tent and run into the robots acting as walls: You can jump right over or dash through them and keep moving. The same can be said for the cannons after them.

You can also dash through that dastardly hotdog at the end.

Funhouse Frazzle

You can get through the segments with the walls with mouths by simply waiting and then running through one of their open mouths when you get the chance.

Rugged Ridge

Just be patient and dodge the enemies on the elevator when the time comes. The elevator ride doesn't last forever, and in time you will be able to walk free.

To get past the walls that spit ink, wait for them to spit out a pink parry glob and parry your way over them to keep moving.

Perilous Piers

There shouldn't be anything here that's especially troublesome.

Your reward

Doing all of these the pacifistic way is a hard task, to say the least, but your efforts won't totally be in vain. You do get some rewards for your hard work in completing Cuphead's run & gun stages the nice way.

The first is, of course, the achievement. But the real prize lies in the optional black & white video and additional audio options available at the turtle NPC once you're officially a Pacifist achievement holder. If you're a sucker for old cartoons or are simply now a diehard fan, these options are not to be passed up.

Be sure to check out our other Cuphead guides for more tips and tricks. 

Divinity: Original Sin 2 Guide -- How to Beat the Cursed Revenants,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/d/o/s/dos2-banner-eeafe.png uk0i6/divinity-original-sin-2-guide-how-to-beat-the-cursed-revenants Fri, 29 Sep 2017 16:54:04 -0400 Kengaskhan

Divinity: Original Sin 2 is already well on the way to becoming one of gaming’s most celebrated RPGs, with praise being showered on nearly every aspect of the game.

However, like most games, Divinity: Original Sin 2 is not without its flaws, and many players might find themselves cursing the devs while running through The Consulate quest because of...

The Cursed Revenants

At the Consulate ruins in Arx, you’ll encounter three Cursed Revenants -- seemingly immortal creatures that automatically respawn upon death no matter how many times you kill them.

But although it might seem like an impossible task, there are actually two reasons why the Cursed Revenants might seem unkillable:

  1. Cursed Revenants will instantly resurrect at any nearby pool of cursed fire. This can be problematic, given that they also create cursed fire.

  2. Even if you managed to figure out that you need to clear the Consulate of all cursed fire surfaces, there’s a bug that can cause a nearly untouchable pool of cursed fire to spawn inside a wall near the Consulate office.

At the moment, most Divinity: Original Sin 2 players recommend just avoiding the fight in The Consulate altogether, but if you’re determined to bring the Cursed Revenants down, you need to extinguish all the cursed fire in The Consulate, as well as the little patch of cursed fire inside one of the walls.

Extinguishing the Cursed Fire in The Consulate

It’s pretty easy to miss the game’s explanation of how to get rid of cursed fire, but you actually have a few options for dealing with it.

  1. While water and ice won’t extinguish cursed fire or necrofire, blood will. In this case, you’ll want the Blood Rain skill for its large area-of-effect.

  2. You can convert cursed fire into regular fire with the Bless skill (and if needed, you can convert the regular fire into blessed fire with a second casting of Bless). You’ll want to connect the scattered pools of cursed fire before you do any Blessing if you want to preserve your Source Points.

That's it. That’ll clear The Consulate of nearly every cursed fire surface – except for the bugged one.

The two most popular solutions I’ve found for dousing the bugged cursed fire in Divinity: Original Sin 2 are to use either the Tornado skill or the Terrain Transmutation skill, as their areas-of-effect will clip through walls (unlike Bless).


After you've done all that, just make sure to clean up any other cursed fire surfaces that the Revenants create -- and they should stay down the next time you drop them!

If you can think of any other ways to douse all that cursed fire (especially the pesky bugged patch in the wall), leave your solution in the comments!

Looking for other tips and trick for Divinity: Original Sin 2? Be sure to check out our Divinity Original Sin 2 guides! Here are a few to get you started: 

Hand of the Gods Guide: The Best Free Decks and Starting Decks,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/f/2/u/f2uch1506625529-ec6cb.png chi12/hand-of-the-gods-guide-the-best-free-decks-and-starting-decks Fri, 29 Sep 2017 13:14:42 -0400 Craig Snyder

Hand of the Gods: SMITE Tactics is the next CCG jumping in on the latest gaming craze. It puts a a "Hearthstone meets XCOM" spin on SMITE -- one of the most popular MOBA games on the market right now. Hand of the Gods takes some very interesting elements from other games like Hearthstone and Duelyst to create a simple card game experience on a more lifelike, grid-based board.

Transitioning players will find the 40-grid game board intimidating at first. But while the game is young and the card pool is small, now is the best time you'll ever find to learn the basics of the game and start crushing people with the first iterations of power decks. That being said, let's get into our list of some of the best starting decks for Hand of the Gods.

Midrange Ganesha Deck

Leader of the Hindu Pantheon, Ganesha is one of the newer gods to Hand of the Gods. And this deck that's built around him as a leader is completely free -- meaning it will cost you nothing and can be created with cards you have access to upon starting the game. 

Because Ganesha is a powerful support in SMITE, this Hand of the Gods deck is packed with defensive power at its highest end. Brute, Fury, and Venator synergize together to create a wall that should prove difficult for any deck to penetrate. You'll see this combination of cards show up often in this list.

Other Hindu cards like Rama and Pillar of Exile create a disruptive annoyance that opponents will need to deal with as quickly as possible, allowing you to curve into turns where you can make proactive plays on the board.

Check out the interactive decklist for Midrange Ganesha.

Control Ra Deck

This deck harnesses the same defensive powers as the Ganesha deck (in Venator, Fury, and Brute) but focuses more on playing the game as a war of attrition. Ra is one of the best control decks to play in the game due to powerful removal cards like Execute and Sunder.

Neith is the centerpiece of the deck, as she almost always baits out key removal from the opponent or pushes to win the game. Ideally, you want to pull Sobek and Sacred Warrior in your opening hand. If you're alive on board going into turns where you have 7 or 8 mana, this deck is fantastic. 

Check out the interactive decklist for Control Ra.

Midrange Zeus Deck

This Zeus deck offers a smooth curve into some of the most effective 4-to-7-mana cards in the game.

You want to mill for your Marksman ,and it's great if you can also get your hands on an early Brontes. Brontes into Aphrodite, Hades, or Athena is an incredibly powerful play. Two Elder Harpies give this deck the draw engine that it needs to get to late game.

Check out the interactive decklist for Midrange Zeus.

Aggro Odin Deck

This Odin deck is one of the few completely free aggro decks that stands a chance at winning games.

The key to this deck is milling for Hunter's Sigil. It's one of the most overwhelming cards you can play, as it's almost guaranteed to always kill the first drop your opponent players (being that the Cursed Hunters it spawns are ranged).

Check out the interactive decklist for Aggro Odin.

Midrange Bellona Deck

Bellona of the Roman Pantheon utilizes some of the most overwhelming defensive card mechanics in the game.

You're going to want to mill for White Tiger specifically, trying to control the early game using this card and Inferno Cannon. Cards like March, Bolster, and Promote highly incentivize you to have several minions in play within a close proximity of each other.

Later in the game, you're going to want to drop cards like Hercules and Brute to overwhelm your opponent with high-end damage.

Check out the interactive decklist for Midrange Bellona.

Midrange Ah Puch Deck

This Ah Puch deck takes advantage of Zombies early to put you into a position to have a solid late game.

On your first turn, using your Leader Ability to place a Zombie is a perfectly reasonable play. Your Zombies can be used to buff your Hun Batz or for a more powerful Raise the Grave turn.

Combined with the direct damage from Unholy Offering and Chaac, controlling them enemy board should be easy and then you're able to roll them over in the late game with 6 and 7 drops.

Check out the interactive decklist for Midrange Ah Puch.


All of the decks listed here were created by Phonetic. Big thanks go out to him for putting together these lists for new players!

Being that all of these decks cost nothing and can be used right after installation, you can expect that they aren't the most powerful in the game. They are good building blocks, though -- and as you get new cards you can slowly replace cards in your deck to tailor it more towards what you think it should be. After all, one of the best experiences in CCGs is experimenting and tweaking your deck to your own preference.

FIFA 18 Trophy Guide: Show Off Your Accomplishments!,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/t/r/o/trophy-guide-header-40cd4.jpg a9k7x/fifa-18-trophy-guide-show-off-your-accomplishments Fri, 29 Sep 2017 11:00:30 -0400 Joseph Rowe

 A new year means a new set of trophies for you to unlock in your favorite soccer/football game. FIFA 18 comes with a whole new set of challenges for you to complete to show your skills off to your friends!

This FIFA 18 trophy guide was written for the PlayStation 4. That being said, chances are that this guide will correspond more or less completely with the PlayStation 3, Xbox One, Xbox 360, Nintendo Switch, and PC versions of the game.

All Bronze Trophies in FIFA 18

Up first, we have FIFA 18's bronze trophies. There are 32 of them. These are the most numerous in the game and, thankfully, the easiest to earn.

A big chunk of them come from playing FIFA's Football Ultimate Team mode. One of the easiest ones to get right away is "Objective Complete," which simply requires you doing a daily objective. Easy enough!

  • Go Low: Score a goal using a low shot
  • Lofty Finish: Score a goal from a High Cross
  • It's What I Do: Score by performing an outside of the foot free kick
  • Get Your Head in the Game: Score a goal with a downward header
  • Sharp Shooter: During open play, score a long-distance goal with a defender (25 yards out)
  • Build Bridges: Successfully dribble an opponent by using the Bridge
  • I'm Getting Dizzy: Score a goal after 10 consecutive passes in the opposing third of the pitch
  • Fake It Make It: Score a goal by tricking the keeper with a Fake Shot
  • A Solid Test: Complete a Squad Building Challenge Group in FIFA Ultimate Team
  • Challenge? What Challenge?: Complete your first Squad Building Challenge in FIFA Ultimate Team
  • You May Have Won the Battle...: Win a game in FIFA Ultimate Team Squad Battles
  • More to Come: Play 20 games in any game mode within FIFA Ultimate Team
  • Weekly Objective Complete: Complete a Weekly Objective in FIFA Ultimate Team
  • The Big League: Win promotion to Division 1 of FIFA Ultimate Team Seasons
  • Objective Complete: Complete a Daily Objective in FIFA Ultimate Team
  • A Test of Skill: Challenge and complete a match against the Team of the Week in FIFA Ultimate Team
  • Star Pupil: Complete an entire day's Daily Objectives in FIFA Ultimate Team
  • Master Builder: Complete 20 Squad Building Challenges in FIFA Ultimate Team
  • Handyman: In Pro Clubs, use in matches each of your 3 Play Styles
  • Your Own Path: Unlock all traits in one skill-tree path
  • You've Got a Friend in Me: Finish an Online Friendlies Season
  • Just Getting Started: Complete and win your first Pro Club Seasons league match
  • Tailored: Spend a skill point in Pro Clubs
  • Sniped: In career mode, compete for the same player with other teams, and win the negotiation war
  • Investor: Sell a player and negotiate a sell-on clause with the buying club
  • Brute Force: Buy a player by paying his release clause
  • Always Be Closing: Secure a player on the first go
  • My Only Hope: Perform a quicksub after you concede a goal
  • You Got Skills: Complete a multiplayer skill game
  • Let's Play a Game: Play a women's football match
  • Just One More: Score 5 goals in a women's football match
  • Trick or Treat?: Score a goal with a Flair Shot in a women's football match

All Silver Trophies in FIFA 18

Up next, you have silver trophies, which are the second easiest to earn. There are nine of them in FIFA 18. Most of these trophies come from either winning tournaments/titles or by performing certain maneuvers in game.

One of the more difficult silver trophies in FIFA comes from winning a penalty shoot-out without missing as you'll have to get to the penalty shoot-out before you get a chance to even practice it.

  • You've Read My Mind: Assist a goal using a threaded through pass
  • Magician: Perform 3 successful threaded through ball passes with the same player in the attacking third
  • A+: Win a penalty shoot-out without missing
  • Going Up in Style: Win a division title in FIFA Ultimate Team Seasons
  • Steal the Show: Win Division Title in Online Seasons (must be obtained through gameplay)
  • Shiny: Win the Women's International Cup tournament
  • Stylist: In the journey, add a cosmetic item to Alex Hunter
  • In Perfect Harmony: Achieve a 10 partnership rating with your striker partner
  • Should've Brought My Sunglasses: Win the EFL Cup in the Journey

All Gold Trophies in FIFA 18

This is the second most difficult set of trophies to unlock: the gold trophies. Although difficult to pull off in a game in real time, you can unlock the first one by practicing your goalkeeper driven throws until you finally lead a successful counter attack with one. Check out my FIFA 18 tips and tricks guide for instructions on how to perform a driven throw.

One of them isn't even that difficult to get: you simply have to complete the Journey in FIFA 18. It will take some time to get through, but this is probably the easiest of the gold trophies to unlock.

  • You're a Real Keeper!: Score a goal from a counter attack that started with a goalkeeper driven throw
  • Pristine Victory: Win all 4 matches in a Football Ultimate Team Draft Session
  • What a Comeback: Finish the Journey

All Platinum Trophies in FIFA 18

The cream of the crop: the platinum trophy. This FIFA 18 trophy can only be unlocked by obtaining all other trophies in the game first. Fortunately, if you're reading this at a later date and there have been additional trophies added, you only have to obtain the original set of trophies.

  • No. 1 Fan: Unlock all other trophies


What was the most difficult trophy you've tried to unlock so far? The easiest? Let us know in the comments. And be sure to stay tuned for more FIFA 18 guides to help you dominate the soccer field. 

Total War: Warhammer 2 Lizardmen Faction Strategy Guide and Campaign Walkthrough,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/c/o/v/cov1-9273f.jpg lm2z8/total-war-warhammer-2-lizardmen-faction-strategy-guide-and-campaign-walkthrough Fri, 29 Sep 2017 10:35:59 -0400 Ty Arthur

There are an absurd number of elements at play in Total War: Warhammer 2's campaign, from diplomacy to taxes to properly lining up your units for battlefield advantage and even onto game-changing magic rites.

Simply playing the game, let alone getting close to winning, can be a daunting task for a newbie -- which is why we've put together this Total War: Warhammer 2 Lizardmen faction guide.

Below we cover everything you need to know to exterminate those treacherous warm bloods who just can't ever leave well enough alone and stop mucking about with the forces of Chaos.

The Best Lizardmen Lord for Your Total War: Warhammer 2 Campaign

You have two legendary Lord options right off the bat: Mazdamundi, the spell-casting Slaan, or Kroq-Gar, a saurus oldblood general who is focused on direct melee combat and bonuses to nearby units.

Which Lord is best for your Lizardmen army? It depends on what you want out of your campaign. Kroq-Gar begins at a different point of the map and has a slightly harder starting difficulty in the campaign. On the other hand, Mazdamundi has many advantages for the new player because he allows access to an additional Slaan Mage-Priest and offers reduced Rite costs -- but he's also terrible at diplomacy. His many long range spells more than make up for that, however.

 Picking Lord Mazdamundi 

The Geomantic Web

No matter which Lord you choose, the big advantage to the Lizardmen is the Geomantic Web that connects cities in your provinces by magical forces. The Web is incredibly useful -- so you should always conquer an area with a Web node whenever you can, and upgrade it like crazy.

The various Alignments on the Web give you drastic bonuses if you pump them up to tier five. To improve the Web to its highest strength, you need to keep nodes connected to cities of equal Geomantic strength and keep up your relationship with neighboring settlements. Don't forget to build Geomantic Markers and Lodestones on cities that aren't connected to the Web as well.

Always make sure there's space in capitals for Geomantic structures and upgrades. If you are regularly adding to and upgrading the Web, you will frequently be flush with gold and bonuses that will keep you one step ahead of the other factions.

Starting the Geomantic Web

Warhammer II Lizardmen Campaign Strategy

It's worthwhile to be fairly aggressive early on during the campaign, taking on the Skaven and Skeggi but ignoring or getting diplomatic with the Empire to the south.

After taking the Monolith of Fallen Gods, its probably time to get a new Lord and start building up a secondary set of armies so you can tackle problems on different areas of the map at the same time.

Either of the Lizardmen legendary lords have access to four powerful rites that are costly but offer big bonuses. The Rite Of Ferocity is the least expensive, and often is also the most helpful because it gives you bonus experience, gold, and recruitment -- so your armies can pump up faster.

On the defense front, the Rite Of Sotek can be incredibly useful, hampering enemies within your province and making ambushes more deadly.

 Lizardmen Rites

Be sure to go through the quests in the early game to earn gold and Ancient Plaques, since you'll need those for the rituals. In particular, be sure to rush to the Mirror, Mirror quest so you can build a trove at the quest location and generate a steady stream of Plaques.

Whenever a ritual is being enacted, random forces of Chaos will pop up behind your province lines near cities enacting rituals (or near cities that are undefended). The other factions will also be able to see where you rituals are being enacted and will show up to ruin your day. In other words, don't try to expand while you are doing a ritual, because you need armies to protect your cities during those times.

On the expansion front, you can mostly ignore the frozen regions as places to hole up, since (as you'd expect from a cold blooded people) the Lizardmen will see public order plummet in cold regions. The best spots to conquer and fortify are jungles and deserts, although anything that isn't frozen and snowing can work in your favor.

While adding to your Lizardmen empire, don't forget to take into account the level of upkeep and expense going on with your expensive lizard armies, so build economic buildings and do anything you can to keep the gold flowing in.

On the tech tree, feel free to go where you like, focusing on whichever unit or building type you use most. I've found upgrading the solid mid-level saurus warriors to be an effective strategy, but it is also worthwhile to grab a few upgrades on the tree that help increase public order in your provinces, since corrupting influences will frequently appear.

 Lizardmen Tech Tree

Warhammer II Lizardmen Combat Strategy

Before battle while you are still moving around the world map, don't forget that the Lizardmen get the Astromancy stance for armies. While this reduces your mobility, it improves your visibility and lets you ambush easier, in addition to providing vanguard placement in battles.

Besides your powerful Lords, there are essentially two types of Lizardmen to deploy in combat: your slower and harder hitting beasts and saurus warriors, or your cheaper, faster skinks. (Check out our full list of Warhammer: Total War II unit rosters for the full rundown of all the units at your disposal.)

The skinks are good for maneuverability, since they move faster and can redeploy to flank enemies from the side or behind, although in many case you'll want to save your swift mounted units for that strategy. Skinks also break morale and flee regularly, which isn't always a negative, since it lures big melee units away from the main fight.

 Choosing the Astromancy stance

If you've got a hidden unit waiting nearby in the trees or just have some ranged units ready to reposition, fleeing skinks can actually turn the tide of battle. When you work up the tech tree, chameleon skinks can be your sneaky, hit and run units to always vex the enemy and take out unprotected units.

Unlike some of the other factions, sending your saurus units past enemy lines can actually work to your advantage, because they go berserk so easily. Berserk units get big bonuses to combat, but they also don't respond to your commands.

If a squad of saurus warriors goes berserk on the edge of a battle and wastes their time chasing a faster unit of ranged archers, then they are essentially out of the battle. Saurus hilariously trying to chase mounted archers is a sad way to lose a battle. If they are in the thick of combat near a whole bunch of vulnerable melee units, however...

On the opposite side of that, don't be afraid to have your big bruisers flee before they go berserk if things are going badly, so you don't lose highly experienced troops and have to start over with fresh recruits.

Where the Lizardmen trail behind the other factions is in powerful archers, but their later game artillery pieces also happen to be dinosaurs that can more than hold their own in melee, so don't be afraid to put them in harm's way!

After battle, eating the enemies of course is a great way to replenish your forces, but unless you are heavily beaten down and expect another battle soon, you should probably choose the option to sacrifice the survivors instead for all that extra experience.

     A horde of skinks popping out of the tree line can spell doom for your enemy

Those are all the basics you need to know to dominate the Total War: Warhammer II Vortex campaign map! Do you have any other effective Lizardmen strategies we didn't list here? Let us know your best Lizardmen tactics in the comments below! And stay tuned for more Total War: Warhammer 2 guides here on GameSkinny.

Black Desert Online Kamasylvia Guide: Kamasylve Tree Event,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/u/n/t/untitled-830f3.jpg 5ey5h/black-desert-online-kamasylvia-guide-kamasylve-tree-event Thu, 28 Sep 2017 12:34:20 -0400 Sergey_3847

The Kamasylvia expansion for Black Desert Online is currently available for free download. It introduces a whole new area full of quests, NPCs, events, and more. The Kamasylve Tree event takes place from September 27 to October 4.

It will require you to accomplish several quests and the rewards are quite valuable. So if you want to take a part in this exciting journey, then follow our step-by-step guide for the Kamasylve Tree event below.

How to Grow Young Kamasylve Tree in BDO

Step 1: Speak to Cartima

Travel to the Heidel City, the capital of Serendia, which you can find south of the port city Velia. In the southern part of the city locate an inn. There you should see three NPCs standing by the wall.

One of them is named Cartima, and you need to talk to him in order to get the Sacred Energy of Spirit quest. He will tell you about the energy tree that is growing in the Kamasylve Temple, located east of the Heidel City, where he serves as the priest.

Travel to the location node indicated on the map -- the Kamasylve Temple in Mediah.

Step 2: Speak to Herawen

As soon as you arrive, speak to Herawen, the Kamasylve Temple chancellor. She will ask you to put 10 energy into a Bowl of Spirit, which will allow you to complete the Sacred Energy of Spirit quest.

As a result, you will get the Energy of Spirit, which will be used to grow the Young Kamasylve Tree. You will also receive a Gift of a Spirit as a reward for taking part in the event.

Step 3: Grow the Kamasylve Tree

Finally, find a Young Kamasylve Tree around the temple gardens, and start growing it by planting your energy.

Each server gets one such tree to grow, and the game will provide players with special benefits depending on the number of servers with grown trees:

  • 20 or more servers will get Black Stone Drop Rate Up
  • 30 or more servers will get Book of Combat
  • 40 or more servers will get Blessing of Kamasylve


Remember: The Kamasylvia event will last only for seven days, so get busy growing those trees. If you're up for some more BDO guides on GameSkinny, then take a glance at the list below:

Golf Clash Guide: Best Clubs, Stats, and Upgrading Strategies,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/k/n/0/kn06s1506600938-9b3d9.png u8trj/golf-clash-guide-best-clubs-stats-and-upgrading-strategies Thu, 28 Sep 2017 12:04:11 -0400 Craig Snyder

Golf Clash is a surprisingly deep golf game that you can play with your friends on Facebook, iOS, and Android. Its level of depth is pretty unmatched when it comes to other sports games on mobile devices, and the way you upgrade and progress through the game gives it an RPG-like feel that leaves you feeling really satisfied when it's all said an done.

However, one of the biggest roadblocks in the way of becoming a great player in Golf Clash is not knowing how to manage your coins and clubs. Any experienced player will tell you that sinking upgrades into clubs as you get them is absolutely not worth it, and I'm here to echo that sentiment. In this guide, we'll show you the best clubs in Golf Clash and explain how you're going to want to manage your club collection.

Golf Clash Club Stats Spreadsheet 

Let me bring your attention to the most complete and comprehensive community-driven spreadsheet for clubs on Golf Clash. 

I didn't create this spreadsheet, and it's being managed by several veteran players over at /r/GolfClash on Reddit and the Playdemic forums. Having such a large number of contributors means that it's constantly updated to stay relevant and correct.

Click here to check it out in its entirety

The spreadsheet can be a little confusing at first, so let's talk about exactly what you're looking at. The most important column is the last one, % Perfect Weighted. This column identifies the highest and lowest possible value for each stat category then calculates the percentage of how "perfect" that club is. For example, if a club's highest Power is 240, then that value is 100% perfect. If it's lowest Power is 190, then that's 0% perfect. At 215 Power, it'd be 50% perfect.

The average values for each stat category create an overall % Perfect Value for each club. However, stats are weighted depending on the club type you're looking at. For example, Power is the most important stat for Drivers. Therefore, Power has 75% weighting for the % Total Perfect value for Drivers.


Each page of the spreadsheet shows the clubs with the best possible stats (weighted and overall) in descending order. A 100% perfect club has the highest possible stats in every category.

Best Club of Each Type in Golf Clash

Having this spreadsheet allows us to easily determine what the "best" club of each type is. Best is subjective here (of course) because a club can have a really low value for a stat you're looking for, however be much higher than the rest of the field in other stats (thus giving it a higher % Perfect Weighted score).

If this the only information you're interested in, you don't have to look at any complicated spreadsheet. Here's a table with that information:

Club Type Club Name Club Level
Driver The Apocalypse 7
Wood The Cataclysm 7
Long Iron The B52 7
Short Iron The Hornet 8
Wedge The EndBringer 7
Rough Iron Nirvana 8
Sand Wedge Spitfire 7

These are the clubs you're going to want to save your resources for. Be conscious of your experience while playing Golf Clash, though. Do you plan to play the game long-term and farm for the best possible clubs? If so, you're probably going to only want to spend your gems on the clubs above.

If you're a more casual player, you can check out the difference in % Perfect Weighted back on our spreadsheet. For example, if you really want a good Long Iron but can't get your hands on The B52 and already have Tsunami, the % Perfect Weighted difference between a level 7 B52 and Tsunami is just 0.4%. Just put those levels into your Tsunami.

However, you need to be mindful of the strengths and weaknesses of every club. For example, The Amazon is the second-highest rated Rough Iron in terms of % Perfect Weighted, but its Ball Guide stat is very bad at just 2.5.

However, the Curl, Back Spin, and Top Spin on this club is high above the level 8 Nirvana, which is the top-rated Rough Iron. Ball Guide is generally an extremely important stat for Rough Irons though. This is why calling any club the best is a bit subjective. You need to really read into the stats.

Club Upgrading Strategy

Many players make the mistake of sinking all their coins into upgrading clubs to their max level so that the rewards you get will stop prioritizing them and go into other clubs. From my own personal experience and everything I've read on Reddit and forums, don't do this.

There are a small handful of clubs for each club type that are good and then the rest you'll never use. Through the spreadsheet in this guide, it's pretty easy to identify which is which. 

For Drivers, upgrading anything besides Extra Mile, Apocalypse, or Thor's Hammer isn't optimal. For Wood clubs, you only want to focus on Guardian, Sniper, and Cataclysm. Nirvana is the only Rough Iron you'll ever use past Tour 7. Around that same time, you'll be earning 300k+ coins per match and upgrading won't be as tedious of a task.

However, you can't just get to Tour 7 by holding off on upgrading clubs. You're going to need to upgrade what you have as sparingly as possible so you can squeak by matches until you get your hands on one of the elite clubs. Don't overdo it! You don't need to upgrade any lower-tier clubs past the point at which you're finding success with them. It's a waste of your resources.


Golf Clash is a deep game that's going to require some foresight before you jump right in and start splurging coins on everything. Save and make an upgrade plan for yourself. Focus on only the optimal clubs. Make use of the provided spreadsheet!

Interested in more Golf Clash content? Check out more tips from these two Golf Clash guides:

FIFA 18 Tips and Tricks: A Complete Guide to Dominating on Offense and Defense,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/h/e/a/header-ddc82.jpg ziubj/fifa-18-tips-and-tricks-a-complete-guide-to-dominating-on-offense-and-defense Thu, 28 Sep 2017 11:49:27 -0400 Joseph Rowe

FIFA 18, the newest addition to EA's long-running FIFA soccer series, is finally here -- and it's time for you to get your thumbs in the best shape possible so you can dominate your opponents on and offline. Although it's definitely a lot less body intensive than real life soccer/football, you still need to put some practice in if you want to bring home some wins. With our FIFA 18 tips and tricks, you'll be prepared to kick some serious butt out on the virtual pitch! 

FIFA 18 Offensive Tips and Tricks

No offense, but your offense needs improvement. Between offense and defense, this is the more difficult of the two disciplines to master as you've got a lot of controls to remember if you want to hold onto the ball long enough to score some goals. Try these FIFA 18 offense tips out to improve your attacking game.

Shooting in FIFA 18

No, this isn't Counter-Strike, this is FIFA 18 and you've got to learn how to shoot if you want to get some points. The most crucial aspect of winning is scoring goals and in order to do that, you have to know what kind of shots to make and when to make them.

The most basic shot is done by simply pressing or holding O [PS4] or B [Xbox One]. This will shoot the ball in front of your player. Its height will depend on how long you held O/B after you pressed it. The ball will go high if you hold down O/B for its full duration and it will only get a little bit of air if you tap the button.

The next shot you should familiarize yourself with is the finesse shot, which is done by shooting while holding R1/RB. FIFA 18's finesse shot is an accurate shot that goes slightly to the side and then curves back around again. It's great for getting the soccer ball behind goalies. When performing the finesse shot, you'll want to hold the button down for just a moment or two. Give it enough power to get some air, but not too much to prevent the ball from flying away.

Up next is the chip shot, which is done by pressing the shot button while holding L1/LB. This is a shot that goes straight and over your opponent's head using a quick arc. This is great for when it's just you and the goalkeeper without too many defenders giving you pressure. You should aim to get about two bars of power before shooting this off to ensure the ball gets over your opponent's head.

Up next is my personal favorite, the low shot. This one is done by simply tapping O/B a second time after shooting. You can hold down the shoot button for more power, but be sure to tap O/B a second time before it reaches max power otherwise you'll just kick the ball incredibly high. This is one of the best FIFA 18 shots and should be your default when you're near the goal.

If you want to be a show off when you're really kicking your opponent's butt, you can perform a flair shot by holding L2/LT and pressing the shoot button in FIFA 18. This is basically a trick shot and is not quite as powerful or accurate as the others, but it's great for rubbing your victories into your opponent's face. I'm not sure if this is always the case, but I only managed to get this to work by running toward the goal and shooting around the penalty shot area.

You can also fake a shot in FIFA 18 by pressing O/B then X/A and a direction with the left stick. This is great for forcing the opposing goalkeeper to dive or to fake out a defender.

Lastly, you can sometimes score goals if the ball is near your head and you are near the opposing goal by pressing X/A, Square/X, or O/B. This is called a header and is usually common during kickoffs.

Passing in FIFA 18

In order to shoot the ball into the goal, you have to get the ball on the opposing team's side of the pitch. To be able to do that, you have to have a strong passing game. Follow our FIFA 18 passing tips to outmaneuver your opponents while you get into scoring range.

A good starting point is the short pass. This maneuver is done simply by pressing X/A. This is a great pass for when you don't have anyone between you and your nearby teammate in FIFA 18.

When you have a defender in between you and your teammate, you can press Square/X for a lob pass which lobs the ball over your opponent's head, allowing your teammate to get possession of the ball.

The next kind of pass is the through ball pass. You perform this type of pass with Triangle/Y. It is meant to be done when your teammate is between two defenders and you need to get the ball between them.

In addition to the through ball, you have a threaded through ball in FIFA 18. To do this, you hold R1/RB while performing a through ball. This pushes the ball a little bit further than the normal version and is perfect for when you and a teammate (who is ahead of you) are nearing the goal with no one in front of your teammate. If done right, it gives your teammate enough time to catch up via sprinting to the ball and can set them up nicely for scoring.

The last kind of through ball is the lobbed through ball which is done by holding L1/LB while pressing Triangle/Y. This is great for when you need to get the ball between two defenders but are worried they'll intercept it on the ground.

Another variation on the lob ball in FIFA 18 is the scoop lob which is done by holding L2/LT while pressing Square/X. This is similar to a lob pass, but instead, has more of an arc.

Up next, you have the driven lob pass/cross which is done by holding R1/RB while pressing Square/X. This is a lob pass that has a bit more force to it. Driven passes are intercepted less often, but they might not land as close to your teammate as you intend to, so keep that in mind when performing this FIFA 18 pass.

You can perform a high lob/cross by holding L1/LB while pressing Square/X in FIFA 18. This is simply just a higher version of the lob pass. Conversely, you can perform a low cross by tapping Square/X a second time, much like the low shot. You can even do a flair pass by holding L2/LT while pressing X/A.

When the ball is passed to you, you can dummy a pass (have it go through your teammate's legs). This is great for when there are defenders on your teammate's side because it allows the ball to go between them instead of out in front of them (where it becomes easily snatchable for your opponent).

Something to keep in mind when passing is that if you're playing as a high-stats character, you should be able to maneuver the ball around more or less immediately after getting it, but your first touch as a player with lower skill sets is more important. You'll likely not want to sprint to get the ball and will want to be aware of where you go with it in FIFA 18 to avoid having it stolen by an opponent. Some players even stop in their tracks to make sure they don't lose possession.

Ball Control in FIFA 18

The most difficult aspect of FIFA 18 is effectively learning ball control. It seems simple on the surface, right? You just un around dribbling the ball. Wrong. You have to avoid an entire enemy team that is meant to slow you down and steal the ball away. Luckily, you have an arsenal of tricks to hold onto the ball.

To start with, you protect the ball by holding down L2/LT. This makes you move a bit slower/more awkwardly, but it's great for when an opposing player is right on you.

If you want to be precise with your positioning, you can slow dribble by holding L1/LB while moving with the ball. This won't allow you to move fast at all, as the name implies, but it will give you enough control and time to carefully maneuver the ball passed your opponent.

Up next, we have skill moves that aren't necessary to hold onto the ball, but if mastered, will give you some seriously sweet moves for replays and an insane ability to protect your ball. To perform a skill move, the player you're controlling has to have the right amount of stars out of five total. One-star means players can perform one-star moves, whereas five-star players can perform from one to five-star moves.

We'll start with the one-star moves. Holding L2/LT then pressing R1/RB allows you to juggle (1*) the ball. If you press a direction with the movement stick while doing this, it juggles the ball in that direction. You can repeat this for as many times as you want to juggle the ball and can manage to do so without messing up.

You can perform a foot fake (1*) by holding L1/LB and pressing R1/RB. This makes your character look like they're about to do something with their leg to psych out the enemy team in FIFA 18.

Up next, we have the two-star moves. When standing still, you can body feint (2*) left or right by flicking the right stick left or right. This makes it seem like you'll move in that direction, but instead you stay in the same spot.

You can stepover (2*) the ball in FIFA 18, left or right, by moving the right stick from the up position to the direction you want to go in then letting go. This makes your player move their foot over the ball as if they were going to move it somewhere, but instead, the ball remains in place. A reverse stepover is the opposite technique and is performed by doing the opposite motion.

You can roll the ball (2*) left or right by holding the right stick in the direction you wish to go. If you hold down L1/LB, you can drag the ball backwards (2*) by flicking down on the left stick.

The first 3-star move we have is the heel flick (3*). This is done simply by flicking up then down on the right stick. This pushes the ball with your front heel back to your back foot then you push the ball with your back heel to move to the side in front of you.

flick up (3*) is performed by tapping up on the right stick three times. This brings the ball up into the air in front of your player and can be used in FIFA 18 to set up some decent shots.

You can perform a spinning juke, known as a roulette (3*), by starting your right stick in the bottom left and rotating the stick all the way around to the right direction to go right or do the opposite to go left in FIFA 18.

To fake left and go right, which involves your player feinting a leftward movement then going right as the name implies, you start from the left on the right stick then perform a half-circle motion to the right. You can fake right and go left by doing the opposite.

We're getting into serious pro territory with the 4-star moves now. To ball hop,  where your player hops with the ball between their legs, press R3 while standing still.

Instead of simply doing a heel flick, 4-star players get an improved version called the heel to heel flick (4*) that is done the same way: flicking up then down on the right control stick in FIFA 18. This move is perfect for when you're running up towards the goal and you have a defender running straight for you; it gives you a change in momentum that will allow you to move right past them.

Up next, you have the simple rainbow (4*), another great move for setting up shots, which is performed by flick down then up twice on the right stick while going forward. Your player will kick the ball from behind them, over their head, and in front of them. You can juggle it a bit before doing this with an advanced rainbow (4*) that is done in FIFA 18 by flicking down on the right stick, then holding up on the right stick for a second before flicking it up again.

A better version of the fake left/right and go right/left set is feint left/right and go right/left (4*) This is done the same way for both types in FIFA 18: start with the right stick to the left and go in a half circle along the bottom to the right if you want to feint left then go right and do the reverse if you want to feint then go in the opposite direction.

If you're moving forward and your opponent is heading straight for you, you can fake them out with a spin (4*). To spin left, you simply tap bottom-left on the right stick twice. This makes your character do a 360, turning toward their right and moving the ball with them, allowing them to move the ball back in front of them as they go left. You can perform it on the right side in FIFA 18 to go right.

At the cost of some momentum, you can stop and turn left or right (4*) by flicking up on the right stick then flicking the direction you want to go on the right stick while running. Another trick move in FIFA 18 is the ball roll and cut left or right (4*). You simply hold the right stick to the right or left, then hold the left stick in the opposite direction. This causes your player to roll their ball in a direction for a second then stop it and move the ball towards the opposite direction.

Last, but certainly not least, we have the five-star tricks. In the same vein as its other upgrade, the elastico (5*) uses the same movements as fake left/right and go right/left in FIFA 18: start with the right stick to the left then do a half circle on the bottom to the right or vice versa. This is like an even faster/better version of its previous incarnations.

You can show off your quick ball rolls (5*) by holding down on the right stick. This will shift the ball quickly between your feet as you stand still.

You can perform hocus pocus (5*), a move where your player uses their right leg to move the ball behind then around their left leg to end with it in front of them. This is a great FIFA 18 ball control fake out when you're sprinting down the field. It is performed with the right stick by starting off from the bottom, then rolling to the left. After that, you start from the left and roll from the bottom to the right. The opposite motion does a triple elastico (5*) which functions similarly, but involves your player using their foot on top of the ball for a moment instead of having it go behind and then around.

You can do a ball roll and flick left/right (5*) by holding left or right on the right stick then flicking up on the left stick after the ball moves to the side one time. This is great in FIFA 18, especially after free kicks, for faking out opponents as you'll roll the ball in one direction, but move forward in the opposite.

The next ball control five star move in FIFA 18 is the sombrero flick (5*). This is the opposite technique of a simple rainbow. You kick the ball in an arc over your head behind you. To do this, you flick up on the right stick twice and then flick down while standing.

The five star version of the stop and turn is the turn and spin left/right (5*). To do this, you flick up on the right stick and then flick the direction you want to go. As the name implies, your character will spin around in a 360 and go in the direction you command them to. Really effective against the defending AI in FIFA 18.

While standing still, if you start to roll the ball in one direction, but flick the right stick in the opposite direction as you're in the middle of the animation for the first roll, you will perform a ball roll and fake left/right (5*). Another great FIFA 18 AI tricking move.

The next five star move is the Rabona Fake. You perform this by holding L2/LT while jogging and then pressing either Square/X or O/B then immediately pressing X/A and down on the left stick. As the name implies, your player motions a rabona kick, but fakes your opponents out instead.

The last two five star moves in FIFA 18 are elastico chop left and right (5*). To perform either one, you tap down on the right stick then the direction you want to elastico chop in on the right stick. Your player does a quick jump that involves touching the ball with one foot, then kicks the ball out and in front of them a bit with the other.

Free Kicks in FIFA 18

When you get the chance to perform a free kick in FIFA 18, you can either try to score as the free kicker or you can try to pass to a teammate to set them up to score. 

As a free kicker, you can ground pass with X/A or high pass/cross with Square/X. If your free kicker isn't very good at making goals or if the opposing team's defense is too high, you'll want to pass instead of taking a shot.

You can perform a curled shot with O/B or a driven shot by holding L1/LB while pressing O/B. Your curled shot is going to be your FIFA 18 default, but if you're a bit further away, you can use the driven shot for more force.

If you're not sure about the positioning of your current kicker, you can summon your 2nd kick taker by pressing L2/LT. If you hold L2/LT while pressing the following, you perform: O/B curled shot, X/A layoff pass, Square/X layoff chip, or O/B then X/A for run over ball. If you press R1/RB, you will call the 3rd kick taker. Holding R1/RB and pressing the same buttons as before gives you the same move kit in FIFA 18.

Defense in FIFA 18

Defense is thankfully not nearly as complicated as offense in FIFA 18, but that doesn't make it any less important! Without a good defense, your players can neither recover the ball to score goals nor can they prevent the opposing team from scoring goals on them.

Defending in FIFA 18

Even if it's more simple than keeping the ball in your possession, playing defender is no easy task in FIFA 18. You have to keep your character's area of the field covered while staying on top of who you're containing. When you're near the ball, you have to try and tackle your opponent without fouling them. This can get tricky.

Your most basic form of defense is your tackle. You tackle by pressing O/B. If you hold down the button, you'll have more force with it when it connects with your opponent.

Up next, you have your sliding tackle which you can perform by pressing Square/X. Both tackles should really only be used when you're in front of your opponent. The slide should be used if your opponent is trying to juke you and you need the speed, but it comes at the cost of having a long recovery so if you miss, your opponent will easily get by you. Careless spamming of either tackle or using it from behind will likely lead to you tripping or otherwise harming your opponent -- so avoid that if you don't want to get any penalties. For a quicker recovery, you can press Square/X again after your sliding tackle.

Contain is one of the most important features of playing defense in FIFA 18. Holding down X/A will allow you to do this. It follows the ball when an opposing player has it and is great for making sure your character stays in front of it. Sometimes you can even take the ball without needing to use tackle!

If you press and hold R1/RB, though, you can perform a secondary contain which has you follow an opposing teammate that is viable to pass to. This is a great way of not committing too much and leaving an easy pass open for your opponent.

When you're near an opponent, you can press and hold O/B or L2/LT to push or pull on them. You can also try to take a protected ball from your shielded opponent by holding L2/LT and moving your left stick towards the dribbler.

Goalkeeping in FIFA 18

The last line of defense against opposing attackers is your goalkeeper. Luckily, playing goalkeeper isn't too terribly complicated in FIFA 18 in terms of controls, though it is difficult to master.

The most important part of goalkeeping is positioning. If you're playing on an easy difficulty and you don't want to put much thought into playing goalkeeper, you can simply hold down L1/LB to let the game position your character for you. This will generally put you in a good position so if it works for you and you don't mind letting the game do the work, go ahead.

If you want to put more effort into playing goalkeeper, you can manually control your GK with the left stick, of course. When your opponent has the ball, you can press O/B or Square/X to drop kick in order to prevent the ball from going into the goal. Keep in mind that you should only use this when you're sure the ball is kicked and you want to commit to the direction in which you're going because your player's body will go to the ground and you will have to wait a moment to recover, leaving your goal wide open if the ball's still in opposing hands.

Similar to the contain feature for defenders, the goalkeeper can hold down R1/RB to charge the opponent who is controlling the ball. This isn't a good idea in FIFA 18 unless you know for certain the ball can't get behind you. You should use this when the opponent has accidentally placed a bit of distance between themselves and the ball and you know you have enough time to recover it before they do.

To pick up the ball once it's out of the opponent's control, simply press R1/RB. Once it's in your control, you can either throw it or pass it with X/A, drop it with Triangle/Y, or kick it with Square/X.

There are two types of throws and kicks as a goalkeeper: normal and driven. The difference between the two is that driven is at a lower angle with more power. To do a driven pass and a driven kick, you do the same inputs for the normal moves while holding R1/RB. A driven kick or throw in FIFA 18 is perfect for when you want to put on a strong counterattack.


How are you liking FIFA 18 so far? Is it better than last year's edition? Liking the new additions to the game? Let us know in the comments.

Stay tuned for more FIFA 18 content including a review and trophy guide!

Minecraft Guide: How to Get Emerald Chickens in Sky Factory 3,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/u/n/t/untitled-a5150-3c191.jpg ie5f7/minecraft-guide-how-to-get-emerald-chickens-in-sky-factory-3 Thu, 28 Sep 2017 10:57:53 -0400 ActionJ4ck

If you've been playing around with the Sky Factory 3 mod pack for Minecraft (or even just the Chickens mod by itself), then you've probably found yourself trying to figure out how to breed emerald chickens.

In addition to producing the emeralds necessary for crafting things like shipping crates and powered spawners in SF3, emerald chickens can also be bred with cactus green chickens to produce free EXP. 

Unfortunately, you prospective emerald farmers out there are going to have to jump through a few genetic hoops before your emerald chickens can come into this world. Check out this breeding chart for the Minecraft Chicken mod's emerald chicken: 

As you can see, it will take a few generations of breeding before you can get your Minecraft emerald chicken. And while most of the parent chickens should be easy enough to obtain, many players have trouble finding the quartz chicken.

Getting the quartz chicken in Minecraft's SF3 mod pack requires you to actually go into the Nether, build your way up to one of the fortresses, and survive long enough for a quartz chicken to spawn so that you can catch it in your net. (Good luck with that.)

Once this is done, however, you should have no problems following the above chart and breeding your very own emerald chicken. Enjoy your effectively endless supply of emeralds and XP!

If you found this tips article helpful, be sure to check out any of our other Minecraft guides here on GameSkinny. 

Undercards Guide: How to Activate Your Account,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/m/a/x/maxresdefault-9581a.jpg 6yv0f/undercards-guide-how-to-activate-your-account Thu, 28 Sep 2017 10:46:36 -0400 adelgirl

A new collectible card game based on the game Undertale was recently released -- but only on your web browser. It features multiplayer gameplay in the vein of Hearthstone, where players collect and build decks of monsters by taking on other players. 

But even though the gameplay is fairly straightforward, some have been having a difficult time activating their accounts so that they can play the game. It's a pretty simple process to get started, but there are a few hurdles that aren't 100% obvious. 

How to Activate Your Account in Undercards

1. Click register in the upper right-hand corner of the app.

2. Fill in the all of the information and make sure to click that you agree with the general conditions. Mail means email, not your actual address.

3. Click Submit.

4. Check your email. You will receive an email at the address you entered. If you do not find it, check your spam folder. 

5. Click the link in the email.

6. The link will take you to the Undercards website, telling you that your account has been activated. You are now able to sign into your account.

After you have completed step six, you should be ready to start playing Undercards, building your awesome deck of monsters and climbing the ranks.

Note: If you cannot access the Undercards website for any reason, the developer has suggested adding an "s" to the "http" at the beginning of the website URL (https:). This should get you through to the site if you are having problems accessing it. 

Stay tuned to GameSkinny for more news and guides on Undercards

Terra Battle 2 Re-Rolling Guide,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/c/o/v/cov2-4fbeb.jpg hyq8l/terra-battle-2-re-rolling-guide Wed, 27 Sep 2017 16:43:27 -0400 Ty Arthur

Mistwalker's new mobile strategy game, Terra Battle 2, puts you in charge of a party of diverse characters of varying utility, from throwaway units who mostly just take up space to more helpful combatants who can hit many enemies on the grid at once.

As many of the freemium fantasy combat mobile titles are doing these days, Terra Battle 2 features different rankings of characters and items, ranging from the lowly B to the coveted SS. Spending energy lets you forge pacts to acquire new characters and equipment, but the actual draw of each "pact" will be randomized.

You might draw the short end of the stick and end up with a bunch of B class stuff you already have, or you could luck out and get a ton of S and SS class equipment and characters. It's a big gamble, especially at the beginning of the game.

But this Terra Battle 2 Re-Rolling Guide will help you come out on top more often than not. 

 Drawing a B class Hermes

Terra Battle 2 Re-Rolling Cheat

You want the biggest advantage possible right out of the gate so you don't end up having to spend any real money on in-game transactions. With that in mind, there is a way to cheat the Terra Battle 2 system by re-rolling randomized character and item draws when you first get started.

If you got primarily A and B class items during a draw, or only get a single S class draw, for instance, you might want to start over and try again -- even though it is a bit of a pain to do.

After the draw, if you didn't quite like what you got, switch over to your mobile device's "Settings" screen, and then choose "Apps" from the list of options. From there, select the "TerraBattle2" entry so you see a list of options for the app.

 Navigating through Android Settings

With the Terra Battle 2 app data showing, tap "Storage," and then choose "Clear Data." Confirm you want to clear everything out by tapping "Delete."

This option clears out all the associated data on your tablet from the app, but doesn't actually delete the app itself, which is what we want to perform the re-roll. In other words: it's starting you over with a clean slate without having to go through the trouble of uninstalling and reinstalling manually.

With that out of the way, now switch back to the Terra Battle 2 app and it will be just like the first time you opened the app (but without having to download any updates). Unfortunately, you do have to go through the tutorial again (just skip the opening cinematic) and start the first level, but you will have all your starting bonuses to energy again.

Don't forget to go to the Achievements screen, because you get extra energy for the sign-in bonus. If you do everything you can to get bonus energy right off the bat, you should have 60 energy stored up, which is enough for two new draws.

This Terra Battle 2 re-rolling process is fairly time-consuming, taking 5-10 minutes, but it's well worth it if you didn't get much in the way of good gear or units with your initial draws.

 Pulling an SS dagger

Much like rolling your stats in classic RPGs like Baldur's Gate, you can spend as much time as you want continuously re-rolling over and over until you get exactly what you want. You do get new gear and guardians over the course of playing the game, however, so don't get lost spending hours on this nonsense!

Hopefully, it only takes a single re-roll for you to get lucky and hit the character jackpot! What's the best thing you've drawn so far in Terra Battle 2, and how many re-rolls did it take? Let us know in the comments section below!

Still trying to get used to the game's revamped map and combat mechanics? Check out our beginner's Terra Battle 2 tips and tricks guide here.

What's Minecraft's New Plutonium Mode?,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/m/i/n/minecraft-horizontal-key-art-2899e.jpg s4c48/whats-minecrafts-new-plutonium-mode Wed, 27 Sep 2017 15:36:21 -0400 LuckyJorael

New to Minecraft in the 1.2 build 5 update is something under video settings called "Plutonium Mode." Despite the glowing name, the mode isn't anything that adds to your Minecraft experience -- unless you count frames per second meticulously.

Yes, Plutonium Mode is an enhancement to Minecraft's code to ensure the game takes advantage of multiple processor cores. With the Better Together Update streamlining Minecraft across systems and platforms, optimization seems to be central to Mojang's plans for Minecraft, and Plutonium Mode is an experiment in 1.2 build 5.

Users on the Minecraft Forum and SubReddit report that using the mode with newer devices (i.e. anything that has 4 or more cores in the processor) gives them a significant jump in frames per second -- usually 10 to 15 fps, depending on the system. Plutonium Mode is available on every version of Minecraft, but not all users will see a benefit from switching it on.

Players with newer PCs -- the types that can run PUBG in 4K at 120 fps -- probably won't see a difference, since their system is powerful enough to brute force its way past most limitations. Players who use older phones and tablets also won't see an increase in performance, because those devices only have 2 processor cores.

If you have an iPhone 7 or better, iPad Air 2, or an iPad Pro, you'll see an increase in your fps. iPad Minis and anything older won't benefit. Likewise for Kindle Fires from 2013 or earlier: they only have dual-core processors. If you've got an Android tablet or phone, check the specifications to see if your device has a quad-core processor. Most new devices will have chipsets capable of taking advantage of Plutonium Mode. Even my aging Galaxy S5 Active has a quad-core chipset!

u/mojang_tommo confirmed on Reddit that Plutonium Mode is a proof-of-concept addition for the newly-minted Better Together Update, and it will be standard in Minecraft update 1.3: 

1.3 will have a full server thread like Java rather than Plutonium mode, Plutonium mode was a giant hack but it showed that it the server shouldn't be blocking rendering :)

It looks like Minecraft is only going to get smoother, better, and more accessible in the future.

Be sure to check out our other Minecraft guides here

Terra Battle 2 Beginner's Guide to Battle,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/c/o/v/cov-36a37.jpg wbmn2/terra-battle-2-beginners-guide-to-battle Wed, 27 Sep 2017 15:27:09 -0400 Ty Arthur

Mistwalker's follow-up to the lauded mobile title Terra Battle, Terra Battle 2, is here, improving on many facets of the previous game and offering more tactical fantasy combat.

Although it seems weird that the developer went from epic multi-disc RPGs like Lost Odyssey to mobile games, I guess that's just the way the industry went, and if you've got an Android or iOS device, you're in for a treat.

But to get started in the game, you'll need to know what's new in Terra Battle 2, from movement to mechanics and more. Let's dive in. 

Terra Battle 2 Movement

This time around, Terra Battle includes an overland map to traverse on your own in all-new storyline chapters. While this is a welcome addition, you may be wondering why you can't get past a certain level even though you've done everything there. The story levels are currently capped, with a new one set to be released each week, so check back every few days for new content!

Now that you're on a map, keep in mind you have a five-second second limit to movement once you tap your group. While heading across the map, you should maneuver to the shiny dots for the treasure, and of course, into enemy configurations to initiate battles.

Keep in mind that you can turn the magnet feature off, and then only one character at a time moves around the map instead of dragging your full party. Why do this? Because battles start based on how the characters are arranged on the level map, so you can start in an advantageous position for quick attacks right away.

This can completely change how a battle goes, so plan ahead instead of rushing straight into combat. If you surround your enemies, you are in a much better position to get in the required (and advantageous) pincer attacks (see below).

Terra Battle 2 Combat Strategy

Before battle begins, hit the blue sword to start the attack, the middle red icon to use a skill like placing bombs, or the green chest to pull up your items. During the actual battle, you have a six-second movement clock once you tap a character, but you've got all the time you want to strategize before you start moving, so plan ahead.

The grid combat works by moving enemies and allies around in a different way than you might expect. Bumping your unit into enemy or ally tiles in combat shifts them to the direction you are moving. Use this forced movement to your advantage to flank an enemy on any adjacent tiles, initiating an attack (called a "pincer").

All of the enemies between a pincer position get hit, and that's where the strategy lies.

 Lining up an attack on an enemy tile

Your goal here is to attack as many enemies as you possibly can at once, maneuvering them all into a line and then placing your troops on either side in any direction. That's why you need to think ahead -- to make sure you can actually get enemies into a line within the six-second cap.

While placing pincers, pay attention to which characters, like Sarah, have mega range abilities. When Sarah is involved in a pincer, she will attack all enemies in a grid around her, and not just the enemies directly between her and the other ally in the pincer.

If you've strategically moved the enemies first, you can potentially hit all enemies at once this way. Different characters have mega range in differing square patterns -- check the menu for each one to see how they should be placed for maximum effectiveness.

Terra Battle 2 Combat Tips

Obviously, you can't make a flanking pincer with only one unit, so if you get whittled down to only one character left during the fight, you lose the battle.

Some enemies (those outlined in purple, like bosses) can't be maneuvered around in this manner, however. For bosses, in particular, pay attention to their movement patterns, as this indicates where they will attack and how many tiles they will hit. They have a very clear repeating pattern, so you can avoid getting hit and maneuver yourself for an attack in the next turn.

Other than that, there are just a couple of things to keep in mind to dominate in any given battle:

  • Pay attention to individual skills: Khem, for instance, adds Mega Heal to an attack, healing an allied character who is also involved in the attack
  • Chain attacks as often as possible, as this raises your stats and helps level your equipment
  • Attacking the same element results in half damage, while attacking the opposite element gives double damage
  • Maneuver enemies into bombs or other obstacles placed with skills beforehand
  • Be on the lookout for power ups for your own squad, such as placing your second character in a pincer next to the glowing blue "P" icon to increase attack power

 Chaining together skills

That's all the basic tactical knowledge you need to get started with Terra Battle 2! Have any other tips for us? Let us know your best strategy, and stay tuned for further guides covering Terra Battle 2 re-rolling and tier lists for the best character combos.

Complete Weapons and Attachments Guide for PUBG,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/u/n/t/untitled-1cf80.jpg eza7w/complete-weapons-and-attachments-guide-for-pubg Wed, 27 Sep 2017 12:28:35 -0400 Sergey_3847

Even though PlayerUnknown's Battlegrounds receives new updates every week, they are mainly focused on fixing bugs and adding minor changes to the game's core gameplay. Once in a while, though, PUBG's developers add new items and weapons to the battle royale free-for-all, with the latest weapon coming in the form of the Mini 14 sniper rifle

And that's just one of 33 other weapons in the game. So if you're a new or returning player, and you are not fully aware of all the available weapons and attachments in PUBG, then here's a weapons and attachments guide to give you a complete picture of what the game can offer as of September 2017 update (patch

PUBG Assault Rifles


  • Hit Damage: 48
  • Initial Bullet Speed: 715
  • Body Hit Impact Power: 10,000
  • Zero Range: 100-400
  • Ammo Per Mag: 30
  • Time Between Shots: 0.100s
  • Firing Modes: Single, Auto

  • Hit Damage: 48
  • Initial Bullet Speed: 715
  • Body Hit Impact Power: 10,000
  • Zero Range: 100-400
  • Ammo Per Mag: 30
  • Time Between Shots: 0.08s
  • Firing Modes: Single, Auto

  • Hit Damage: 41
  • Initial Bullet Speed: 900
  • Body Hit Impact Power: 8,000
  • Zero Range: 100-500
  • Ammo Per Mag: 30
  • Time Between Shots: 0.075s
  • Firing Modes: Single, Burst

  • Hit Damage: 41
  • Initial Bullet Speed: 880
  • Body Hit Impact Power: 3,500
  • Zero Range: 100-600
  • Ammo Per Mag: 30
  • Time Between Shots: 0.086s
  • Firing Modes: Single, Auto

  • Hit Damage: 41
  • Initial Bullet Speed: 870
  • Body Hit Impact Power: 9,000
  • Zero Range: 100-600
  • Ammo Per Mag: 30
  • Time Between Shots: 0.096s
  • Firing Modes: Single, Auto

PUBG Melee Weapons


  • Damage: 60
  • Impact: 6,000
  • Hit Range Leeway: 3,000




  • Damage: 60
  • Impact: 6,000
  • Hit Range Leeway: 3,000




  • Damage: 80
  • Impact: 40,000
  • Hit Range Leeway: 3,000




  • Damage: 60
  • Impact: 6,000
  • Hit Range Leeway: 3,000



PUBG's Miscellanous Weapons


  • Hit Damage: 105
  • Initial Bullet Speed: 160
  • Body Hit Impact Power: 8,000
  • Zero Range: 25-25
  • Ammo Per Mag: 1
  • Time Between Shots: 0.075s
  • Firing Modes: Single

  • Hit Damage: 44
  • Initial Bullet Speed: 915
  • Body Hit Impact Power: 10,000
  • Zero Range: 100-500
  • Ammo Per Mag: 100
  • Time Between Shots: 0.075s
  • Firing Modes: Auto

PUBG Pistols


  • Hit Damage: 19
  • Initial Bullet Speed: 375
  • Body Hit Impact Power: 7,000
  • Zero Range: 25-25
  • Ammo Per Mag: 17
  • Time Between Shots: 0.06s
  • Firing Modes: Single, Auto

  • Hit Damage: 35
  • Initial Bullet Speed: 250
  • Body Hit Impact Power: 6,000
  • Zero Range: 25-25
  • Ammo Per Mag: 7
  • Time Between Shots: 0.110s
  • Firing Modes: Single

  • Hit Damage: 29
  • Initial Bullet Speed: 380
  • Body Hit Impact Power: 7,000
  • Zero Range: 25-25
  • Ammo Per Mag: 15
  • Time Between Shots: 0.135s
  • Firing Modes: Single

  • Hit Damage: 46
  • Initial Bullet Speed: 330
  • Body Hit Impact Power: 8,000
  • Zero Range: 25-25
  • Ammo Per Mag: 7
  • Time Between Shots: 0.400s
  • Firing Modes: Single

PUBG Shotguns


  • Hit Damage: 22
  • Initial Bullet Speed: 350
  • Body Hit Impact Power: 5,000
  • Zero Range: 25-25
  • Ammo Per Mag: 5
  • Time Between Shots: 0.250s
  • Firing Modes: Single
  • Shot Count: 9

  • Hit Damage: 25
  • Initial Bullet Speed: 360
  • Body Hit Impact Power: 5,000
  • Zero Range: 25-25
  • Ammo Per Mag: 5
  • Time Between Shots: 0.750s
  • Firing Modes: Single
  • Shot Count: 9

  • Hit Damage: 25
  • Initial Bullet Speed: 370
  • Body Hit Impact Power: 5,000
  • Zero Range: 25-25
  • Ammo Per Mag: 2
  • Time Between Shots: 0.200s
  • Firing Modes: Single
  • Shot Count: 9

PUBG Sniper Rifles


  • Hit Damage: 132
  • Initial Bullet Speed: 910
  • Body Hit Impact Power: 40,000
  • Zero Range: 100-1000
  • Ammo Per Mag: 5
  • Time Between Shots: 1.850s
  • Firing Modes: Single
Karabiner 98 Kurz

  • Hit Damage: 72
  • Initial Bullet Speed: 760
  • Body Hit Impact Power: 16,000
  • Zero Range: 100-600
  • Ammo Per Mag: 5
  • Time Between Shots: 1.900s
  • Firing Modes: Single

  • Hit Damage: 84
  • Initial Bullet Speed: 790
  • Body Hit Impact Power: 20,000
  • Zero Range: 100-800
  • Ammo Per Mag: 5
  • Time Between Shots: 1.800s
  • Firing Modes: Single
Mini 14

  • Hit Damage: 44
  • Initial Bullet Speed: 990
  • Body Hit Impact Power: 10,000
  • Zero Range: 100-600
  • Ammo Per Mag: 20
  • Time Between Shots: 0.100s
  • Firing Modes: Single

  • Hit Damage: 60
  • Initial Bullet Speed: 853
  • Body Hit Impact Power: 20,000
  • Zero Range: 100-800
  • Ammo Per Mag: 10
  • Time Between Shots: 0.090s
  • Firing Modes: Single, Auto

  • Hit Damage: 55
  • Initial Bullet Speed: 800
  • Body Hit Impact Power: 20,000
  • Zero Range: 100-800
  • Ammo Per Mag: 10
  • Time Between Shots: 0.090s
  • Firing Modes: Single

  • Hit Damage: 38
  • Initial Bullet Speed: 330
  • Body Hit Impact Power: 20,000
  • Zero Range: 100-100
  • Ammo Per Mag: 10
  • Time Between Shots: 0.086s
  • Firing Modes: Single, Auto

PUBG Submachine Guns

Kriss Vector

  • Hit Damage: 31
  • Initial Bullet Speed: 300
  • Body Hit Impact Power: 7,000
  • Zero Range: 50-50
  • Ammo Per Mag: 13
  • Time Between Shots: 0.055s
  • Firing Modes: Single, Burst, Auto
Micro Uzi

  • Hit Damage: 23
  • Initial Bullet Speed: 350
  • Body Hit Impact Power: 5,000
  • Zero Range: 100-200
  • Ammo Per Mag: 25
  • Time Between Shots: 0.048s
  • Firing Modes: Single, Auto
Tommy Gun

  • Hit Damage: 38
  • Initial Bullet Speed: 280
  • Body Hit Impact Power: 7,000
  • Zero Range: 100-200
  • Ammo Per Mag: 100
  • Time Between Shots: 0.086s
  • Firing Modes: Single, Auto

  • Hit Damage: 35
  • Initial Bullet Speed: 400
  • Body Hit Impact Power: 7,000
  • Zero Range: 100-300
  • Ammo Per Mag: 30
  • Time Between Shots: 0.092s
  • Firing Modes: Single, Burst, Auto

PUBG's Throwable Weapons

Frag Grenade

  • Throw Time: 1.3s
  • Throw Cooldown Duration: 1s
  • Fire Delay: 0.4s
  • Activation Time Limit: 0s
  • Detonation: Delay
  • Explosion Delay: 5s
Molotov Cocktail

  • Throw Time: 0.85s
  • Throw Cooldown Duration: 1s
  • Fire Delay: 0.4s
  • Activation Time Limit: 0s
  • Detonation: Impact, Delay
  • Explosion Delay: 5s
Smoke Grenade

  • Throw Time: 1.3s
  • Throw Cooldown Duration: 1s
  • Fire Delay: 0.4s
  • Activation Time Limit: 5s
  • Detonation: No Explosion


Stun Grenade

  • Throw Time: 1.3s
  • Throw Cooldown Duration: 1s
  • Fire Delay: 0.4s
  • Activation Time Limit: 0s
  • Detonation: Delay
  • Explosion Delay: 2.5s

PUBG Weapon Attachments

Name Attaches to
Angled Foregrip (AR, SMG, DMR) M416, SCAR-L, UMP9, SKS 10
Quiver for Crossbow Crossbow 14
Vertical Foregrip (AR, SMG, DMR) M416, SCAR-L, UMP9, KRISS Vector, SKS, Tommy Gun 10


Name Attaches to
Extended Mag Drum 50 -- 0
Extended Mag for AR, S12K + 8 or 40 AKM, M16A4, M416, SCAR-L, S12K, Groza 15
Extended Mag for Pistols + 12, 20 or 25 P1911, P18C 10
Extended Mag for SMGs + 25, 35, 40 or 50 Micro UZI, UMP9, KRISS Vector, Tommy Gun 13
Extended Mag for Snipers, DMR + 7, 20 or 30 M24, AWM, SKS, VSS, Mk14 EBR‎, Mini 14‎ 17
Extended QuickDraw Mag for AR, S12K + 8 or 40 AKM, M16A4, M416, SCAR-L, S12K, Groza 20
Extended QuickDraw Mag for Pistols + 12, 20 or 25 P1911, P92, P18C 13
Extended QuickDraw Mag for SMGs + 25, 35, 40 or 50 Micro UZI, UMP9, KRISS Vector, Tommy Gun 17
Extended QuickDraw Mag for Snipers, DMR + 7, 20 or 30 M24, AWM, SKS, VSS, Mk14 EBR‎, Mini 14 23
QuickDraw Mag for AR, S12K AKM, M16A4, M416, SCAR-L, S12K, Groza 14
QuickDraw Mag for Pistols P1911, P92, P18C 9
QuickDraw Mag for SMGs Micro UZI, UMP9, KRISS Vector, Tommy Gun 12
QuickDraw Mag for Snipers, DMR M24, AWM, SKS, VSS, Mk14 EBR‎, Mini 14‎ 16
Name Attaches to
Choke for S1897, S686 S1897, S686 5
Compensator for AR, S12K AKM, M16A4, M416, SCAR-L, S12K 10
Compensator for SMG Micro UZI, UMP9, Vector 8
Compensator for Snipers M24, AWM, SKS, Kar98k,
Mk14 EBR, Mini 14
Flash Hider for AR, S12K AKM, M16A4, M416, SCAR-L‎ 10
Flash Hider for SMG Micro UZI, UMP9, Vector 8
Flash Hider for Snipers M24, AWM, SKS, Kar98k,
Mk14 EBR, Mini 14
Suppressor for AR, S12K AKM, M16A4, M416, SCAR-L, S12K, Groza 20
Suppressor for Pistol P1911, P92, R1895, P18C 10
Suppressor for SMG Micro UZI, UMP9, Tommy Gun, KRISS Vector 15
Suppressor for Snipers M24, AWM, SKS, Kar98k,
Mk14 EBR‎, Mini 14
Name Attaches to
15x PM II Scope AKM, M16A4, M416, SCAR-L, SKS, S12K, M249, Kar98k, M24, AWM, Mk14 EBR‎, Mini 14 20
2x Aimpoint Scope UMP9, AKM, M16A4, M416, SCAR-L, SKS, M249, Kar98k, M24, AWM, KRISS Vector, OTs-14 Groza,
Mk14 EBR‎, Mini 14
4x ACOG Scope  UMP9, AKM, M16A4, M416, SCAR-L, SKS, S12K, M249, Kar98k, M24, AWM, Groza, SKS, Mk14 EBR‎, Mini 14 15
8x CQBSS Scope AKM, M16A4, M416, SCAR-L, SKS, S12K, M249, Kar98k, M24, AWM, Mk14 EBR‎, Mini 14 20
Dot Sight (Crossbow Default) Crossbow 10
Holographic Sight UMP9, AKM, M16A4, M416, SCAR-L, SKS, S12K, M249, Kar98k, M24, AWM, Crossbow, KRISS Vector, OTs-14 Groza, SKS, Mk14 EBR‎, Mini 14 10
Red Dot Sight UMP9, AKM, M16A4, M416, SCAR-L, S12K, M249, Kar98k, M24, AWM, SKS, Crossbow, KRISS Vector, OTs-14 Groza, Glock, P1911, P92, Mk14 EBR‎, Mini 14 10
Name Attaches to
Bullet Loops for Kar98k Karabiner 98 Kurz 15
Bullet Loops for S1897, S686 S1897, S686 15
Cheek Pad for Sniper Rifle M24, AWM, Kar98k, SKS, VSS,
Mk14 EBR
Stock for Micro UZI Micro UZI 10
Tactical Stock for M416, Vector M416, Vector 12


That is it for the complete list of weapons and attachments in PUBG as of September 2017 update (patch For more PUBG guides, please follow the links below:

Stellaris Guide: Contingency Bug Blocking Ghost Signal,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/u/n/t/untitled-85762.jpg hsup2/stellaris-guide-contingency-bug-blocking-ghost-signal Tue, 26 Sep 2017 10:30:21 -0400 Sergey_3847

The second story pack for Stellaris, Synthetic Dawn, introduces various robotic races within an intergalactic AI empire. Each droid race has its own unique personalities, dialogue sets and interactions with entities -- such as the Contingency and Fallen Machine Empires.

During the Contingency crisis, you will be given a special project to block the Ghost Signal, but there is a bug associated with this action when you're playing synth species, such as exterminator bots. The game crashes right after you begin blocking the ghost signal research. It may also happen when you complete the ghost signal block. 

Either way, this Stellaris bug is entirely technical, so it is safe to assume that a fix will be released soon by the developers. For now, you can use the method described below as a temporary solution.

How to Fix the Contingency Bug in Stellaris

The problem occurs right after the Ghost Signal window pops up on your screen (when you try to hover your mouse cursor over the popup notification) -- and as a result, the game crashes.

So in order to evade this fatal interaction, you need to disable the event notifications in the game settings. Here's how you do it:

  1. In the main menu, go to "Settings"
  2. Choose the "Gameplay" option
  3. Disable the "Event Popup/Auto-pause" option

You won't see the popups anymore in Synthetic Dawn, but this will allow you to mitigate the game crash after the Ghost Signal is blocked. When you're done with the project, you can re-enable the event popups and continue to play the game as normal.

Alternative Method to Fixing the Contingency Bug in Stellaris

Some players have successfully evaded this game-crashing bug by controlling the game with only their keyboard -- leaving the mouse untouched. When the ghost signal window pops up, just press the "Enter" button on your keyboard, and you should be able to keep playing Stellaris.

In any case, don't forget to save and load the game before starting the event, so you can try different methods without wasting your time. And hopefully, that official patch will come sooner rather than later.


Did you find any other way of mitigating the Contingency bug in Stellaris? Let us know in the comments section below.

In the meantime, if you're looking for more Stellaris guides at GameSkinny, then you can find them right here:

Divinity: Original Sin 2 -- How to Get to Bloodmoon Island and Complete the All in the Family Quest,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/d/o/s/dos2-banner-e5527.png 57pev/divinity-original-sin-2-how-to-get-to-bloodmoon-island-and-complete-the-all-in-the-family-quest Mon, 25 Sep 2017 17:01:04 -0400 Kengaskhan

While Divinity: Original Sin 2 may not necessarily be an open-world game, it offers a lot of open-ended gameplay. This leads to a lot of nonlinearity and not a lot of hand-holding, which makes it pretty easy to get stuck on certain quests.

All in the Family is a two-part quest that fits the bill -- and if you’ve been having trouble with it, there are a few solutions to its many obstacles. In this quick guide, we'll go over how to complete All in the Family and how to get to Bloodmoon Island so you can see this questline through. 

Note: If you haven't already done so, you'll need to have completed Powerful Awakening in order to finish this quest.

How to Complete the "All in the Family" Quest in Divinity: Original Sin 2

Step 1: Talk to Tarquin and Access the Crypt of Johanna Surrey

To begin All in the Family, you'll want to find Tarquin -- who's standing outside the gate of Stonegarden. Once he's given you the quest, you'll need to figure out a way to get into the crypt of Johanna Surrey (which will be marked on your map) to retrieve a special artefact.

The easiest way to get into the crypt is to have a character with 4+ Thievery take a lockpick to the door. If none of your characters are skilled thieves, however, you'll need to retrieve the Shadowed Tomb Key from Qanna.

Ideally, you'll have a character with decent enough Thievery to pickpocket the key from the sourceress or high enough Persuasion to convince her to just hand you the key -- otherwise, you're going to be in for a fairly tough fight.

Step 2: Solve the Crypt Puzzles

Once inside, you'll need to make your way through a series of chambers to get to the artefact.

In the first chamber, you simply have to flip two switches. You'll find the switches when you get near them -- so if you're having trouble locating them, just hug the walls and walk around.

The second chamber is separated into two rooms -- a room with a pressure plate and a room with a sarcophogus. It may seem empty at first, but you need to set the puzzle up before you can progress.

First, you need to use Spirit Vision in the sarcophagus room (you'll have learned the skill from completing the Powerful Awakening quest). Three ethereal levers should appear on the wall.

Then, you have to send one of your party members into the other room to stand on the pressure plate. While they won't trigger any traps, they will be taking some damage, so you'll want to pick one of your tougher companions for this job.

After you've done all that, you can commence with the puzzle. To complete it, you need to pull the levers in the correct sequence.

Each lever is tied to a specific element, and pulling a lever will flood the area around the pressure plate with its associated element. Your goal is to produce holy water, and you can accomplish that by pulling the levers in this order:

Middle > Left > Right

Once you’ve created a pool of holy water, the sarcophagus will shift to the side, revealing a trapdoor leading to the treasure chamber. Inside the treasure room, you’ll find the artefact  -- or, at least, the first half of the artefact.

Be wary, though, as you’re going to have to fight your way out once you pick up the artefact piece. However, you can circumvent the fight by destroying all the statues in the chamber before you touch the artefact.

Step 3: Travel to Bloodmoon Island

When you return to Tarquin with the artefact, he’ll tell you that the other piece is located on Bloodmoon Island. You need to travel there and retrieve it to complete the quest. But for those of you who haven’t yet been, it can be a very tricky task penetrating the deathfog that surrounds the isle.

The first method requires that you have an Undead character in your party. Have them take the ferry through the deathfog and activate the waypoint once they reach Bloodmoon Island. The rest of your party will be able to safely cross by using the waypoint.

The second method requires the Spirit Vision skill, which you’ll use to spiritually “repair” the bridge that linked Bloodmoon Island to the rest of Reaper’s Coast.

While the two parts of the bridge still won’t be connected, you can jump or teleport to move from platform to platform. You can either move your entire party across the bridge, or you can send one character to activate the waypoint for the rest of your party.

Step 4: Search for the Other Artefact

It’s a pretty straightforward task to find the second half of the artefact once you’ve reached Bloodmoon Island. In the northeast corner of the isle lies a hatch -- however, you’ll need a character with enough Wits to spot it.

If you’re having trouble finding the hatch, you can use the Peace of Mind skill to boost a character’s Wits.

Once you're inside the hatch, you’ll find a ton of loot...but no artefact. You’ll need a character to pass a second Wits check to spot a hidden door between two of the bookshelves. Behind the door lies the second artefact.

Then, all you have to do is return to Tarquin. If he’s not in front of Stonegarden, you’ll find him on the Lady Vengeance.


With this guide, you shouldn't have any problems working your way through the All in the Family quest, nor should you have any trouble navigating to the mysterious Bloodmoon Island. However, if you've got any other solutions that I missed, let me know!

If you're having trouble with other quests or progression aspects of the game, be sure to check out the rest of our Divinity: Original Sin 2 guides for more tips and tricks!

RO: Idle Poring Guide - What Is Rebirth and When Can You Do It?,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/r/e/b/rebirth-header-49589.png km4j0/ro-idle-poring-guide-what-is-rebirth-and-when-can-you-do-it Mon, 25 Sep 2017 16:49:08 -0400 Ashley Gill

There are a few features in Ragnarok Online: Idle Poring that mention Rebirth, but the game doesn't explain it at all until you get to that point. Here we're going to go over everything you need to know about it, including what it is and what it does for you.

If you're familiar with idle or tap games, then the concept of Rebirth should be familiar to you. Your character's progress is essentially reset with the promise of benefits, and in Idle Poring there are plenty of benefits. We'll go over those in a second.

As Idle Poring is basically a reskin of another game, Idle Monster: Nonstop, the two have virtually identical systems. If you ever went through with Reincarnation in Idle Monster, you'll be right at home with the system in Idle Poring.

Let's do the good news before the bad and go over the benefits of putting your characters through Rebirth.

1st Rebirth Benefits

You wouldn't reset if there weren't some seriously good rewards for doing so, and that is exactly the case.

Various features unlock with each Rebirth, but here we're sticking to the first one:

  • Your character's base level cap is increased from 80 to 100
  • You obtain a new skill
  • Your character is granted 100 additional attribute points to distribute
  • 1 orange pet egg

Along with the above, you gain Diamonds based on the amount of Zeny sitting around on your character. If you have 0 ~ 200,000 Zeny on-hand you will receive 50 Diamonds, 200,001 ~ 1,000,000 Zeny will grant 100 Diamonds, and over 1 million will grant you 200 Diamonds.

The first Rebirth is worth it, but the later ones are even moreso. Later Rebirths will grant you combat pet transformations, classes, more orange pet eggs, increased level caps and attribute points, and further features.

When Can You Rebirth?

There are three requirements that have to be met before you can Rebirth your character:

  • Your character must be base level 80
  • All of its equipment must be refined up to level 80
  • Your character must have at least one pet with 4 hearts

That's all simple enough, and mostly boils down to a time investment. Getting to base level 80 and getting all of your equipment refined up to 80 is both a time-consuming and expensive task. SVIP players will be able to reach this point much faster than VIP and free players.

Once you've grinded your way up and chugged through your first Rebirth, the second one can be undergone at level 100. Further Rebirths require higher base levels and refinements.

What Rebirth Resets

Let's go over the bad before the good, shall we? When Rebirthing, a number of things are reset or stop. These include:

  • Your character and job level reset to 1(but you cannot change your job after Rebirth)
  • Attribute allocations
  • Your stage progress is reset
  • All your equipment will automatically be smelted and turned into points
  • Any designs you've found via Expeditions will be disappear
  • Expeditions themselves will be cancelled with no rewards
  • Skill slots will be reset
  • Pet slots will be reset

What Rebirth Doesn't Reset

It does reset a lot, but some things stay the same:

  • Pets stay the same
  • Skill unlocks stay at the same point
  • Gems stay
  • Neither Honor nor Diamonds are removed
  • Special items like Attribute Books, Pet Potions, and so on remain

It seems items pets can get from expeditions are not removed, such as pet potions and candy, so keep that in mind.

There isn't a ton to know about Idle Poring's Rebirth system, but if you're planning for the long game, you need to know about Rebirthing and what it can do for you. With each one comes the benefits both above -- and otherwise, and those stressing about their stats will be happy to find a stat reset.

If this guide helped you out (I hope it did), check out my other RO: Idle Poring guides to keep your grind game strong and your character stronger.

Tekken 7 PC or PS4 -- Which One is Better?,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/t/e/k/tekken-c4b24.jpg qepsl/tekken-7-pc-or-ps4-which-one-is-better Mon, 25 Sep 2017 16:25:44 -0400 Kieran Desmond

Bandai Namco's latest entry into the Tekken franchise has been rated pretty highly across the board. So if you want to pick it up, the only real decision you'll have to make is which platform you should play it on -- PC or PS4?

Gameplay-wise, the two versions of Tekken 7 are basically identical, with both versions having aggregate scores of 82 on Metacritic. So to decide which version is best for you, we'll take a closer look at some of the other aspects to find out which platform offers the better play experience overall.

The aspects of the game we'll be looking at are the online community, graphics, extra features, and of course, the price.

Online Community


If the Tekken series has a home, it's most certainly the PlayStation. With the majority of the Tekken games being exclusive to the four main iterations of the system, that is where the fanbase primarily rests. If you want to play Tekken 7 for its competitive online multiplayer, then the PS4 is going to be your best choice. The competitive Tekken community is almost exclusive to the PS4, and all face-to-face tournaments are played on the system.


The PC's community isn't non-existent -- in fact, it should be quite vibrant for a long time. But historically, the community around fighting games tends not to last as long on PC as it does on consoles. And the PC community will largely be based around mods rather than the competitive side that the console community focuses on. 



The PlayStation 4 version of Tekken 7 looks and plays fantastically. At 900p at 60 frames per second, it runs as intended and looks beautiful while doing so. 


The PC takes this one hands down. If you want to play this game with the best visuals possible, then it's a no-brainer to play on PC. Running in 4K at 60 frames per second, you can behold Heihachi's weird hair wings in all their glory, just as Bandai Namco intended.

Extra Features


For whatever reason, this version of Tekken 7 has an exclusive PlayStation VR mode built-in and ready to go if you own a PSVR headset. The novelty of playing in VR and looking at character models wears thin real quick, and doesn't give you much reason to go back after a couple of tries.

Personally I don't feel that the exclusive inclusion of a VR mode should sway your opinion towards getting the PS4 version, as it really doesn't bring anything unique or exciting to the table.


As with almost any PC release these days, modding is big part of why many gamers stick to playing on their desktops -- and Tekken 7 is no different.

If you're into mods, the PC version is for you. Even in these early stages of its life, I've already come across a few different mods for this game that range from graphical upgrades and music enhancements to a bikini outfit for Leo and the not-so-subtly named "Sexy Sweat Mod".



Going for a pretty standard $49.99, the PS4 version costs what you'd expect a AAA title to cost. However, playing online requires PS+, which'll set you back $59.99 for 12 months. That's a fairly big investment for one game -- but if you want to play competitively and be part of the PlayStation Tekken community, then that's how much it's gonna cost you.


The PC version, on the other, hand is $10 cheaper than its console counterpart and requires no subscription fee for online play. Not only does the PC have those benefits going for it, but the PC version also goes on sale more often than the PS4 version.


Before we make a final decision about which platform you should choose for your copy of Tekken 7, let's quickly recap what we've gone over so far:

PS4 Version:

  • Thriving competitive scene 
  • 900p at 60fps
  • Built-in PSVR functionality
  • $49.99 (plus $59.99 PS+ subscription for online play)

PC Version:

  • Booming modding scene
  • 4k resolution at 60fps
  • Unlimited extras and improvements via mods
  • $39.99 and often on sale

Really, the verdict on whether PC or PS4 is better for playing Tekken 7 depends on what you want to get out of the game as a player. If want to play competitively, be involved with the biggest Tekken community around, and have no qualms about paying top dollar for the game, then you should play Tekken 7 on the PlayStation 4.

But if all you want is to experience the story of Tekken 7 in the most visually impressive way, whilst paying less and having access to mods, then  PC is the platform for you. I would wait until the game goes on sale before snatching it up faster than a Mishima family dinner descends into chaos.


Hopefully this has helped you to decide which platform is best for your Tekken 7 experience! Be sure to leave a comment down below to let me know which platform you chose and why.

Stay tuned to GameSkinny for more on Tekken and be sure to check out our other Tekken 7 Guides to make sure you're dominating the competition no matter what platform you're on.

Divinity Original Sin 2: How to Complete Counting Chickens and What to Do With Peeper,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/d/o/s/dos2-0b718.jpg ohvjq/divinity-original-sin-2-how-to-complete-counting-chickens-and-what-to-do-with-peeper Mon, 25 Sep 2017 10:41:39 -0400 Skrain

Divinity Original Sin 2 has been a massive success, and its popularity seems to be growing by the day as players embark on their own adventures and take part in the many, many quests that this cRPG has to offer.

One interesting (and potentially annoying) quest that players have come across in the game -- Counting Your Chickens -- has been garnering some interest in community discussions, because it's proven to be a bit hard to complete. During the course of this quest, you could get stuck with a particularly foul (fowl) creature named Peeper with no apparent way to get rid of him.

But don't worry -- in this Divinity Original Sin 2 guide, we're going to go over how you can complete this quest and remove your newfound follower in no time. (If you've already completed the initial stages of this quest, you can jump straight to getting rid of Peeper.)

How to Complete the Counting Chickens Quest

There are three NPCs you'll have to deal with in order to begin (and eventually finish) this quest. Fortunately, it's all straightforward and easy to follow if you listen to what they have to say. 

Starting the Quest

To start the Counting Chickens quest, you'll need to speak to Big Marge the hen out in Reaper's Coast. In order to talk to her, you'll need the Pet Pals talent.

Big Marge is the leader of the chickens found at the Reapers Coast. During your conversation with her, you find out that all of the hens eggs have been stolen. This will proc a new marker on your map that shows you where to go next.

Retrieving the Eggs

A short travel north, following your newly added map marker, will lead to an encounter with a Voidwoken. Take it down in whatever way you and your party can. 

After defeating the Voidwoken, you'll discover that all of the eggs except for one have been tainted by the void. Bring this lone egg survivor back to Big Marge and she'll reward you with the location of a treasure behind the hen coop. Dig up your treasure, then continue your adventures as you would normally.

How to Get Rid of Peeper

After some time has passed, your next trip to Reaper's Coast will have an unfortunate surprise. Upon your return, you'll find that the hens have been slaughtered. But there is one survivor -- Peeper, the voidling chick. Despite having just brutally murdered his fellow chickens, he's perfectly friendly toward you and will follow you wherever you go. 

If you're cool with the constant company of a murderous chick, then congratulations! You have a new pet. But if you don't want little Peeper following you around all the time, there's only one way to get rid of him. 

While standing at the site where the hens were slaughtered, you'll want to activate Spirit Vision. This allows you to see the spirit of Big Marge, who sends you on a quest to seek out the void chick's father, the Magicockerel. 

Following your quest marker will lead you to the Magicockerel, who resides at the coordinates X:437, Y:304. Upon speaking to him, he demands that you kill the void chick because he does not recognize it as his son, but as a killer. 

Kill or Spare Peeper

After speaking with the Magicockerel, are two options you can take -- either kill Peeper, or refuse and spare the creature's life. 

If you choose to kill Peeper, you'll be given a reward of your choice. And an additional chest will spawn next to the Magicockerel that contains at least one Epic and Legendary item. 

Taking pity of Peeper and refusing to kill him transforms him into a Voidwoken Hatchling. Upon transformation, Peeper spawns dozens of other chicks that you must fight. Once you've wiped them out, you'll get a loot chest like the one described above. 


That wraps up this neat little joke quest. Overall, it's not a ton of effort to get some potentially fantastic loot. It's a good thing you didn't decide to eat the egg when you were bringing it back to Marge, right?

If you need more help in your adventures, check out the rest of our Divinity: Original Sin 2 guides for all our tips and tricks:

How to Get Elite Tokens in Madden 18 -- And What They’re For,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/m/a/d/madden-346e3.JPG fmwk3/how-to-get-elite-tokens-in-madden-18-and-what-theyre-for Sat, 23 Sep 2017 17:10:05 -0400 Kieran Desmond

If you want to get the best players, coaches, stadiums, and uniforms in Madden 18s MUT mode, you’re going to need Elite Tokens. It’s going to take some work and some serious coin spending to get everything you want, however, so read on to find out what Elite Tokens are, what you can use them for, and how you can get them.

What Are Elite Tokens and What Are They Used For?

Elite Tokens are currently the highest tier of Team Tokens, above Silver and Gold. Unlike Silver and Gold Team Tokens, Elite Tokens are not team specific and can be universally used for all Elite tier upgrades in the game.

Elite Tokens are the main consumables that you’ll need when upgrading your team’s uniforms, coaches, and stadiums to tier 3. Upgrading any of these teams’ sets gives players of that team a boost in Team Training Chemistry, which improves the performance of those players.

For example, if you have a few Steelers players in your squad, then upgrading Mike Tomlin or Heinz Field will be beneficial to those players. But if you don’t have any Steelers players, then it would be pointless to do so.

In order to upgrade any of these to tier 3, you’ll need to have the tier 2 version of the card you want to upgrade as well as 3 Elite Tokens.

How Do You Get Elite Tokens in Madden 18?

In the Upgrade Sets menu, you’ll find the Team Tokens section which lays out exactly how to get Team Silver, Team Gold, and Elite Tokens. This is what you need to trade in for Elite Tokens:

  • 1x 84-85 OVR Elite Player
  • 2x 82-83 OVR Elite Players
  • 2x 80-81 OVR Elite Players
  • Any Silver Team Token
  • Any Gold Team Token

As you can see, Elite Tokens do not come cheap. 84-85 rated Elites sell for over 20,000 coins, 82-83 rated Elite players are usually in the region of 10-20,000, and 80-81s are on the lower end, selling for a couple thousand coins. That’s already a lot of coins, and that’s without taking the Silver and Gold Team Tokens into account.

In order to get a Silver Token you need to trade in:

  • 5x 65-69 OVR Silver Players
  • 5x 60-64 OVR Silver Players

They'll also all need to be for the team specific, so by trading in 10 of the correct Silver Cowboys players for example, you'll receive a Cowboys Silver Token.

Same goes for Gold Tokens too, but you'll obviously need to trade in higher rated players. Gold Tokens require:

  • 5x 75-79 OVR Gold Players
  • 5x 70-74 OVR Gold Players

This means that in order to get your hands on just 1 Elite Token you'll need to trade in 25 players of varying quality, which can cost a whole load of coins. I recommend waiting until players are cheaper before attempting to buy players for this purpose, and also buying the cheapest players possible.

That's how to get Elite Tokens in Madden 18. If there's another method that I've missed, let me know in the comments section below.

For more on Madden 18, stay tuned to GameSkinny and check out some of our other Madden 18 Guides!

How to Find Leviathan Raid Chests in Destiny 2,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/l/e/v/leviathan-raid-a12d6.jpg a4s14/how-to-find-leviathan-raid-chests-in-destiny-2 Sat, 23 Sep 2017 17:07:04 -0400 Kieran Desmond

Destiny 2’s Leviathan Raid is a treasure trove of secrets and loot. There are nine named chests spread across the Underbelly Labyrinth that contain Raid reputation tokens, Legendary Engrams, and also have a high chance of dropping Exotic Engrams. You can turn in the tokens for some Legendary Raid gear, whilst Exotics are a key factor in reaching the current maximum Power Level of 350 -- so you won’t want to miss out on the chance of getting some of this extra loot.

It’s not enough to simply find each chest in this confusing area, however, as you’ll also need to have the corresponding keys. This guide will go through how to get those elusive chest keys such as the Drain Key, as well as where each chest is located.

How to Get Raid Chest Keys in Destiny 2

The Leviathan Raid chest keys are random drops that are awarded for completing each of the 3 encounters in the Raid, as well as the Raid Boss Calus. This means you can earn a total of 4 keys per character, per week for a total of 12 keys per week. In order to follow this guide, it is recommended to complete the Raid first so you'll have free run of the Raid area. For a comprehensive guide on how to beat the Raid and all the encounters, check out our Leviathan Raid Walkthrough.

How to Find Raid Chests in Destiny 2

It’s worth mentioning that the most effective way to quickly grab each chest is by teaming up with other Guardians -- because there are some tricky enemies standing between you and that sweet loot, which you'll need to take out.

The Lever Puzzle 

The first thing you need to do in order to gain access to the Underbelly is solve the lever puzzle. After loading into the Raid, run halfway across the bridge and drop down to the level below. Continue heading forwards into the room in front of you and you’ll find the lever room.

There are 6 levers in this room, and for reference we’ll refer to them from left to right, as levers 1-6 -- the left-most lever being 1 and the right-most lever being 6. By finding the correct order in which to pull the levers, the way into the Underbelly of the ship will be open to you.

The correct sequence for the levers is 1 5 3 2 4 6.

Coordinate with your Raid crew by assigning each player a lever and pulling accordingly. Try not to take too long between each lever pull, as doing so will reset the sequence and you’ll have to start again. You’ll know if you were successful if you see a text prompt saying “The way is open.”

To enter the Underbelly, head up to the top of the tower. At the back of that area you’ll see some pipes leading to a dark area. Pass through the darkness and make your way across the platforms. You’ll eventually come to a switch which will open a locked door.

Engine Raid Chest

Through here is the engine room, which has the Engine chest locked behind a black and gold door. To open the door you’ll need to coordinate with your Fireteam to eliminate each of the Watcher sentries simultaneously, whilst attempting to remain unseen by their red gaze.

If you’re spotted or you don’t kill them all at the same time, they’ll become invulnerable and the door will be locked. To reset the room, simply leave with you entire team, re-pull the lever and head back in.

Ventilator Raid Chest

From the Engine chest, head down the length of the room and drop down to the area with the large fan blades. Head through a couple of these spinning fans and on your left and there is a platform that you can jump up to which is where the Ventilator chest is located.

Pipeline Raid Chest

Jump back down and continue in the direction you were heading. At the end of the Ventilation room, there is a lever that will activate a fan that shoots you up a few levels. Once you’re at the top, go through the doorway on the left through the white-lit doorway and drop down the red-lit pipe, which brings you to another lever-controlled doorway.

Through the doorway is a room with the same mechanics as the Engine room from earlier. Just simultaneously take out the Watchers without being detected and you’ll unlock a black and gold door which hides the Pipeline chest.

Conduit Raid Chest

Go back to the Pipeline doorway and there is a fan that you can jump into. Ride it up to the next floor and follow the grated walkway towards a lit room. Follow the corridor from that room and you’ll end up back where we rode the first fan up to earlier.

This time take a right through the red-lit doorway. Take the first right and drop down the hole which will lead you to an area with purple sludge that you should recognize as the room before you face the Raid Boss, Calus.

Head straight across from the pipe you emerged from and down to the end of the next pipe. Jump up to the platform to your left and keep going up until you reach the platform with the monitors. Keep moving forward along the platforms, avoiding the mist. Take a left, and follow the corridor around. You end up at the top of a fan shaft, which you should carefully drop down into.

This is another Watcher room -- so you should know what to do. Take ‘em out, then grab the Conduit chest behind the door.

Irrigation Raid Chest

Exit the Conduit room through the main entrance by back tracking from the chest. You’ll see a large metal grate wall with a light above it. Jump up on top of that and carefully make your way across to the other side of the room along the pipes. If you fall down, you’ll die.

Once you’ve made it, drop down to find the Irrigation Chest.

Drain Raid Chest

Now you need to backtrack all the way to the purple sludge room that leads into the Calus boss fight. After emerging into the room, head straight across into the pipe opposite you, which houses the deactivated fan shaft. Jump up three levels to the top and head through the doorway. Take a right and drop down onto the next fan, activate the lever and then ride it right back up to the very top. Head through the doorway, take another left, and then drop down into the red pipe which brings us back to Pipeline area from earlier.

Jump back onto the fan and follow the grated walkway, hugging the left and entering a red-lit pipe. Follow the path until you need to crouch to continue and then take the first left. Continue forwards and drop down into the Drain chest room. Deal with the Watchers once again to unlock the security door and reveal the Drain chest.

Transfer Raid Chest

To make getting to this next chest a little easier, go ahead and reload back into the start of the raid. Now head up to where you first enter the Underbelly, jump across the platforms, and once again take the fan up. Head straight forward up the ramp and follow the path up to another door with a lever. Behind the door is -- you guessed it – another Watcher room. Eliminate the Watchers to unlock the black and gold door to the left of the entrance, and claim the loot from the Transfer chest.

Armory Raid Chest

From the entrance of the Transfer room, head straight across the room and through the doorway overlooked by the gold and purple axe symbol. Crouch down and make your way through the tunnel, and take a left once you reach the end.

Here you’ll find another lever, another doorway, and another room of Watchers for you to blow up. In the back right of the room you’ll find the usual locked door and in this case, the Armory chest.

Aqueduct Raid Chest

To find the last chest, head back through the small tunnel you just came from which leads you into the Transfer room. Immediately take a left and keep moving forward through the door beneath a red light. Jump up onto the platforms and then turn around and head forwards. On your right you’ll see a red-lit doorway -- follow the ramp up to a room with a blue glow, head through the door at the back of the room. Take a left turn and a right, then on your left is a raised platform. Hop up onto the platform and head to the back of the room to find the Aqueduct chest.


Thanks to Arekkz for finding these! If you need more help finding the Raid chests, check out the video he made on his YouTube channel.

This is every Raid chest we know about right now but if you know of anymore, let us know in the comments section below. And for more on Destiny 2, check out our Destiny 2 Guides!

Divinity Original Sin 2 Mordus Basement Puzzle Solution,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/d/i/v/divcov1-475b8.jpg y1p18/divinity-original-sin-2-mordus-basement-puzzle-solution Fri, 22 Sep 2017 14:37:34 -0400 Ty Arthur

While there's loads of combat, conversation options, and hidden items to be found in Divinity: Original Sin 2, the game goes a step further and throws in some puzzles that have to be solved by good old fashioned trial-and-error, rather than having a high stat or skill.

One of these puzzles has players consistently stumped if they don't put all their abilities to use. When you reach Driftwood, there's a seemingly unsolvable puzzle in the basement of Mordus' house during the A Taste Of Freedom quest. Below we walk you through the solution, which requires a little ingenuity and a special Source power.

How to Solve the Divinity: Original Sin 2 Mordus Puzzle

Eventually in Mordus' basement, you come across a room covered in pressure plates and a door that can't be opened. Clearly there's a pattern where you need to stand on the plates -- but unless you got lucky trying out dozens of random combinations, this one is next to impossible to figure out organically... until you activate Spirit Vision, which shows you the solution.

Spirit Vision is acquired during the main quest line and can't be missed, so if you don't have it yet while in the basement, go back and complete some storyline segments. While it counts as a Source power, it doesn't cost any Source points to use, so it can be freely utilized for this puzzle.

A pattern of elemental images will appear over the pressure plates showing where you need specific plates to be pressed. The element for each plate changes based on where you are standing and how many plates are pressed.

For instance, if one person is standing on a plate, the nearby plates will be water. If two are standing next to each other, they will change to fire. If three are nearby, it will change to poison. You have to use that changing pattern to get the specific sequence of elements shown in front of the locked door.

 The pattern you are trying to mimic with pressure plates

Even with the elemental abilities highlighted in the air, there's still a major catch though. You need to step on five pressure plates, but you can only have four characters in your party at any one time!

To get this puzzle solved and open the door, unchain your four characters and have them stand on each corresponding pressure plate. Then, set one of the big stone vases on the final spot, since you only have four characters but need to step on five plates. Alternatively, if you have enough heavy objects, you could just set them all on there and not unchain the group at all.

So how do you reach the correct mix of water, fire, and poison markers? The correct pattern (in the 4 X 4 pressure plate grid from left to right) is to place your characters or heavy objects on the spot marked "1" like this:

  • 0010
  • 0101
  • 0100
  • 0001

You can more clearly see what that means in the image below, showcasing the proper positioning of characters and vases. From top to bottom, it should be third position in the first row, second, and fourth position in the second row, second position in the third row, and fourth position in the fourth row.

You should clearly see the water, fire, and poison elements change to match the pattern in front of the door as you place characters/vases.

Once the puzzle is solved, its time to face a very ancient (and very hungry) lich -- good luck!

If you're looking for more Divinity: Original Sin 2 guides, be sure to check out our other tips and tricks for every aspect of this turn-based fantasy experience:

A Guide to Getting Started in Durango: Wild Lands,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinny/3b6666104a0717a92b0068176411de6b.jpg ztcxj/a-guide-to-getting-started-in-durango-wild-lands Fri, 22 Sep 2017 11:34:28 -0400 Stephanie Tang

Post-apocalyptic survival is definitely not a new thing in video games -- particularly since we've long since been beaten to death and antipathy by the zombie craze. And post-apocalyptic dinosaur games are also fast-becoming a thing, with games like ARK and Horizon Zero Dawn already out and making waves. Fueled by a generation and a half that grew up on Jurassic Park, they're pretty damn good and doing great. 

Enter NEXON Korea (a subsidiary of the main NEXON company) working with What! Studio to bring you another hit to add to the roster. Durango: Wild Lands is a mobile MMO spin on the genre, where players are thrown through a time warp into the prehistoric era. Here they must band together to fend off dinosaurs, starvation, and (let's face it) some fast-disintegrating clothes.  

The game hasn't officially released yet, but it is looking good and was already nominated for Best Mobile/Handheld at E3. A limited closed beta ran late last year/early this year, and now it's currently in open beta on the Google Play Store... but only in a select number of countries -- the Philippines, Malaysia, Indonesia, Thailand, Russia, Australia, Brazil, Vietnam, Canada, New Zealand, Sweden, Norway, Denmark, and Finland. 

Unfortunately, the biggest chunks of the gaming markets are sadly out of luck - looks like you've still got some waiting to do. But in the meantime, you can still peruse this beginner's guide to Durango: Wild Lands so you'll be ready to play when the game releases in your region.

Note: For those of you who can play it, keep a charger handy. This game eats your battery like crazy.


Character Creation/Class Choice

The game throws you on a moving train of people where you must choose, almost at random, which character you wish to play as. Each one will have certain bonuses that correspond to a certain play style, but at a glance it can be a little tough to figure out which will be the most applicable to you.

If you're anything like me, you pick the one in the cutest skirt and go on blindly from there. You then learn that you can customize your character's appearance and clothes in a fairly in-depth character creation menu. (Go figure.) This part happens after you choose your class and is fairly standard and self-explanatory. So don't worry -- you'll get the chance to look exactly how you want to look.

If you're not like me and actually want to know what these bonuses are and how they affect you, this is what you need to know:

Seat Class Skill M/F
1 Soldier Melee M
2 Office Worker Building F
3 Job Seeker Defense F
4 Engineer Weapon Crafting M
5 Homemaker Cooking F
6 Soldier Melee F
7 Homemaker Cooking M
8 Attendant Craft Clothing M
9 Office Worker Building F
10 Farmer Farming F
11 Farmer Farming M
12 Attendant Craft Clothing F
13 Engineer Weapon Crafting F
14 Student Gather M
15 Student Gather F
16 Job Seeker Defense M


There are 8 classes and a choice of male/female for both. The class and gender is far more important at this stage of the process, because you can customize appearances almost immediately after.

  • Note: What you choose at the very beginning won't necessarily impact your life choices forever -- if you've got the skill points to spend, you can push them into one path, another, or more than one if you want to. But if you decide to commit right from the beginning, you'll get to where you want to go much more efficiently. 

Here they are, in general order of ease to play/usefulness as a starting character:

Job Seeker

With an extra bonus in Defense, this character gets a boost in several different stats, including HP and defense, and a higher health regen rate. 

Note: A highly recommended class for starting out with, especially in a survivalist game. Choose this one if you want to choose an easier, well-rounded character class. (You may need to ignore the fact that the character's life story is kinda... pathetic.)



Choice 1 if you usually enjoy combat in MMOs. This is fairly straight-forward and allows you to learn a number of attacks very quickly right from the beginning. In spite of the name, it will also give you a boost in learning weapons too. 

Note: Unfortunately you won't get a chance to test out what the combat system actually feels like before you make your character choice. It can feel a little clunky; the game combines timed mobile game controls with an isometric view. However, being good at killing things is handy in any MMO.


This gives you the skills to craft both weapons and tools. No matter what skill you choose to specialize in, you're going to need to have at least some basic tools to work with -- this is in fact the first kind of crafting the game introduces you to!

Note: Another decent choice to start with as a newbie. Whether you like combat, survival, or hunting/gathering, you're not going to get far working with only your bare hands. 


Eating a necessity is dino-land, so it stands to reason that the food that you make also ends up being rather important too. Cook food that can regen your stamina, HP, and eventually provide your character with extra buffs as well.

Note: This class compliments almost everything that you might want to do in this MMO because food is such a necessity to keep you alive and fit. 


Gather resources from the wilds to supplement any kind of crafting; in the beginning of the tutorial you learn to gather dates (and in my case, pretty much never stopped). This skill will help you figure out what ingredients are useful and how to gather them. As you progress, higher and higher-level resources can be gathered.

Note: While important, you will find that you can do a lot of this regardless of whether or not you pump your base stats into this skill. 


Considering how quickly your neat little uniform falls into a torn and ragged mess, this will give you a boost in crafting better clothes that will help maintain your stats and keep you alive. The more your skill increases, the longer your defensive gear lasts.

Note: Extra nice to have if you're anything like me and enjoy being a pack rat because you are able to increase carry capacity. Also nice to have if you're like me and blunder into rivers without looking too closely and soak yourself. While handy, this skill is starting to get a little niche according to play style. 

Office Worker

This character gives a crafting boost in building - houses, villages, and all the stuff that you can make inside (e.g. Furniture/Workbench, Installation/Decoration) improving areas that have been eroded away and improving human civilization.

Note: If you're just starting out on your first character, this may not be of much use to you to learn the game right away. The boosts this character provides certainly benefits you more later on when you start working with other players to build tents, houses, village parts. 


Once established, farmers can craft farm tools, make fertilizer, and plant crops.

Note: This class bonus is also most beneficial to you later on in your character journey when you've begun to develop a village and to support it agriculturally. To get to this point, you will likely push your skill points elsewhere first. 

There are other skills in the game, but these aren't ones that you gain automatic bonuses in right from the get-go. They are: 

  • Surviving: increases as you gather basic resources, build shelters, and craft tools
  • Slaughter: helps acquire meat, leather, and bone from a dead animal
  • Archery: skill in slings, bows, and crossbows


That's all for now! Good luck creating your character! And stay tuned for more Durango: Wild Lands guides here at GameSkinny.

Senran Kagura: Peach Beach Splash: Character and Costume Unlock Guide,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/c/h/a/character-costume-unlock-guide-header-4787e.jpg oo1vl/senran-kagura-peach-beach-splash-character-and-costume-unlock-guide Fri, 22 Sep 2017 11:13:19 -0400 Joseph Rowe

Senran Kagura: Peach Beach Splash continues the tradition of having unlockable characters and costumes to dress those characters in. But with so many characters and costumes to unlock, it can get a little overwhelming trying to figure it all out. To make things easier for you, I've gone ahead and compiled a list of what characters and costumes you can unlock, and how to do so.

Because Senran Kagura: Peach Beach Splash allows you to play its content in your own order for the most part, it's hard to tell if all of these costumes unlock when you beat a specific school's storyline, or if they just unlock after beating your first/second/etc. storyline. I'm assuming the former, but please let me know in the comments section if you've had a different experience!

Gessen Storyline

Gessen is the sort of main good shinobi school, with Kurokage as their main inspiration. You won't unlock any special characters for beating this storyline in Senran Kagura: Peach Beach Splash, but you will unlock other goodies.

Episode 10

Beating the final episode of this storyline gets you:

  • Gessen Packs (shop)
  • Sexy Knit (shop)
  • School and Gym Combo (shop)
  • Sexy Knit Cat Ears (shop)
  • "Victory for Gessen" illustration (shop)
  • "Let's PARTY PEOPLE!" song (shop)

Hanzo Storyline

The OG good shinobi in Senran Kagura: Peach Beach Splash. Unlike their Gessen counterparts, beating this school's storyline will net you two characters: Daidouji and Naraku.

Episode 4

After beating episode 4 of the Hanzo storyline, you'll unlock both instantly and in the shop:

  • Daidouji
  • Old Hanzo Uniform
  • Daidouji's Outfit (Long and Short versions)
  • Daidouji's Cap
  • Daidouji's Hair
  • Daidouji's Wild Hair
  • Daidouji Badge (shop)
  • Daidouji's Voice Set (shop)

Episode 7

You're in luck if you're a fan of Kagura and Naraku from the second Senran Kagura: this is the episode where you unlock one of them! Along with Naraku, here's what you'll unlock:

  • Naraku
  • Punk Outfit
  • Naraku's Parka (hooded and without hood)
  • Naraku's Bag
  • Naraku's Hair
  • "Otherworldly Aid" illustration (shop)
  • Naraku Badge (shop)
  • Naraku's Voice Set (shop)
Episode 10

Lastly, but certainly not least, you will unlock the following for completing the final episode of the Hanzo storyline:

  • Hanzo Packs (shop)
  • Survival Shirt (shop)
  • Fresh One Piece (shop)
  • Eternal Summer Camisole (shop)
  • "Victory for Hanzo" illustration (shop)
  • "Wet with a Bit of Sweet and Sour!" song (shop)

Hebijo Storyline

Hebijo, a school of evil shinobi with Rin as their teacher. That's why it makes sense that you'd unlock her in Senran Kagura: Peach Beach Splash by playing this storyline! Not only do you get her, you'll also unlock the Hebijo card pack and a myriad of other goodies by beating this section of the game.

Episode 4

After beating episode 4 of the Hebijo storyline, this is what you'll unlock instantly and in the shop:

  • Rin
  • Female Instructor Outfit
  • Rin's Outfit
  • Rin's Glasses
  • Rin's Hair
  • Rin Badge (shop)
  • Rin's Voice Set (shop)
Episode 10

After completing the final episode of the Hebijo storyline, this is what you'll unlock in the shop:

  • Hebijo Packs (shop)
  • Idol One-Piece Outfit (shop)
  • SunShine One-Piece (shop)
  • Bubbly Beach Beachwear (shop)
  • Idol Hairclip (shop)
  • "Victory for Hebijo" illustration (shop)
  • "Merrily Explosive Water Guns!" song (shop)

Crimson Squad

 Similar to the Gessen storyline in Senran Kagura: Peach Beach Splash, you only unlock costumes and other non-character items in the shop after completing this school's storyline. 

Episode 10

Here's what you'll get for completing the Crimson Squad storyline:

  • Crimson Packs (shop)
  • Top Cover T-Shirt (shop)
  • T-Shirt and Hot Pants (shop)
  • Soaking Wet Bloomers (shop)
  • "Victory for Homura" illustration (shop)
  • "Midsummer Hyped Splash!" song (shop)

P-I Finale

The final grouping of missions in the main storyline in Senran Kagura: Peach Beach Splash yields quite a few illustrations for the first few episodes. Then later on, you begin to unlock the Mikagura sisters as well as Jasmine, Asuka's legendary grandmother.

Episodes 3-6

You will only unlock illustrations for beating these episodes, but here's what you'll get:

  • "Mirai as She Dreams" illustration (episode 3)/(shop)
  • "Fall of the Rainbow" illustration (episode 5)/(shop)
  • "Beyond the Rainbow" illustration (episode 5)/(shop)
  • "Sis Makes Her Debut" illustration (episode 6)/(shop)

Episodes 7-9 & 12

This is the start of unlocking the Mikagura sisters in Senran Kagura: Peach Beach Splash. You'll unlock Renka, Kafuru, Hanabi, and their respective items one episode after another:

  • Renka (episode 7)
  • Renka's Outfit
  • Renka's Hair
  • Renka Badge (shop)
  • Renka's Voice Set (shop)
  • Kafuru (episode 8)
  • Kafuru's Outfit
  • Kafuru's Crown
  • Kafuru's Hair
  • Kafuru Badge (shop)
  • Kafuru's Voice Set (shop)
  • Hanabi (episode 9)
  • Hanabi's Outfit
  • Mikagura Outfit
  • Hanabi's Headband
  • Hanabi's Hair
  • Reunion with "That Girl" illustration (shop)
  • Hanabi Badge (shop)
  • Hanabi's Voice Set (shop)

Episode 13

The last episode of the main storyline of Senran Kagura: Peach Beach Splash where you'll unlock anything until the final boss. Here's where you'll get Jasmine, Asuka's grandmother:

  • Jasmine
  • Sayuri's Finery
  • Jasmine's Outfit
  • Sayuri's Hair
  • Jasmine's Hair
  • Sayuri Badge (shop)
  • Jasmine Badge (shop)
  • Jasmine's Voice Set (shop)

Final Battle

You unlock a ton of content in the last episode of the main storyline. You get access to Ryouna and Ryoubi's sister, Ryouki, as well as numerous outfits, songs, clips, etc. Check out what you get:

  • Ryouki
  • Ryouki's One-Piece
  • Ryouki's Outfit
  • Ryouki's Hat
  • Angel's Halo
  • Ryouki's Ribbon
  • Ryouki's Hair
  • Diorama Set - Deserted Island (day/night)
  • PBS Packs (shop)
  • Miss R's Leather Suit (shop)
  • Mr. K's Mask (shop)
  • Miss R's Sunglasses (shop)
  • Ryouki Badge (shop)
  • DJ Ryouki's Entrance Anime (shop)
  • "PEACH BEACH SPLASH!" illustration (shop)
  • "Beyond the Rainbow" song (shop)
  • "Water Sprays on a Deserted Island" song (shop)
  • "Duel! All for One" song (shop)
  • "Sister's Duty" song (shop)
  • "Talk About This and That" song (shop)
  • "Complicated Feelings" song (shop)
  • "Winning Strategy" song (shop)
  • "Heart Vessel" song (shop)
  • "Everyone's True Intentions" song (shop)
  • "Sis is Back... Again!" song (shop)
  • "Damn it! Soaking Wet Kaboom! Rest My Case!" song (shop)
  • "Heated and Drenched! Come On!" song (shop)
  • Ryouki's Voice Set (shop)

V-Road Challenge

Then the final entry for our Senran Kagura: Peach Beach Splash character and costume unlock guide is the first tournament available in the V-Road challenge. This is where you'll unlock the other half of the Naraku and Kagura pair.

School Cup

This is the first of the tournaments you can do for V-Road Challenge. It's super easy to complete so if Kagura's one of your favorites, lucky you! You can get her early on along with the rest of this:

  • Kagura
  • Kagura's Dress
  • True Kagura's Dress
  • True Kagura's Skirt
  • Kagura (accessory)
  • Kagura's Hair
  • Queen Packs (shop)
  • Kagura Badge (shop)
  • Kagura's Voice Set (shop)

DLC Characters

At the time of writing, Senran Kagura: Peach Beach Splash still isn't completely out stateside -- meaning that the DLC isn't available yet. However, the Japanese game's DLC has been out for a while and we can only speculate that we'll likely get these characters as well:

  • Bashou (New Wave)
  • Honoka (Dead or Alive)
  • Marie Rose (Dead or Alive)
  • Ayane (Dead or Alive)
  • Super Sonico (Super Sonico)
  • Ryomo Shimei (Ikkitousen)
  • Kan-u Uncho (Ikkitousen)
  • Sonsaku Hakufu (Ikkitousen)
  • Ryofu Hosen (Ikkitousen)


And that's all of the characters you can unlock so far along with a list of the likely DLC we'll see for Senran Kagura: Peach Beach Splash soon. Which of the unlockable characters is your favorite? I have two: Daidouji and Rin. I love their rivalry and am a sucker for Jojo knockoffs.

Want more SK: PBS content? Check out my review, tips and tricks guide, and leveling guide for more knowledge to fill that Soaking Wet gauge!

The Best Lone Wolf Build for Divinity: Original Sin 2,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/d/o/s/dos2-banner-c492c.png wta2t/the-best-lone-wolf-build-for-divinity-original-sin-2 Fri, 22 Sep 2017 11:03:46 -0400 Kengaskhan

Divinity: Original Sin 2 is one of the best co-op RPGs to come out in recent years, allowing up to 4 players to play together any way they want. However, if you prefer flying solo, you can do that too, because the game offers a Lone Wolf talent for you to use with your character!

The Lone Wolf talent doesn't restrict you to just one character in your party, and you'll be able to have at most one other companion with you. But bear in mind that a party of two will need to employ a very different set of tactics than a party of four will. 

If you know you want to play a Lone Wolf character, some builds will be better than others. In this Divinity Original Sin 2 guide, we'll go over the best build for lone wolfing the game. I hope you like Summoning!

Best Race for a Lone Wolf Build

If you want to go it alone, your best race options are Human and Elf. And I'd personally recommend creating a custom character, since Dome of Protection is an excellent skill to have.

Humans get +2 Initiative -- and though Lone Wolf forces you to run with a smaller party, their Encourage skill does affect summons.

Elves, on the other hand, get Cannibalize and Flesh Sacrifice. Cannibalize isn't especially helpful for Lone Wolves, but Flesh Sacrifice is a great racial skill that will net you more AP to work with in combat. You may not get much benefit from the damage boost, though. 

If you've read our Divinity 2 character creation guide, you know that Elves can also acquire a few skills for free without having to use any skill points -- so if you want to get an edge in the early game that will help you wander the lonesome road, Elf will probably be the way to go. 

Best Attributes for a Lone Wolf Build

To start off with your loner character, you're going to want 14 Constitution and 12 Wits. These will be your most important attributes for the rest of the game.

Constitution is obviously important for not dying, but Wits provides Initiative -- a vital stat for Tactician mode. As the initial combat round will shape the flow of the fight, you'll want to go first whenever possible. 12 Constitution should be enough to start out with if you want to throw a few points elsewhere, but you'll want to bump it up to 14 pretty early on.

The rest of your attribute points should be spent as you need them either to fulfill stat requirements or to support any other skills you decide to pick up. Note that your summons do not scale with Intelligence -- they only care about their summoner's level and Summoning skill.

Best Abilities for a Lone Wolf Build

As you probably already know, the classes don't really mean anything -- so there's no "best class" for the Lone Wolf player if you customize your abilities, skills, and talents out of the class presets. You could pick any class you wanted, then change it all to fit this build. 

With that in mind, the best ability for a Lone Wolf to focus on is Summoning. You want to get 10 points into Summoning as soon as possible -- which is incredibly easy, since every point you invest into a Combat Ability is doubled by the Lone Wolf talent.

Not only will most of your skills scale directly off of your Summoning ability, butyour Conjure Incarnate skill will also call forth a menacing Colossal Incarnate at Summoning 10 -- and it's superior in every way to the old one.

Realistically, you'll want your Summoning ability to be as high as possible, but you're also going to need to branch out a bit. You'll absolutely want 2 points in Necromancy, in order to learn the Raise Bone Widow skill -- it's a very powerful summon that scales with your Summoning ability, despite being a Necromancy skill.

You'll also want to pick up at least one Tier 2 Infusion skill, which will require 2 points in their respective elemental ability.

You can also invest some points into the Leadership skill, as the aura also benefits your summoned creatures.

The Civil Abilities you choose to focus on is pretty much up to you, but Lucky Charm is always a good choice.

Best Skills for a Lone Wolf Build

Since you'll be starting the game with only the Summoning ability, your starting skill choices are very easy: Conjure Incarnate, Elemental Totem, and Farsight Infusion.

After that, you'll obviously want to keep focusing on Summoning skills, and you'll want to focus on crowd control and support, as your summons represent the bulk of your damage. Aerotheurge and Hydrosophist are great for both.

Best Talents for a Lone Wolf Build

Obviously, your starting talent is going to be Lone Wolf -- and to be honest, you don't really need any other talents besides that one because Summoners aren't particularly talent-hungry.

The only other necessary talent you'll take will be All Skilled Up at level 3, as it'll get you that much closer to having 10 points in Summoning.

After that, it's pretty much up to you and what skills you branch out into.

Best Companions for a Lone Wolf Build

Regardless of who your companion is, they want to get the Lone Wolf talent as soon as possible. If it's another player, they can take it when they create their character. Otherwise, your companion will have to wait until level 3.

As for the rest of your companion's build, they're probably best off just mirroring you as a Summoner and investing points into whatever optional Combat and Civil Abilities you don't have.

If you (or the other player) decides to take the character in another direction, they might want to focus on crowd control, tanking, and support, with a few points in Leadership.


If you have any suggestions for the build (or your own best Lone Wolf builds), I'd love to hear them -- so leave a comment below! But before you dive back into the game, check out the rest of our Divinity: Original Sin 2 guides for more tips and tricks:


Senran Kagura: Peach Beach Splash: Trophy Guide,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/t/r/o/trophy-list-f038c.jpg 7mwex/senran-kagura-peach-beach-splash-trophy-guide Fri, 22 Sep 2017 10:48:34 -0400 Joseph Rowe

Senran Kagura: Peach Beach Splash is finally here, and there's a wave of trophies and achievements that are waiting for you to collect them.  If you want to earn your completionist badge and nab every single trophy in the game, this guide has everything you need to know! We've listed out all the trophies you'll find in this fan service fest, along with some tips on how to get them. 

Bronze Trophies

Most of the trophies available in Senran Kagura: Peach Beach Splash are bronze. These are also the easiest to get for the most part. Most of them involve leveling your characters, guns, or cards.

Some involve simply opening card packs or collecting cards (with duplicates counting towards the goal). Two of them are achieved by playing around in the dressing room. Two will come from Squirmy Finishes. The rest you can earn by playing the game and achieving Soaking Wet mode, reviving allies, and finishing enemies with melee attacks, cards, or water guns.

  • Welcome to Peach Beach Splash: Cleared the tutorial
  • My Dearest Girl: Raised 1 character to MAX level
  • Growing Strong: Raised 5 characters to MAX level
  • Up and Ready: Raised 10 characters to MAX level
  • Rifle Ruler: Raised the assault rifle to MAX level
  • Shotgun Shogun: Raised the Shotgun to MAX level
  • Grenade Guru: Raised the Grenade Launcher to MAX level
  • Rocket Ranger: Raised the Rocket Launcher to MAX level
  • Super Sniper: Raised the Sniper Rifle to MAX level
  • Handgun Honcho: Raised the Handgun to MAX level
  • Dual-gun Diva: Raised the Dual Handguns to MAX level
  • Spray Gun Specialist: Raised the Spray Gun to MAX level
  • Minigun Master: Raised the Minigun to MAX level
  • Shower Gun Shaman: Raised the Shower Gun to MAX level
  • Skilled: Raised 5 skills to MAX level
  • Extra Skilled: Raised 10 skills to MAX level
  • Too Skilled: Raised 30 skills to MAX level
  • Pet Owner: Raised 1 pet to MAX level
  • Pet Lover: Raised 3 pets to MAX level
  • Pet Breeder: Raised 5 pets to MAX level
  • Go Easy: Played Touch Mode in the Dressing Room
  • Make it Rain: Played Water Gun Mode in the Dressing Room
  • Squirmy Maniac: Watched 3 Squirmy Finishes
  • Squirmy Master: Watched all Squirmy Finishes
  • Soaking Private: Achieved Soaking Power-Up State 10 times *inc. Multiplayer
  • Soaking Corporal: Achieved Soaking Power-Up State 50 times *inc. Multiplayer
  • Nursing Degree: Performed Ally Revival 10 times *inc. Multiplayer
  • Card Maniac: Opened 25 Card Packs
  • Card Master: Opened 50 Card Packs
  • Water Guns Win: Defeated 100 playable opponents with a Water Gun *inc. Multiplayer
  • Rulebreaker!: Defeated 100 playable opponents with melee attacks *inc. Multiplayer
  • These Aren't Ninja Arts: Defeated 100 playable opponents with skills *inc. Multiplayer
  • Say Hello to My Little Friend:  Defeated 100 playable opponents with a pet *inc. Multiplayer
  • Card Scrub: Collect 250 total Skill Cards
  • Card Pro: Collect 500 total Skill Cards
  • Card Professor: Collected 750 total Skill Cards
  • Card Collector: Collected 1,000 total Skill Cards

Silver Trophies

These are the second most common of the Senran Kagura: Peach Beach Splash trophies, and the difficulty of getting them kicks up just a little bit. All of them -- except Soaking Sergeant -- are obtained either by completing the main storyline sections (minus the finale) or the first three V-Road challenges.

  • Towards Graduation: Completed the Hanzo National Academy Chapter
  • Nothing There: Completed the Homura's Crimson Squad Chapter
  • World, Meet Super Ninja: Completed the Gessen Girls' Academy Chapter
  • My Best Mate: Completed the Hebijo Clandestine Girls' Academy Chapter
  • School Cup is Mine: Cleared the 1st League in the V Road Challenge
  • Honey Cup is Mine: Cleared the 2nd League in the V Road Challenge
  • Queen Cup is Mine: Cleared the 3rd League in the V Road Challenge
  • Soaking Seargant: Achieved Soaking Power-Up State 100 times *inc. Multiplayer Matches

Gold Trophies

There are two gold trophies in Senran Kagura: Peach Beach Splash. Luckily, they're not too difficult to get. All you have to do is complete the main single player storyline and beat the last tournament of the V-Road challenges.

  • Over the Rainbow: Completed the Final Splash Chapter
  • Venus Cup is Mine: Cleared the 4th League in the V Road Challenge

Platinum Trophies

There's only one of these bad boys on this list and the way to get it is simple: own every other trophy!

  • Marvelous: Obtained all the Trophies

Hidden Trophies

There are two hidden trophies currently in Senran Kagura: Peach Beach Splash, but I have yet to unlock them in my playthroughs. As soon as I do, I will come back and update this list!


How many trophies have you unlocked in Senran Kagura: Peach Beach Splash? Which are giving you the most difficulty? I know I'm having a hard time landing melee kills.

If you want more Senran Kagura: Peach Beach Splash content, check out my review, our tips and tricks guide, and our leveling guide!


Divinity Original Sin 2 Skill List For All Schools,h_360,w_640/e_sharpen:100/f_auto,fl_lossy,q_auto/v1/gameskinnyc/c/o/v/cov1-e0b07.jpg nyu5d/divinity-original-sin-2-skill-list-for-all-schools Fri, 22 Sep 2017 10:38:10 -0400 Ty Arthur

More than 100 different skills are available to your Divinity: Original Sin 2 character, creating an absurd range of character builds focused on anything from teleportation to summoning to constantly knocking down and stunning enemies.

Below we list out absolutely every single base skill in the game across all 10 schools, including those created by combining books from different schools. Wondering how to craft some of those higher level skills instead of finding or buying the skill books? Check out our full skill crafting combination guide for all the information you'll need.

Each entry includes the required level and whether Source points are necessary to utilize the skill. Note that the level column refers to your level in the corresponding skill (Aerothurge, Necromancer, etc.) and not to your overall character level.

Some skills require levels in more than one category and are marked as such (such as required Aerothurge level 1, Hunstman level 1). Keep in mind that some of these skills can be bestowed by items, such as the Teleportation Gloves, and in those cases no skill levels are required. Any skills gained by the Corpse Eater talent, however, do require levels in the relevant skill category.

Don't forget that the negative status effects for a skill are only set on the opponent if their physical or magical armour (depending on the particular status effect) has been lowered to 0. Battle Stomp for instance doesn't actually knock down enemies until their physical armour has been depleted first.

Divinity Original Sin 2 Aerothurge Skills

Skill Level Source Skill Effect
Blinding Radiance Aerothurge1 No Air damage, Blinding Aura 1 turn
Electric Discharge Aerothurge1 No Ranged Air damage, Shocked 2 turns
Favourable Wind  Aerothurge1  No Increased move speed aura 3 turns
Shocking Touch Aerothurge1  No Melee Air damage, Shocked 2 turns
Erratic Wisp  Aerothurge1 
No Teleport when attacked, air resistance +40%
Breathing Bubble  Aerothurge1 
No Ignore clouds and suffocation
Vacuum Touch Aerothurge1 
No Air damage, Suffocation/Silence 1 turn
Vaporize Aerothurge1 
No Remove Petrified/Frozen, turn ground surface into clouds
Smoke Cover Aerothurge1 
No Creating obscuring cloud
Teleportation Aerothurge2 No Teleport target character or item
Dazing Bolt  Aerothurge2 No Area effect air damage, Shocked 1 turn
Nether Swap Aerothurge2 No Two characters swap places
Pressure Spike Aerothurge2 No Condense clouds, douse fires, deal air damage
Uncanny Evasion  Aerothurge2 No Increase dodge and movement speed
Apportation Aerothurge2 No Transport pickable items to inventory
Vacuum Aura  Aerothurge2
1 Air damage, Silence/Suffocation aura
Mass Breathing Bubbles  Aerothurge2
1 Allies ignore clouds/Suffocation
Evasive Aura Aerothurge2
1 Dodging/move speed increased in aura
Blessed Cloud Smoke Aerothurge2
2 Invisibility cloud
Chain Lightning Aerothurge3 1 Air damage forks up to 8 times
Tornado Aerothurge3 No Moves randomly across battlefield, clearing status effects and revealing invisibility
Superconductor Aerothurge3 No Area air damage, Shocked 1 turn
Closed Circuit